Swarthmore College Catalogue, 1970-1971

1970-71

ÄTALOCUE ISSUE

SWARTHMORE
OLLEGE BULLETIN
I

8

I

P L E A S E U S E IN THE UJSBAAV

SWARTHMORE COLLEGE
lu

BULLETIN

C A TA LO G U E ISSUE ■ 1970-1971

Volume LXVIII

■

Number 1

■

September 1970

DIRECTIONS FOR CORRESPONDENCE
SWARTHMORE COLLEGE, SWARTHMORE, PA. 19081
Robert D. Cross, President

GENERAL COLLEGE POLICY
ADMISSIONS AND SCHOLARSHIPS

William D. Quesenbery, Jr.
Dean of Admissions

r e c o r d s , t r a n s c r ip t s a n d c a t a l o g u e s

FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Edward K. Cratsley, Vice-President
G. Caroline Shero, Associate Controller

CAREER PLANNING AND PLACEMENT

ALUMNI

a f f a ir s

AND PUBLIC RELATIONS

GENERAL INFORMATION

John M. Moore, Registrar

Judith Katustin Katz,
Director
Joseph B. Shane,
Vice-President
Maralyn Orbison Gillespie,
Director of News Office

The B u l l e t in , of which this publication is Volume LXVIII, No. 1, is published
in March, May, July, September, October, and twice in December and January
by Swarthmore College, Swarthmore, Pennsylvania 19081.
Photographs by Grant Heilman, Walter Holt and William J. Keller, Inc.
(Printed in U. S. A.)

2

T A B L E OF C O N T E N T S
CALENDAR 5
I

II

INTRODUCTION 9
EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES 12
ADMISSION 21
EXPENSES 26
FINANCIAL AID 28

III

COLLEGE LIFE 43
STUDENT COMMUNITY 48

IV

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM 55
FACULTY REGULATIONS 70
DEGREE REQUIREMENTS 74
AWARDS AND PRIZES 77
FELLOWSHIPS 79

V

VI

V II

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION 81
Art 83
Mathematics 134
Astronomy 88
Modern Languages
Biology 90
and Literatures 139
Black Studies 96
Music 152
Chemistry 98
Philosophy 156
Classics 101
Physical Education for Men 161
Economics 106
Physical Education for Women 162
Education 110
Physics 164
Engineering 111
Political Science 167
English Literature 121
Psychology 174
History 126
Religion 178
International Relations 132
Linguistics 133
Sociology and Anthropology 182
THE CORPORATION and BOARD OF MANAGERS 191
ALUMNI OFFICERS and COUNCIL 194
FACULTY 196
ADMINISTRATION 209
VISITING EXAMINERS 216
DEGREES CONFERRED 218
AWARDS AND DISTINCTIONS 222
ENROLLMENT STATISTICS 224
INDEX 225
PLAN OF COLLEGE GROUNDS 229

3

370180

SEPTEM BER
SUN

MON

WED THU

TUE
1

6

7

8

13
27

14
21
28

15
22
29

SUN

MON

20

2
9
16

23

3
10
f t

24

MAY
FRI

SAT

4
11
18
25

5
12
19

26

SUN MON
2
9
16

23
30

30

3
10
17
24

5

WED THU

7
14

1
8

WED

THU

FRI

SAT
1

Sun

MON

4
11
18
25

5
12
19
26

6

7
14
21
28

8

2
9

3

16

18

12
19

25

26

27

MON

NOVEM BER
TUE W£0 ftiu FRI
4
5
6
3

11

¿UN

1
8

%■, 2

21
28

10
17
24

11
18
25

15
22
29

9
16
23
30

SUN

MON TUE

SUN MON
6

13

15
22
29

24

29

30

31

20
27

SAT

SUN MON

13
20
27

17

14
21
28

4

6
13
20

27

7

2
9

14
21
28

15
22
29

16
23
30

3
10
17
24
31

3
10
17
24
31

4
11
18
25

WED

5
12
19
26

6
13
20
27

SAT

4

5

11

12

18
25

19

SUN MON
1
2
8
9
15
16
22
23
29
30

TUE

WED

3

4
11
18
25

26

1
8
15
22
29

SAT
2
9
16
23
30

SUN MON
5
12
19
26

•6
13
20
27

7
14
21
28

1
8
15
22

TUE

WEO

2
9
16
23

3
10
17
24

THU
4
11
18
25

FRI

SAT

5
12
19
26

6
13
20
27

SUN MON

3

4

10
17
24
31

11
18
25

7
14
21
28

1
8
15
22
29

TUE
2
9
16
23
30

WED

3
10
17
24
31

THU
4
11
18
25

FRI

SAT

5
12
19
26

6
13
20
27

SUN MON
7
14
21
28

1
8
15
22
29

4
11
18
25

5
12
19
26

TUE
6
13
20
27

4

WED THU
7
14
21
28

23

24

25

30

31

SUN

THU

FRI

SAT

3

4

6

MON : TUE WED
1
2
7
8
9

10
17
24

10

11

5
0

13

14

15

18

20

21
28

22
29

17
24

27

7
14
21
28

WED

1
8
15
22
29

TUE
5
12
19
26

WED
6
13
20
27

TUE
2
9
16
23
30

1
8
15
22
29

FRI
2
9
16
23

30

SAT

SUN MON

TUE

3
10
17
24

5
12
19
26

6
13
20
27

7
14
21
28

1
8
15
22
29

14
21

27

28

16
23

23
30

10
17
24
31

26

MON .TUE’ WED
1
8
6
7
13 1 4 15
20
22
21
27 2 8 2 9

THU

FRI

SAT

SUN

MON

TUE

5
12
19
26

6
13
20
27

7
14
21
28

2
9
16
23
30

3
10
17
24

4
II
18

SUN

MON

THU

FRI

SAT

1
8

2
9
16

3

15
22
29

THU
2
9
16
23
30

THU
7
14
21
28

WED THU
3
4
11
10
17
18
24
25

WED

13
20

22
29

25

19
26

FRI
3
10

SAT
4
11

MARC H

Y
SUN
5
12
19

THU
2
9
16
23
30

THU
2
9

16

17

18

23
30

24

25

31

A P R II .
WED THU

5
12
19
26

25

6
13
20
27

FRI

SAT
1

7

8

14
21
28

15
22
29

FRI

SAT

5

6
13
20
27

MAY
TUÉ ÇWED THU
4
2
3
9
10
11
16 17 1 8
24
25
23
30
31

FRI

SAT

3

4

10
17
24

11

7

8

18
25

14
21
28

15
22
29

SUN

MON TUE

15
22
29

SAT
2
9
16
23
30

FRI
5
12
19
26

SAT
6
13
20
27

1

12
19
26

JU N E
FRI

1
8

4

5

11
18

12
19

20

25

26

27

SUN

MON THE

6
13

WED THU

FRI

SAT

2

3
10

1
8

9

15

16

17

22

23
30

24

29

WED THU

FRI

SAT
1

5
12

7
14
21

22

28

29

i 7
14
21
28

JU LY

2
9

3

4
11
18
25

16

10
17

23
30

24
31

SUN :

mon

19
26

6
13
20
27

8
15

A U G U ST

D EC !E M B E R

A F R IIL
SUN MON

TUE

8
15

19
26

NOVEM BER

M ARC:h
SUN MON

10
17
24
31

SAT
1

18

OC T O B E R

F E E IR U A R Y
SUN MON

5
12
19
26

7
14
21
28

7

17

<> E P T E M I B E R

THU ■ FRI
7
14
21
28

SAT

4
11
18
25

JI U L
WED

FRI

6

10

AU GU S T
FRI

1971
TUE

FRI

3

6
13
20
27

JA N U A RY
SUN MON

TUE

THU

2
9
16

23
30

THU

5
12

FEBRUARY

WED

5
12
19
26

11
18
25

DECEM BER
1
8

TUE
1

8

7
14
21
28

23

WED THU

20
27

15
22
29

31

15
22

12
19
26

13

TUE WED
4
11

J U N IE
FRI ' SAT
2
3
9
10
16
17

6
13
20

4

JAN U ARY

TUE

O CTO B ER
TUE

1972

1971

1970

FRI

SAT

3

4

10
17
24
31

11
18
25

TUE

1
6 '

13
20

27

7
14
21
28

8
15
22
29

WEO
2
9

THU
3
10

16

17

23
30

24
31

FRI

SAT

4
11

12

18
25

19
26

5

C ollege C alendar

1970
September 15-19
September 18
September 19
September 21
October 2, 3
November 26-28
December 4, 5
December 11
December 18

Fall Semester
Freshman placement days
Meeting of Honors students
Registration
Classes and Honors seminars begin
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Thanksgiving recess
Annual Meeting of the Board of Managers
Registration for spring semester
Christmas vacation begins, 6:00 p.m.

1971
January 4
January 4-11
January 12
January 13
January 18
January 18
January 29

Christmas vacation ends, 8:30 a.m.
Reading period for Course students (at the option of the
instructor)
Classes and seminars end
Meeting of Honors students
Honors seminars begin for spring semester
Mid-year examinations begin
Mid-year examinations end

Spring Semester
February 1
March 5, 6
March 19
March 29
April 2,3
April 30
May 3-14
May 10
May 14
May 17
May 19
May 22
May 27-29
May 29
May 31-June 2
June 4, 5
June 5
June 6
June 7

Classes begin
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Spring vacation begins, 6:00 p.m.
Spring vacation ends, 8:30 a.m.
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Honors seminars end
Reading period for Course students (at the option of the
instructor)
Written Honors examinations begin
Classes end
Enrollment in classes for fall semester
Course examinations begin
Written Honors examinations end
Oral Honors examinations
Course examinations end
Senior comprehensive examinations
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Alumni Day
Baccalaureate Day
Commencement Day

5

C ollege C alendar ( Tentative)

1971
September 14-18
September 17
September 18
September 20
October 1,2
November 25-27
December 3 ,4
December 17

Fall Semester
Freshman placement days
Meeting of Honors students
Registration
Classes and Honors seminars begin
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Thanksgiving recess
Annual Meeting of the Board of Managers
Christmas vacation begins, 6:00 p.m.

1972
January 3
January 3-11
January
January
January
January
January

11
12
17
17
28

Christmas vacation ends, 8:30 a.m.
Reading period for Course students (at the option of the
instructor)
Classes and seminars end
Meeting of Honors students
Honors seminars begin for spring semester
Mid-year examinations begin
Mid-year examinations end

Spring Semester
January 31
March 3 ,4
March 17
March 27
A pril 7, 8
April 28
May 1-12
May 8
May 12
May 15
May 17
May 19
May 25-27
May 27
May 29-31
June 2,3
June 3
June 4
June 5

Classes begin
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Spring vacation begins, 6:00 p.m.
Spring vacation ends, 8:30 a.m.
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Honors seminars end
Reading period for Course students (at the option of the
instructor)
W ritten Honors examinations begin
Classes end
Enrollment in classes for fall semester
Course examinations begin
W ritten Honors examinations end
Oral Honors examinations
Course examinations end
Senior comprehensive examinations
Meeting of the Board of Managers
Alumni Day
Baccalaureate Day
Commencement Day

Note: The academic calendar is being studied by a three college committee
with representatives from Bryn Mawr, Haverford, and Swarthmore. Since this
committee may propose a common calendar for 1971-72, the calendar printed
here should be regarded as subject to change.

6

I
IN T R O D U C T IO N TO
SW ARTHM ORE COLLEGE

E D U C A T IO N A L RESOURCES

The McCabe Library

INTRODUCTION TO
SW ARTHM ORE COLLEGE
Swarthmore College, founded in 1864 by members of the Religious
Society of Friends, is a co-educational college occupying a campus of
about 300 acres of rolling wooded land in and adjacent to the borough
of Swarthmore in Delaware County, Pennsylvania. It is a small col­
lege by deliberate policy. Its present enrollment is about 1150 stu­
dents, of whom 525 are women and 625 are men. The borough of
Swarthmore is a residential suburb within half an hour’s commuting
distance of Philadelphia. Because of its location, Swarthmore College
students are able to combine the advantages of a semi-rural setting
with the opportunities offered by Philadelphia. Especially valuable is
the cooperation made possible with three other nearby institutions,
Bryn Mawr and Haverford Colleges and the University of Pennsyl­
vania.
OBJECTIVES AND PURPOSES
In accordance with the traditions of its Quaker background,
Swarthmore students are expected to prepare themselves for full,
balanced lives as individuals and as responsible citizens through ex­
acting intellectual study supplemented by a varied program of sports
and other extra-curricular activities.
The purpose of Swarthmore College is to make its students more
valuable human beings and more useful members of society. It shares
this purpose with other educational institutions, for American educa­
tion is a direct outgrowth of our democratic principles. While a com­
mon purpose underlies all American education, each school and col­
lege and university seeks to realize that purpose in its own way. Each
must select those tasks it can do best. Only by such selection can it
contribute to the diversity and richness of educational opportunity
which is part of the American heritage and the American strength.
9

INTRODUCTION

STANDARDS OF EXCELLENCE
Democracy demands a broad base of intelligent understanding of
issues. It also necessitates a high order of excellence in those who are
destined to become its leaders. Swarthmore can best serve society by
the maintenance of high standards. It is peculiarly fitted by tradition
and performance for this essential role, and it is precisely this readi­
ness to do a particular job well that gives the College its value in the
educational pattern of American democracy.
Education is largely an individual matter, for no two students are
exactly alike. Some need detailed help, while others profit from con­
siderable freedom. The program of Honors study, in which Swarth­
more pioneered, is designed to give recognition to this fact. It is the
most distinctive feature of the College’s educational program. For
many students, it provides an enriching and exciting intellectual expe­
rience. It has as its main ingredients freedom from ordinary class­
room routine and close association with faculty members in small
seminars, concentrated work in broad fields of study, and maximum
latitude for the development of individual responsibility. The Honors
program and the Course program are alternative systems of instruc­
tion for students during their last two years. Both are designed to
evoke the maximum effort and development from each student, the
choice of method being determined by individual need and capacity.
TH E REL IG IO US T R A D I T I O N
Swarthmore College was founded by members of the Religious So­
ciety of Friends, and it seeks to illuminate the life of its students with
the spiritual principles of that Society. Although it has been non-sec­
tarian in control since the beginning of the present century, and al­
though the children of Friends compose a minority of the student
body, the College seeks to preserve the religious traditions out of
which it sprang.
The essence of Quakerism is the individual’s responsibility for
seeking truth and for applying whatever truth he believes he has
found. As a way of life, it emphasizes hard work, simple living, and
generous giving; personal integrity, social justice, and the peaceful
settlement of disputes. The College does not seek to impose on its stu­
dents this Quaker view of life, or any other specific set of convictions
about the nature of things and the duty of man. It does, however,
have the two-fold aim of encouraging conscious concern about such
questions and unceasing re-examination of any view which may be

10

INTRODUCTION

held regarding them. That is the kind of ethical and religious charac­
ter which Swarthmore seeks to develop.
T R A D I T I O N AND CHANGE
A college is never static. Its purposes and policies are always
changing to meet new demands and new conditions. The founders of
Swarthmore would find in it today many features which they never
contemplated when they shaped the College in the middle of the nine­
teenth century. Swarthmore, if it is to remain effective, must be for­
ever changing. The goal is to achieve for each generation, by means
appropriate to the times, that unique contribution and that standard
of excellence which have been the guiding ideals of Swarthmore from
its founding.
In the spring and summer of 1966 a Commission on Educational
Policy and two other special committees were appointed to study var­
ious aspects of the College program and to seek ways of strengthening
the educational experiences of Swarthmore students. Their reports,
including many specific recommendations, were published in the vol­
ume, Critique of a College, which appeared in December 1967. Dur­
ing the rest of the college year these reports and recommendations
were carefully considered by all sections of the College community.
Many of the specific recommendations have been approved and are
being carried into effect.

11

E D U C A T IO N A L RESOURCES
PHYSICAL FAC IL IT IE S
The primary educational resources of any college are the quality
of its faculty and the spirit of the institution. Second to these are the
physical facilities, in particular the libraries, laboratories and equip­
ment.
Laboratories, well equipped for undergraduate instruction and in
some cases for research, exist in physics, chemistry, zoology, botany,
psychology, astronomy, and in civil, mechanical and electrical engi­
neering. The Sproul Observatory, with its 24-inch visual refracting
telescope, is the center of much fundamental research in multiple star
systems. The Edward Martin Biological Laboratory provides facili­
ties for work in psychology, zoology, botany, and pre-medical studies.
The Pierre S. du Pont Science Building, completed in 1960, provides
accommodations for chemistry, mathematics, and physics. Beardsley
and Hicks Halls contain the engineering laboratories.
The Language Laboratory in Beardsley Hall, made possible by a
contribution from the James Foundation of New York, was installed
in 1964. It provides stations for 35 students and has the equipment
for effective use in language teaching.
The Arts Center, opened in 1961, contains the Paul M. Pearson
Experimental Theater, the Florence Wilcox Lobby for art exhibitions,
the Dorothy Hunt Music Room, and studios for various arts and crafts.
The Computer Center, located in Beardsley Hall, is furnished with
an IBM 1130 computer and appropriate supporting equipment. It is
available to students and faculty members for research and instruc­
tion, and its use by students is encouraged. Students and faculty
members also have access to the facilities of the Haverford-Bryn
Mawr Computer Center, including an IBM 360/44 computer, which
is connected by telephone with the Swarthmore Center.
The Bartol Research Foundation of the Franklin Institute, which is
12

EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

also located on the campus, enjoys an international reputation for its
basic research activities in physics, particularly in the fields of nuclear
physics, cosmic radiation, solid state physics, and astronomy. Through
its affiliation with Thomas Jefferson University, Bartol offers a program
of study leading to the Ph.D. degree.
The Thomas B. and Jeannette E. L. McCabe Library contains read­
ing rooms, offices and the major portion of the College library collec­
tion. Total College library holdings amount to 350,000 volumes. Some
12,000 volumes are added annually. About 1,500 periodicals are
received regularly. The general collection, including all but the
scientific and technical books and journals, is housed in the library
building, situated on the front campus. The Du Pont Science Library,
new in 1960, houses some 26,100 books and journals in chemistry,
engineering, mathematics and physics. The library is definitely a
collection of books and journals for undergraduate use. The demands
of Honors work, however, make necessary the provision of large
quantities of source material not usually found in collections main­
tained for undergraduates. It is a point of library policy to try to
supply, either by purchase or through inter-library loan, the books
needed by students or members of the faculty for their individual
research.
SPECIAL COL LE CTI ONS
In addition, the library contains certain special collections—the
British Americana collection, the Wells Wordsworth and Thomson
collections, the Auden collection, the Bathe collection of technologi­
cal history, and a collection of the issuances of 565 private presses.
A number of special features enrich the academic background of
the college. Among these are the following:
The Friends Historical Library, founded in 1871 by Anson Lapham, is one of the outstanding collections in the United States of man­
uscripts, books, pamphlets, and pictures relating to the history of the
Society of Friends. The library is a depository for records of Friends
Meetings belonging to Baltimore, Philadelphia, and other Yearly
Meetings. More than 3,200 record books have been deposited; many
of them have been reproduced on microfilm, for which four reading
machines are available. The William Wade Hinshaw Index to
Quaker Meeting Records indexes the material of genealogical interest
in the records of 307 meetings in various parts of the United States.
Notable among the other holdings are the Whittier Collection (first
13

EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

editions and manuscripts of John Greenleaf Whittier, the Quaker
poet), the Mott Manuscripts (over 400 autograph letters of Lucretia
Mott, antislavery and women’s rights leader), and the Hicks Manu­
scripts (more than 300 letters of Elias Hicks, a famous Quaker min­
ister) . The Library’s collection of books and pamphlets by and about
Friends numbers approximately 30,000 volumes. About 93 Quaker
periodicals are currently received. There is also an extensive collec­
tion of photographs of meetinghouses and pictures of representative
Friends, as well as a number of oil paintings, including two versions
of “The Peaceable Kingdom” by Edward Hicks. It is hoped that
Friends and others will consider the advantages of giving to this Library
any books and family papers which may throw light on the history of
the Society of Friends.
The Swarthmore College Peace Collection is of special interest to
research students and others seeking the records of the Peace Move­
ment. The personal papers of Jane Addams of Hull House, Chicago,
(approximately 10,000 items) formed the original nucleus of the Col­
lection, which now contains documentation on the history of the or­
ganized peace movement from its beginnings circa 1815 to the present
time, as well as correspondence and writings of many workers for
international peace and arbitration. The Collection includes files of
some 1,200 peace periodicals published in the United States and
abroad over the past 150 years; approximately 154 such periodicals
in eleven languages are currently received from twenty-one countries.
This collection is the official depository for the archives of leading
peace organizations in the United States. A more nearly complete
description of the Collection will be found in the Guide to the Swarth­
more College Peace Collection, published by the College and avail­
able on request.
The Bronson M. Cutting Memorial Collection of Recorded Music
was established at Swarthmore College in 1936 by a gift of approxi­
mately four thousand phonograph records, a radio-phonograph, books
and musical scores, from the family of Bronson Murray Cutting, late
Senator from New Mexico. Its object is to make the best recorded
music available to the undergraduates, faculty, and friends of Swarth­
more College, in cooperation with the work of the college Department
of Music. The collection is kept up to date with current additions.
The Potter Collection of Recorded Literature, established in 1950
with accumulated income from the William Plumer Potter Public
Speaking Fund, includes a wide variety of recorded poetry, drama
and prose. Among the 700 titles on disc and tape are contemporary
14

EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

writers reading from and discussing their works; full length versions
of Shakespearean plays and other dramatic repertoire; the literature
of earlier periods read both in modern English and in the pronuncia­
tion of the time; British and American ballads; lyrical verse in musi­
cal settings; and recordings of literary programs held at Swarthmore.
These materials are used as adjuncts to the study of literature. The
collection is housed in the McCabe Library.
The Betty Dougherty Spock Memorial Fund, established through the
generosity of friends of the late member of the Class of 1952, pro­
vides income for the purchase of dramatic recordings. These are kept
with the Potter Collection.
SPECIAL FUNDS AND LECTURESHIPS
The William J. Cooper Foundation provides a varied program of
lectures and concerts which enriches the academic work of the col­
lege. The Foundation was established by William J. Cooper, a de­
voted friend of the college, whose wife, Emma Mcllvain Cooper,
served as a member of the Board of Managers from 1882 to 1923.
Mr. Cooper bequeathed to the college the sum of $100,000 and pro­
vided that the income should be used “in bringing to the college from
time to time eminent citizens of this and other countries who are lead­
ers in statesmanship, education, the arts, sciences, learned professions
and business, in order that the faculty, students and the college com­
munity may be broadened by a closer acquaintance with matters of
world interest.” Admission to all programs is without charge.
The Cooper Foundation Committee works with the departments and
with student organizations in arranging single lectures and concerts,
and also in bringing to the college speakers of note who remain in res­
idence for a long enough period to enter into the life of the commu­
nity. Some of these speakers have been invited with the understanding
that their lectures should be published under the auspices of the
Foundation. This arrangement has so far produced sixteen volumes:
Lindsay, Alexander Dunlop. The Essentials of Democracy. Phila­
delphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1929.
Lowes, John Livingston. Geoffrey Chaucer and the Development
of His Genius. New York, Houghton Mifflin Co., 1934.
Weyl, Hermann. Mind and Nature. Philadelphia, University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1934.
America’s Recovery Program, by A. A. Berle, Jr., John Dickinson,
15

EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

A. Heath Onthank . . . and others . . . London, New York, etc., Oxford
University Press, 1934.
Salter, Arthur S. baron. World Trade and Its Future. Philadelphia,
University of Pennsylvania Press, 1936.
Madariaga, Salvador de. Theory and Practice in International Re­
lations. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1937.
Streit, Clarence Kirshman. Union Now; a Proposal for a Federal
Union of the Democracies of the North Atlantic. New York, Harper,
1939.
Krogh, August. The Comparative Physiology of Respiratory Mech­
anisms. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania Press, 1941.
Griffith, Ernest Stacey. The Modern Government in Action. New
York, Columbia University Press, 1942.
Linton, Ralph. The Cultural Background of Personality. New York,
London, D. Appleton-Century Co., 1945.
Wilcox, Clair, Editor. Civil Liberties Under Attack. A series of
lectures given in 1950-51. Philadelphia, University of Pennsylvania
Press, 1951.
Redfield, Robert. Peasant Society and Culture; an Anthropological
Approach to Civilization. Chicago, The University of Chicago Press,
1956.
Weatherford, Willis D., Jr., Editor. The Goals of Higher Educa­
tion. A series of lectures given in the spring of 1958. Cambridge:
Harvard University Press, 1960.
Lovejoy, Arthur Oncken. Reflections on Human Nature. Baltimore:
Johns Hopkins University Press, 1961.
Rhys, Hedley H., Editor. Seventeenth Century Science and the
Arts. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1962.
Brandt, Richard B., Editor. Social Justice. Englewood Cliffs:
Prentice-Hall, 1962.
Pennock, James Roland, Editor. Self-government in Modernizing
Nations. Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall, 1965.
The Arthur Hoyt Scott Horticultural Foundation. About three hun­
dred acres are contained in the College property, including a large
tract of woodland and the valley of Crum Creek. Much of this tract
has been developed as an horticultural and botanical collection of
16

EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES

trees, shrubs and herbaceous plants through the provisions of the
Arthur Hoyt Scott Horticultural Foundation, established in 1929 by
Mrs. Arthur Hoyt Scott and Owen and Margaret Moon as a memorial
to Arthur Hoyt Scott of the Class of 1895. The plant collections are
designed both to afford examples of the better kinds of trees, shrubs
and herbaceous plants which are hardy in the climate of Eastern
Pennsylvania and suitable for planting by the average gardener, and
to beautify the campus. There are exceptionally fine displays of Jap­
anese cherries, flowering crab apples, magnolias and tree peonies, and
a great variety of lilacs, rhododendrons, azaleas, daffodils, irises,
herbaceous peonies, and hemerocallis. Many donors have contrib­
uted generously to the collections. (For full information see Bulletin
of Swarthmore College, Vol. xxxvii, No. 5.)
The Boyd and Ruth Barnard Fund for the Advancement of Music
at Swarthmore was established in 1964 by two graduates of the Col­
lege, Mr. and Mrs. Boyd T. Barnard of Rosemont, Pennsylvania. The
income from the fund may be used for any activity that contributes to
the advancement of music at the college. It has been used, for exam­
ple, for concerts on the campus, for the purchase of vocal and orches­
tral scores and other musical literature, and to provide scholarships
for students in the Department of Music who show unusual promise
as instrumentalists or vocalists. Since 1966 part of the fund has been
used to bring to the campus two Associates in Performance who di­
rect the chamber music coaching program in the Department of Mu­
sic and give weekly concerts of chamber music.
The Gene D. Overstreet Memorial Fund, given by friends in mem­
ory of Gene D. Overstreet (1924-1965), a member of the Political
Science Department, 1957-1964, provides income to bring a visiting
expert to the campus to discuss problems of developing or moderniz­
ing nations and cultures.
The Benjamin West Lecture, made possible by gifts from members
of the class of 1905 and other friends of the College, is given annually
on some phase of art. It is the outgrowth of the Benjamin West Soci­
ety which built up a collection of paintings, drawings, and prints,
which are exhibited, as space permits, in the college buildings. The
lecture owes its name to the American artist, who was born in a house
which stands on the campus and who became president of the Royal
Academy.

17

A D M ISSIO N

F IN A N C IA L

Magill Walk and Parrish Hall

■a

ADM ISSIO N
Inquiries concerning admission and applications should be ad­
dressed to the Dean of Admissions, Swarthmore College, Swarthmore,
Pennsylvania.
GENERAL STATEMENT
In the selection of students the college seeks those qualities of char­
acter, social responsibility, and intellectual capacity which it is pri­
marily concerned to develop. It seeks them, not in isolation, but as
essential elements in the whole personality of candidates for admis­
sion.
It is the policy of the college to have the student body represent not
only different parts of the United States but many foreign countries,
both public and private secondary schools, and various economic,
social, religious, and racial groups. The college is also concerned to
include in each class sons and daughters of alumni and of members of
the Society of Friends.
Selection is important and difficult. No simple formula will be ef­
fective. The task is to choose those who give promise of distinction
in the quality of their personal lives, in service to the community, or
in leadership in their chosen fields. Swarthmore College must choose
its students on the basis of their individual future worth to society and
of their collective realization of the purpose of the college.
Admission to the freshman class is normally based upon the satis­
factory completion of a four-year secondary school program prepara­
tory to advanced liberal study. Under exceptional circumstances,
students who have virtually completed the normal four-year program
in three years will be considered for admission, provided they meet
the competition of other candidates in general maturity as well as
readiness for a rigorous academic program.
All applicants are selected on the following evidence:
1. Record in secondary school.

21

ADMISSION

2. Recommendations from the school principal, headmaster, or
guidance counselor and from two teachers.
3. Rating in the Scholastic Aptitude Test and in three Achievement
Tests of the College Entrance Examination Board.
4. Personal interview with one of the Deans or an appointed rep­
resentative.
5. Reading and experience, both in school and out.
Applicants must have satisfactory standing in school, and in aptitude
and achievement tests, and should show strong intellectual interests.
They should also give evidence of sturdiness of character, promise of
growth, initiative, seriousness of purpose, and a sense of social re­
sponsibility. As future members of the college community, they
should represent varied interests and backgrounds.
PR EP A RA T IO N
The College does not require a set plan of secondary school courses
as preparation for its program. The election of specific subjects is
left to the student and his school advisers. In general, preparation
should include:
1. Skills: The following skills are essential to success in college
work and should be brought to a high level by study and prac­
tice throughout the preparatory period.
a. The use of the English language with accuracy and effective­
ness in reading, writing, and speaking.
b. The use of the principles of mathematics.
c. The use of one, or two, foreign languages to the point of read­
ing prose of average difficulty. The College encourages stu­
dents to study at least one language for four years, if possible.
2. Subjects: All, or almost all, of the preparatory course should be
composed of the subjects listed in the following four groups.
Variations of choice and emphasis are acceptable although some
work should be taken in each group.
History and Social Studies: African, American, Asian, English,
European, and ancient history; political, social, and economic
problems of modern society.
Literature and Art: American, English, and foreign literature;
music; art.
Natural Science and Mathematics: chemistry, physics, biology,
astronomy; algebra, geometry, trigonometry, and calculus.
22

ADMISSION

Those planning to major in engineering should present work
in chemistry, physics, and four years of mathematics includ­
ing algebra, geometry and trigonometry.
Languages: English, Latin, Greek, German, French, Spanish,
Russian, other European or Oriental languages. Applicants
should present the strongest possible command of at least one
foreign language.
A P P L IC A T I O N S AND EX AMI NA TIO NS
Applications must be initiated prior to January 15, and all appli­
cations must be completed by February 1. A personal information
form will be sent upon request, and this form should be returned
promptly, together with the non-refundable application fee of $20.00.
The College then sends the remainder of the application materials.
Applicants are encouraged to complete their applications to the Col­
lege as early in the fall of their senior year as possible. Although
Swarthmore does not have an “early decision” program, preliminary
readings of completed applications are made at an early date to deter­
mine regional and national award winners.
All applicants for freshman admission are required to take the
Scholastic Aptitude Test and three Achievement Tests given by the
College Entrance Examination Board. English Composition is re­
quired and the other two Achievement Tests should be selected from
two different fields. Applicants for Engineering must take one
Achievement Test in Mathematics.
Applicants should take the Scholastic Aptitude Test in November,
December, or January of the senior year. Candidates who take
Achievement Tests before the senior year may submit the results to
the Admissions Office, but it is strongly recommended that the
English Composition and at least one other Achievement Test be
taken in December or January of the senior year. Neither the
Scholastic Aptitude Test nor the Achievement Tests may be taken
later than January of the senior year.
In 1970-71 these tests will be given in various centers throughout
this country on November 7, December 5, January 9, March 6, April
17, and July 10. The tests will be given abroad on each of these dates
except November 7. Application to take these tests should be made
directly to the College Entrance Examination Board, Box 592, Prince­
ton, New Jersey 08540. A bulletin of information may be obtained
without charge from the Board. Students who wish to be examined
23

ADMISSION

in any of the following western states, provinces, and Pacific areas—
Alaska, Arizona, California, Colorado, Hawaii, Idaho, Montana,
Nevada, New Mexico, Oregon, Utah, Washington, Wyoming, Alberta,
British Columbia, Manitoba, Saskatchewan, Mexico, Australia, and
all Pacific Islands including Formosa and Japan—should address their
inquiries and send their applications to the College Entrance Exam­
ination Board, Box 1025, Berkeley, California 94701. Application
should be made to the Board at least a month before the date on
which the test will be taken.
No additional tests are required of candidates for scholarships. All
applicants who would like to be considered for any of our scholar­
ships should complete their applications at the earliest possible date.
Information concerning financial aid will be found on pages 28-39.
THE IN T E R V I E W
An admissions interview with a representative of the College is a
requirement in making application to Swarthmore. Applicants are ex­
pected to take the initiative in arranging for this interview. Those who
can reach Swarthmore with no more than a half day’s trip are urged
to make an appointment to visit the College for this purpose.* Other
applicants should request the Office of Admissions to arrange a meet­
ing with an alumni representative in their own area. Interviews
should be completed before March 1 of the senior year. Scholarship
applicants should make an effort to have their interviews by January
1. Candidates are not interviewed until the latter part of the junior
year. Candidates will not be able to have campus interviews from
March 1 to May 1 but a tour of the campus may be arranged during
this period. Appointments at the College can be made by calling or
writing the Office of Admissions, 215-KI 4-7900, Ext. 445.
A D M IS S IO N DECIS IONS
Notices of the action of the Admissions Committee will be mailed
about April 15.

♦To reach the College from the New Jersey Turnpike, motorists should leave by Exit 4
(Camden-Philadelphia Interchange). Turn right on Route 73. In about one hundred feet turn
right for Interstate 295 South, and follow signs for Walt Whitman Bridge. After crossing Bridge
follow signs for Philadelphia International Airport, Route 291. Follow Route 291 past Airport
to 420. Turn right on 420 to Baltimore Pike, turn left and proceed to intersection with Route 320.
Turn left and follow signs to the College. From the Pennsylvania Turnpike, take Exit 24
(Valley Forge) on to Interstate 76 (Schuylkill Expressway), take Exit 36 on to Route 320 and
follow it south to the campus.
Swarthmore is on the Penn Central Railroad (Media Suburban Line). It is 21 minutes from
the 30th Street Station, Philadelphia.

24

ADMISSION

ADVANCED PLACEMENT
Freshmen may apply for advanced standing or placement in partic­
ular courses if they have taken college level courses and the Advanced
Placement Tests of the College Entrance Examination Board. Deci­
sions are made by the departments concerned. Every effort is made
to place students in the most advanced courses for which they are
qualified.
A PPL IC ATI ON S FOR TRANSFER
The college accepts a very limited number of transfer students for
enrollment each fall. There are no mid-year admissions. For favor­
able consideration, applicants for transfer must have had a good scho­
lastic record in the institution attended and must present full creden­
tials for both college and preparatory work, including a statement of
honorable dismissal. They must take the Scholastic Aptitude Test
given by the College Entrance Examination Board if this test has not
been taken previously.
As a general practice, transfer students are not admitted to ad­
vanced standing later than the beginning of the sophomore year. Four
semesters of study at Swarthmore College constitute the minimum re­
quirement for a degree, two of which must be those of the senior
year. Applications for transfer must be filed by March 15 of the year
in which entrance is desired. Decisions on these applications are an­
nounced early in June. Only under exceptional circumstances are
students admitted for transfer eligible for financial assistance during
their first year at Swarthmore.

25

EXPEN SES
T U I T I O N AND FEES
Charges for the academic year 1970-71 (two semesters):
Tuition .......................................................................... $2,300
General F e e ....................................................................
210
Board and Room............................................................ 1,135
Total Resident Charges................................. $3,645*
While a general charge for board and room is made, this may be
divided into $635 for board and $500 for room. $48 of the general
fee of $210 has been designated Student Activity Fee. The balance
covers library and laboratory fees, athletic fees, student health serv­
ices and other items.
Payment of one-half of the total sum is due not later than the first
day of classes each semester. Payments received during the first fifteen
days after the beginning of classes will be subject to a one per cent
late payment fee and any payments received after the fifteen-day
period will be subject to a five per cent late payment fee. Bills are
mailed before the opening of each term. Payments should be made
by check or draft to the order of Swarthmore College. A student
is not a registered student at Swarthmore College, nor on any class
roll, until his bill is paid. Correspondence about financial matters
should be addressed to Miss Caroline Shero, Associate Controller.
Students who wish to charge Book Store purchases, laboratory
breakage fees, etc., may do so by maintaining a student deposit ac­
count at the Business Office against which charge checks may be
drawn. Cash withdrawals may also be made. Students will be noti­
fied when overdrafts occur and no cash withdrawals may be made
unless a cash balance is maintained. A minimum deposit of $100.00
♦An advance deposit oi $25 is required of all new students in order to reserve a place in
college for the coming year. A similar deposit of $15 is required of returning students. These
deposits are credited against the bill for tuition, board, and room.

26

EXPENSES

in September is suggested and all students are urged to maintain such
an account for their convenience.
No reduction or refunding of tuition can be made on account of
absence, illness, voluntary withdrawal, or dismissal from college. No
reduction or refund will be made for failure to occupy the room as­
signed for a given term, nor is the general fee refundable. In case of
absence or withdrawal from the college and provided due notice has
been given in advance to the Business Office, there will be a refund of
two-thirds of the board charge for any time in excess of two weeks.
Exceptions will be made for students who are required by the draft
to leave during the course of the academic year. In these cases tui­
tion, general fee, board and room charges will be refunded on a pro
rata basis.
Students engaged in independent projects away from the College
for which regular academic credit is anticipated are expected to
register in advance in the usual way and pay normal tuition. If the
student is away from the College for a full semester no charge for
board, room or general fee will be made but if a student is away only
for a part of a semester, board may be charged on a pro rata basis by
prior arrangement.
TUITION

PAYMENT PLAN

Many of the parents of students may wish to pay tuition, fees, and
residence charges on a monthly basis. Details of a monthly payment
plan offered by the Girard Bank of Philadelphia, Pennsylvania will
be furnished by the College prior to issuance of the first semester’s
bill in September.
ACCIDENT AND SICKNESS INSURANCE
The college makes available both accident and accident and sick­
ness insurance to students through John C. Paige and Co. of Boston,
Massachusetts. Accident coverage alone costs $12.00 per year (12
months) for women, and $18.00 for men. The combined accident
and sickness policy is available at an annual cost of $32.50 for women
and $36.00 for men. At least accident coverage is required of all stu­
dents who participate in intercollegiate athletic activities and the com­
bined accident and sickness policy is particularly recommended. Ap­
plication forms are mailed to all students during the summer

27

F IN A N C IA L A ID
The college assigns scholarships and loans to a substantial number
of students each year. These awards are normally made to entering
freshman students and are renewable for four years. About one
hundred freshman scholarships and loans are awarded carrying
stipends varying from $100 to $4,120 annually. Approximately thirtyfive per cent of the total student body are currently receiving financial
aid from the College, with stipends averaging about $1,500 annually.
Another ten to fifteen per cent are being assisted from sources outside
the College.
All grants are based upon school or college record, and upon finan­
cial need as revealed in confidential statements to the Scholarship
Committee through the agency of the College Scholarship Service.
Entering students seeking financial assistance are required to submit a
Parents Confidential Statement to the Service. This form may be ob­
tained from a secondary school or from the College Scholarship Serv­
ice, P.O. Box 176, Princeton, New Jersey 08540, Box 881, Evans­
ton, Illinois 60204, or P. O. Box 1025, Berkeley, California 94701.
The Scholarship Committee reviews the financial situation and aca­
demic progress of every scholarship holder at the end of each aca­
demic year before renewing the awards. In computing stipends the
committee takes into account an expected family contribution from in­
come and assets, the student’s savings and earnings. These are bud­
geted against a normal total expense of $4,120 for the college year.
This allows $475 for incidental expenses exclusive of travel and for
the total college charge of $3,645, which includes tuition, board and
room, and a very comprehensive college fee. This covers not only the
usual student services (health, library, laboratory) but also attendance
at all campus social, cultural and athletic events, and support of most
club activities. The College reserves the right to adjust college sti­
pends in the event the student receives scholarship assistance from
other sources. First year transfer students are not eligible for scholar­
ship aid.
28

F I N A N C I A L AID

Candidates wishing to apply for scholarships should make the
usual application for admission. All applicants for admission are
given the opportunity to apply for scholarship aid. The candidate’s
status with respect to need for scholarship is not considered to be a
relevant factor in the matter of reaching decisions concerning admis­
sion to the college.
For the academic year 1970-71 the college has granted approxi­
mately $725,000 in scholarships. About two-thirds of that sum was
provided by special gifts and the endowed scholarships listed below.
Funds from the federal government are available for needy students
who are eligible for Educational Opportunity Grants, National De­
fense Student Loans, and the Work-Study program. Applicants are
not required to apply for specific scholarships but will be considered
for all scholarship opportunities either from endowed scholarships or
from general college scholarship funds. Financial need is a require­
ment for all scholarships listed below unless otherwise indicated.

Swarthmore College National Scholarships
Swarthmore College awards each year a number of four-year Na­
tional Scholarships to the men and women entering the freshman
class. All candidates for admission to the College may be considered
for these scholarships. Based on the general plan of the Rhodes Schol­
arships, the awards are made to those candidates who, in the opin­
ion of the Committee of Award, rank highest in scholarship, character
and personality. Whenever feasible, finalists for National Scholar­
ships will be interviewed by the Committee of Award.
The amount of the annual award varies from $100 to $4,120 ac­
cording to the financial need of the winner. In those cases where
there is no financial need, National Scholarships will be awarded on
an honorary basis and carry an annual stipend of $100.

Other Scholarships for Men and Women
The Vivian B. Allen Foundation provides scholarship aid to enable
foreign students to attend Swarthmore College, as part of the Founda­
tion’s interest in the international exchange of students.
The Frank and Marie Aydelotte Scholarship is awarded biennially
to a new student who shows promise of distinguished intellectual at­
tainment based upon sound character and effective personality. The
award is made in honor of Frank Aydelotte, President of the College
from 1921-1940, and originator of the Honors program at Swarth­
more, and of Marie Osgood Aydelotte, his wife.
29

F I N A N C I A L AID

The Curtis Bok Scholarship was established in the College’s Cen­
tennial Year 1964 in honor of the late Philadelphia attorney, author
and jurist, who was a Quaker and honorary alumnus of Swarthmore.
The scholarship is assigned annually to a junior or senior whose qual­
ities of mind and character indicate a potential for humanitarian serv­
ice such as Curtis Bok himself rendered and would have wished to
develop in young people. Students in any field of study, and from any
part of this country or from abroad, are eligible. The scholarship is
renewable until graduation.
The Edward S. Bower Memorial Scholarship, established by Mr.
and Mrs. Ward T. Bower in memory of their son, Class of ’42, is
awarded annually to a man or woman student who ranks high in
scholarship, character, and personality.
The Robert C. Brooks Scholarship was established as a memorial
to Professor Brooks by a number of his former students. It is avail­
able to a major in Political Science in the junior or senior year.
The Edna Pownall Buffington Fund was established during the Col­
lege’s Centennial Year of 1964. The income from this Fund is used to
provide scholarships for a student or students attending Swarthmore
College who are concentrating their studies in the field of the social
sciences and who indicate an interest in the objects or purposes of
the American Friends Service Committee and a desire following their
graduation and post-graduate work to serve in those fields. Awards
are made to students in any of the four classes.
The Chi Omega Scholarship provides an award annually to a mem­
ber of the freshman class. Preference is given to daughters or sons of
members of the fraternity.
The Sarah Antrim Cole Scholarship was founded by her parents in
memory of Sarah Antrim Cole of the Class of 1934. It is awarded to
a graduate of the Worthington High School, Worthington, Ohio.
The N. Harvey Collisson Scholarship established by his family and
the Olin Mathieson Charitable Trust in memory of N. Harvey Collis­
son of the Class of 1922 is awarded to a freshman man or woman. In
making selections the committee will place emphasis on character,
personality and ability.
The Delta Gamma Scholarship is to be awarded to a blind student
at Swarthmore College. In any year in which there is no such candi­
date the fund may be awarded to a freshman woman.
The Francis W. D’Olier Scholarship, in memory of Francis W.
D’Olier of the Class of 1907, is awarded to a freshman man or
30

F I N A N C I A L AID

woman. In making selections, the committee will place emphasis on
character, personality and ability.
The Howard S. and Gertrude P. Evans Scholarship Fund provides
scholarships for worthy students, preference being given to students
showing highest standards in scholarship from high schools of Dela­
ware County, Pennsylvania.
The Flack Achievement Award, presented by the Flack Foundation,
one of whose founders is Hertha Eisenmenger Flack of the Class of
1938, is to be made to a deserving student who, during the first two
years at Swarthmore College, has demonstrated a good record of
achievements in both academic and extracurricular activities while
showing leadership potential as a constructive member of the College.
The donor hopes these awards will go to students of demonstrated
achievement and high potential and who are dedicated to the basic
principles of American democracy and of academic freedom. The
awards are not related to need.
The Stella and Charles Guttman Foundation Scholarships were
established in 1964 by a grant from the Foundation to provide schol­
arships to defray all or part of the cost of tuition and fees for students
who require financial assistance. Preference is given to students of
recognized ability who have completed two academic years of college
and who are contemplating graduate or professional study. The
scholarships are renewable for a second year.
The Rachel W. Hillborn Scholarship was founded by Anne Hillbom Philips of the Class of 1892 in memory of her mother, with the
stipulation that the income shall go to a student in the junior or senior
class who is studying for service in the international field. Preference
will be given to a Friend or to one who intends to contribute to
world understanding through diplomatic service, participation in
some international government agency, the American Friends Service
Committee, or similar activities.
The Kappa Kappa Gamma Scholarship provides an award to a
member of the freshman class, renewable each year. Preference is
given to a relative of members of the fraternity. In the absence of a
relative it may be awarded at the discretion of the College.
The Lafore Scholarship is awarded in memory of John A. Lafore
of the Class of 1895. The college in granting this scholarship will
give preference to qualified candidates who are descendants of Amand
and Margaret White Lafore.
The Ida and Daniel Lang Scholarship established by their son,
31

F I N A N C I A L AID

Eugene M. Lang of the Class of 1938, provides financial assistance
for a man or woman who ranks high in scholarship, character and
personality.
The E. Hibberd Lawrence Scholarship provides for a scholarship
to an incoming freshman man or woman who ranks high in scholar­
ship, character, and personality.
The Christian R. and Mary F. Lindback Foundation Scholarship is
awarded to deserving students from the States of Pennsylvania, New
Jersey, Delaware or Maryland.
The Midwest Scholarships are awarded each year to one man and
one woman applicant who resides in Illinois, Indiana, Iowa, Michi­
gan, Minnesota, Missouri or Wisconsin. Winners will be selected on
the basis of their potential contribution to the academic and extra­
curricular life of the College.
The James E. Miller Scholarship. Under the will of Arabella M.
Miller funds are available annually for students from Delaware
County (with preference for residents of Nether Providence Town­
ship) .
The Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company Scholarship is
awarded annually to a student selected by the Scholarship Committee.
The Howard Osborn Scholarships, established by Howard Osborn
in memory of his mother and father, Viola L. Osborn and Frank
Osborn, are awarded to worthy students of good character who main­
tain satisfactory grades and who require financial assistance.
The Cornelia Chapman Pittenger Scholarship established by her
family and friends is awarded to an incoming freshman man or
woman who ranks high in scholarship, character and personality and
who has need for financial assistance.
The Robert Pyle Scholarship was established by his sisters, Mar­
gery Pyle and Ellen Pyle Groff, in memory of Robert Pyle of the Class
of 1897 and for many years a member of the Board of Managers. Ap­
plicants who show promise of intellectual attainment based upon
sound character and effective personality and who reside in Chester
County are given preference.
The RCA Scholarship, provided by the Radio Corporation of Amer­
ica, is awarded to a young man (or woman who is making a creditable
academic record in the field of science or engineering at the under­
graduate level. The appointment is usually made for the junior or
senior year.
The Reader’s Digest Foundation Endowed Scholarship Fund pro­
32

F I N A N C I A L AID

vides scholarships annually for students selected by the Scholarship
Committee.
The Adele Mills Riley Memorial Scholarship, founded by her hus­
band, John R. Riley, was awarded for the first time for the academic
year 1964-65. Under the provisions of this scholarship, an annual
award subject to renewal is made to a deserving student, man or
woman. Selection stresses the candidate’s capacity for significant
development of his or her interests and talents during the college
years. Qualities of intellectual promise as well as potential for service
are sought in making this appointment.
The Louis N. Robinson Scholarship was established during the Col­
lege’s Centennial year by the family and friends of Louis N. Robinson.
Mr. Robinson was for many years a member of the Swarthmore Col­
lege faculty and founder of the Economics Discussion Group. A
member of the junior or senior class who has demonstrated interest
and ability in the study of Economics is chosen for this award.
The Katharine Scherman Scholarship, is awarded to a student with
a primary interest in the arts and the humanities, having special tal­
ents in these fields. Students with other special interests, however,
will not be excluded from consideration. Awarded in honor of Kath­
arine Scherman, of the Class of 1938, it is renewable for the full
period of undergraduate study.
The Scott Award at Swarthmore. A scholarship established by the
Scott Paper Co. of Chester, Pa., in honor of its former president,
Arthur Hoyt Scott of the Class of 1895. Given for the first time in
1953, it is awarded annually to an outstanding sophomore who plans
to enter business after graduation and who demonstrates the qualities
of scholarship, character, personality, leadership, and physical vigor.
The award provides the recipient with $1,500 for each of his last two
years in college, regardless of financial need.
The Clinton G. Shafer Scholarship endowed by his family in mem­
ory of Clinton G. Shafer, of the Class of 1951, is open to students
interested in engineering and physical science. The committee in
making its selections will have regard for character, personality and
leadership.
The Thomas H. and Mary Williams Shoemaker Fund provides
scholarships annually for children of Friends.
The Marshall P. Sullivan Scholarship Fund was established by
Creth and Sullivan, Inc. in memory of Marshall P. Sullivan of the
Class of 1897. Preference will be given to graduates of George
33

£>

Eii

F I N A N C I A L AID

School, but if no suitable candidate applies from this school, gradu­
ates of other Friends schools or other persons will be eligible.
The Jonathan K. Taylor Scholarship, in accordance with the
donor’s will, is awarded by the Board of Trustees of the Baltimore
Monthly Meeting of Friends. The scholarship is first open to de­
scendants of the late Jonathan K. Taylor. Then, while preference is
to be given to members of the Baltimore Yearly Meetings of Friends,
it is not to be confined to them when suitable persons in membership
cannot be found.
The Phebe Anna Thorne Fund provides an income for scholarships
for students whose previous work has demonstrated their earnestness
and ability. This gift includes a clause of preference to those students
who are members of the New York Monthly Meeting of Friends.
The Audrey Friedman Troy Scholarship, established by her hus­
band, Melvin B. Troy ’48, is awarded to a freshman man or woman
with preference given to residents of the town of North Hempstead,
Nassau County, New York. The scholarship is renewable for four
years at the discretion of the College. In awarding the scholarship,
prime consideration is given to the ability of the prospective scholar
to profit from a Swarthmore education, and to be a contributor to the
College and ultimately to society.
The Daniel Underhill Scholarship was given by Daniel Underhill
’94, in memory of his grandfather, Daniel Underhill, member of the
first Board of Managers.
The William Hilles Ward Scholarship in memory of William
Hilles Ward of the Class of 1915, is to be awarded annually, prefer­
ably to a student who plans to major in science. The committee in
making its selection, will have regard for candidates who are most
deserving of financial assistance.
The Westbury Quarterly Meeting, N.Y., Scholarship, is awarded
annually by a committee of that Quarterly Meeting.
The Samuel Willets Fund. This fund provides an annual income
for scholarships. A portion of the fund is assigned for scholarships in
the name of Mr. Willets’ children, Frederick Willets, Edward Willets,
Walter Willets, and Caroline W. Frame.
The I. V. Williamson Scholarship. Preference is given to gradu­
ates of Friends Central, George School, New York Friends Seminary,
Baltimore Friends School, Wilmington Friends School, Moorestown
Friends School, Friends Academy at Locust Valley, Sidwell Friends
School and Brooklyn Friends School.
The Edward Clarkson Wilson Scholarship has been established at
34

F I N A N C I A L AID

Swarthmore by friends of Edward Clarkson Wilson, ’91, formerly
Principal of the Baltimore Friends School. It will be awarded each
year to a former student of the Baltimore Friends School, who has
been approved by the faculty of the school, on the basis of high char­
acter and high standing in scholarship.
The Edward Clarkson Wilson and Elizabeth T. Wilson Scholarship
provides financial aid for a deserving student.
An anonymous donor provides a renewable scholarship annually
for a member of an underprivileged minority group.
The income from each of the following funds is awarded at the dis­
cretion of the college.
The Barclay G. Atkinson Scholarship Fund.
The Rebecca M. Atkinson Scholarship Fund.
The Class of 1913 Scholarship Fund.
The Class of 1914 Scholarship Fund.
The Class of 1915 Scholarship Fund.
The Class of 1917 Scholarship Fund.
The William Dorsey Scholarship Fund.
The George Ellsler Scholarship Fund.
The Caroline W. Frame Scholarship Fund.
The Joseph E. Gillingham Fund.
The Thomas L. Leedom Scholarship Fund.
The Li Foundation Scholarship Fund.
The Sarah E. Lippincott Scholarship Fund.
The Mark E. Reeves Scholarship Fund.
The Frank Solomon Memorial Scholarship Fund.
The Mary Sproul Scholarship Fund.
The Helen Squier Scholarship Fund.
The Francis Holmes Strozier Memorial Scholarship Fund.
The Joseph T. Sullivan Scholarship Fund.
The Deborah F. Wharton Scholarship Fund.
The Thomas Woodnutt Scholarship Fund.

Scholarships for Men
The Book and Key Scholarship, established by the Book and Key
men’s senior honorary society in 1965 when the Society dissolved
itself, is awarded each year to a senior man who has shown quality
of leadership and has demonstrated through past performance his
eagerness to give service to college and community. He should rank
high in scholarship, character and personality.
The Sarah Kaighn Cooper Scholarship, founded by Sallie K. John35

F I N A N C I A L AID

son in memory of her grandparents, Sarah Kaighn and Sarah Cooper,
is awarded to a man in the Junior Class who is judged by the faculty
to have had, since entering College, the best record for scholarship,
character, and influence.
The Howard S. Evans 1903 Scholarship provides scholarships for
worthy male students. The awards are made to those who stand high
in scholarship, character, and personality. Preference is given first to
applicants preparing for the ministry of the Episcopal Church, sec­
ond, to that of other protestant denominations; and third, to those in­
terested in Engineering or Economics.
The Donald Renwick Ferguson Scholarship, established by Mrs.
Amy Baker Ferguson, in memory of her husband, Donald Renwick
Ferguson, M.D., of the Class of 1912, is awarded to a young man who
is looking forward to the study of medicine.
The Aaron B. Ivins Scholarship is awarded annually to a young
man of the graduating class of Friends Central School, Overbrook,
Philadelphia. This scholarship is awarded by the faculty of Friends
Central School, and is subject to the approval of Swarthmore College.
The Howard Cooper Johnson Scholarship, established by Howard
Cooper Johnson ’96, is awarded on the basis of all-around achieve­
ment to a male undergraduate who is a member of the Society of
Friends.
The Walter W. Krider Scholarship was established by his wife and
daughter for a young man who ranks high in scholarship, character
and personality.
The Scott B. Lilly Scholarship, endowed by Jacob T. Schless of the
Class of 1914 at Swarthmore College, was offered for the first time in
1950. This scholarship is in honor of a former distinguished Profes­
sor of Engineering and, therefore, students who plan to major in en­
gineering will be given preference. An award is made annually.
The Thomas B. McCabe Achievement Awards, established by
Thomas B. McCabe ’15, are awarded to freshman men from the
Delmarva Peninsula and Northern New England (Maine, New
Hampshire, or Vermont) who give promise of leadership. In making
selections, the Committee will place emphasis on ability, character,
personality, and service 'to school and community. Two awards,
providing a minimum annual grant of $2,300 (tuition) or up to
$4,120 depending on need, will be made to residents of Delaware or
the Eastern Shore counties of Maryland or Virginia. Non-residents
attending school in this area are also eligible. One award, providing
36

F I N A N C I A L AID

an annual grant of up to $4,120 depending on need, will be made
to a resident of Maine, New Hampshire, or Vermont.
The Peter Mertz Scholarship is awarded to an entering freshman
outstanding in mental and physical vigor, who shows promise of
spending these talents for the good of the college community and of
the larger community outside. The award was established in 1955 by
Harold, LuEsther and Joyce Mertz in memory of Peter Mertz, who
was a member of the class of 1957. It is renewable for all four un­
dergraduate years.
The T. H. Dudley Perkins Memorial Scholarship is awarded an­
nually to an entering freshman on the basis of qualities of manhood,
force of character and leadership; literary and scholastic ability;
physical vigor as shown by participation in out-of-doors sports or in
other ways.
The Anthony Beekman Pool Scholarship. This scholarship is
awarded to an incoming freshman man of promise and intellectual
curiosity. It is given in memory of Tony Pool of the Class of 1959.
The William G. and Mary N. Serrill Honors Scholarship is a com­
petitive scholarship for men, awarded to a candidate for admission
to the college, based upon the general plan of the Rhodes Scholar­
ships. Preference will be given to men who are residents of Abington Township, including Jenkintown and Glenside, Montgomery
County, Pa.
The Philip T. Sharpies Scholarship, a four-year scholarship open
to entering freshmen, is designed to honor and encourage young men
in engineering or physical science. The committee, in making its se­
lections, will have regard for candidates who rank highest in scholar­
ship, character, personality, leadership, and physical vigor. At least
one scholarship will be given each year.
The Newton E. Tarble Award, established by Newton E. Tarble
of the Class of 1913, is granted to a freshman man who gives promise
of leadership, ranks high in scholarship, character and personality,
and resides west of the Mississippi River or south of Springfield in
the State of Illinois.

Scholarships for Women
The Mary Lippincott Griscom Scholarship is to be given to a girl
with financial need, who ranks high in character, personality and
scholarship. Preference would be given to a member of the Society
of Friends.
The George K. and Sallie K. Johnson Fund provides aid during the
37

F I N A N C I A L AID

senior year for young women who are fitted to become desirable
teachers.
The income of the Kappa Alpha Theta Scholarship Fund, given by
members and friends of the Kappa Alpha Theta Fraternity at Swarth­
more, is awarded annually to a woman student.
The Jessie Stevenson Kovalenko Scholarship Fund is the gift of
Michel Kovalenko in memory of his wife. This scholarship is to be
awarded to a student, preferably a woman, who is in her junior or
senior year and who is a major in astronomy, or to a graduate of the
College, preferably a woman, for graduate work in astronomy at
Swarthmore or elsewhere.
The Mary T. Longstreth Scholarship was founded by Rebecca C.
Longstreth in memory of her mother and is to be awarded annually
to assist a young woman student to pursue her studies in the College.
The Clara B. Marshall Scholarship, established by the will of Dr.
Clara B. Marshall, is awarded to a woman at Swarthmore College
with preference given to descendants of her grandfathers, Abram
Marshall or Mahlon Phillips.
The Harriet W. Paiste Fund provides a scholarship for a young
woman who is a member of the Society of Friends (Philadelphia
Yearly Meeting).
The Mary Coates Preston Scholarship Fund. A sum of money has
been left by will of Elizabeth Coates, the annual interest of which
provides a scholarship to a young woman student in Swarthmore Col­
lege. Preference is given to a relative of the donor.
The Lily Tily Richards Scholarship, established by Peirce L. Rich­
ards, Jr., in memory of his wife, Lily Tily Richards ’29, is awarded
to a woman distinguished for high scholarship, character, personality
and physical vigor.
The Annie Shoemaker Scholarship is granted annually to a young
woman of the graduating class of Friends Central School, Overbrook,
Philadelphia. This scholarship is awarded by the faculty of Friends
Central School, and is subject to the approval of Swarthmore College.
The Sarah W. Shreiner Scholarship given in loving memory by her
daughter, Leah S. Leeds of the Class of 1927, is awarded annually to
a woman who ranks high in scholarship, character and personality.
The Titus Scholarships established by the will of Georgiana Titus
of the Class of 1898 are awarded to young women in order that they
may pursue their studies in the College.
38

F I N A N C I A L AID

The Mary Wood Fund provides a scholarship which may be
awarded to a young woman who is preparing to become a teacher.
LOAN FUNDS
Swarthmore participates in the federal loan program established
under the National Defense Education Act. The College also main­
tains special loan funds which are listed below. Repayment of col­
lege loans begins nine months after the student completes his higher
education and are repayable within the next eleven years. The loans
bear annual interest of 3% on the unpaid balance beginning with the
date on which repayment is to begin. Amounts vary according to
need, although the College believes that students should avoid heavy
indebtedness which might prove detrimental to their own plans. The
amount of a loan may not exceed $1,000 annually. For the year
1970-71 the College has made approximately 150 loans in amounts
averaging about $300.
The Joseph W. Conard Memorial Fund, established by friends of
the late Professor Conard, is available for loans to worthy students
in financial difficulty.
The Alphonse N. Bertrand Loan Fund.
The Class of 1916 Loan Fund.
The Class of 1920 Loan Fund.
The Class of 1936 Loan Fund.
The John A. Miller Loan Fund.
The Paul M. Pearson Loan Fund.
The Ellis D. Williams Fund.
The Swarthmore College Student Loan Fund.
STU DENT EMPLOYMENT
There are opportunities to earn money by regular work at current
wage rates in the dining room, offices, laboratories or libraries. A
student may hold a college job in addition to a scholarship or a grantin-aid. The distribution of jobs among those authorized to hold them
is made by the Student Employment office. Residents of the borough
of Swarthmore often send requests for services to the college, which
cooperates in making these opportunities known to students. About
one-third of the students enrolled in college obtain employment reg­
ularly through the office. Earnings are restricted by the time a stu­
dent can spend, though many students earn as much as $300-$400
during the college year, and some earn up to $500.
39

:

„

COLLEGE LIFE
HOUS ING
Swarthmore is primarily a residential college, conducted on the
assumption that an important element in education comes from close
association of students and instructors. Most students live in dormi­
tories. Many members of the faculty live on or near the campus.
Residence Halls
There are nine dormitories for men: Wharton Hall, named in
honor of its donor, Joseph Wharton, at one time President of the
Board of Managers, Palmer, Pittenger and Roberts Halls on South
Chester Road, two buildings on the former Mary Lyon School prop­
erty, Ashton House, and two dormitories, Hallowell and Dana, which
were opened in September of 1967.
The women’s dormitories include the upper floors in the wings of
Parrish Hall, Worth Hall, the gift of William P. Worth, ’76, and J.
Sharpies Worth, ex-’73, as a memorial to their parents, Woolman
House, and Willets Hall, largely made possible by a bequest from
Phebe Seaman, ’19, and named in honor of her mother and aunts.
Certain dormitory sections are reserved for an experimental pro­
gram of coeducational housing in 1970-71.
The men’s and women’s dormitories may be visited by members
of the opposite sex according to procedures established by the dormi­
tory sections in consultation with the Deans.
All freshmen are assigned to rooms by the Deans. Other students
choose their rooms in an order determined by lot. Special permission
must be obtained from the Deans to room outside the dormitories.
Students may occupy college rooms during vacations only by spe­
cial arrangements with the Deans and payment of the required fee.
Freshmen, sophomores and juniors are asked to leave college imme­
diately after their last examination in the spring so that their rooms
may be used by Commencement visitors.
43

COLLEGE LIFE

The insurance program for the College is designed to provide pro­
tection for College property and does not include the property of stu­
dents or others. It is therefore suggested that students and their par­
ents should review their insurance program in order to be sure that
coverage is extended to include personal effects while at college.
Sharpies Dining Hall
All students living on campus have their meals in the Philip T.
Sharpies Dining Hall. The dining hall is ordinarily closed during
vacations.
Tarble Social Center
Through the generosity of Newton E. Tarble of the Class of 1913,
the building which formerly housed the College Library has been
completely renovated and serves as the College’s Social Center. It in­
cludes recreational facilities, lounges, meeting rooms, and a snack bar.
Black Cultural Center
A Black Cultural Center, located in the Caroline Hadley Robinson
House, is being developed in 1970-71. It will house a library and
various cultural activities of special interest to black students. The
program will be planned by a committee of black students, faculty, and
administration.
R E L I G I O U S LIFE
The religious life of the college is founded on the Quaker princi­
ple that the seat of spiritual authority lies in the Inner Light of each
individual. The Society of Friends is committed to the belief that
religion is best expressed in the quality of everyday living. There
are accordingly no compulsory religious exercises. Students are en­
couraged to attend the churches of their choice. Episcopal, Presby­
terian, Methodist, and Christian Science churches are located in the
borough of Swarthmore; other churches and synagogues in the
nearby towns of Morton, Media, Chester, and Springfield. The
Swarthmore Friends Meeting House is located on the campus. Stu­
dents are cordially invited to attend its meeting for worship on Sun­
day. Extracurricular groups with faculty cooperation exist for the
study of the Bible and the exploration of common concerns in reli­
gion.
CO L L E C T I O N
An assembly of the college, called Collection, is held three times
during each semester in Clothier Memorial. There is regularly a
44

C O L L E G E L I F E-

period of silence according to the Friendly tradition and a reading.
Lasting about three-quarters of an hour, Collection normally includes
an address; but this is varied by the occasional introduction of musi­
cal, dramatic, and other programs.
STUDENT WELFARE
Health
The college physicians hold daily office hours at the college, where
students may consult them without charge. A student must report any
illness to the college physicians, but is free to go for treatment to an­
other doctor if he prefers to do so.
At the time of admission each student must present a brief medical
history and health certificate, prepared by the family physician on a
form supplied by the college. Pertinent information about such mat­
ters as physical reserve, unusual medical episodes, severe allergies,
or psychiatric disturbances will be especially valuable to the college
Health Service. All new students must have been successfully vac­
cinated against smallpox within five years, in accordance with Penn­
sylvania State law.
The college physician gives physical examinations to all students
at the beginning of each year. There is close cooperation with the De­
partments of Physical Education. Recommendations for limited ac­
tivity are made for those students with physical handicaps. In some
cases a student may be excused entirely from the requirements of the
Physical Education Department.
The Worth Health Center, a gift of the Worth family in memory of
William Penn Worth ’76 and Caroline Hallowell Worth ’79, was
opened in September of 1965. It houses offices for the college physi­
cians and nurses, out-patient treatment facilities and rooms for men
and women who must remain as in-patients. Registered nurses are on
duty under the direction of the college physicians.
Each student is allowed ten days care in the Health Center per term
without charge unless the services of a special nurse are required.
After ten days, a charge of $5.00 per day is made. Students suffering
from a communicable disease or from illness which makes it neces­
sary for them to remain in bed must stay in the Health Center for the
period of their illness. Ordinary medicines are furnished without cost,
but a charge is made for special medicines, certain immunization pro­
cedures, and transportation.
The medical facilities of the college are available to students in­
jured in athletic activities or otherwise, but the college cannot assume
45

COLLEGE LIFE

additional financial responsibility for medical and surgical expenses
arising from accidents. Accident insurance coverage is, therefore,
required for all students participating in athletics and is recom­
mended for all others. (For details see page 27.)
The college psychologist and psychiatric consultants hold office
hours by appointment each week. The purpose of this service is to be
of help with personal and emotional problems. The psychiatrists will
provide as complete an evaluation of any student as possible. Brief
psychotherapy within the limits of available time will be given to stu­
dents without charge. In instances where longer treatment is needed,
an outside psychiatrist will be recommended to the student.
Student Advising
The Deans and their assistants hold the primary responsibility for
advising all students. However, there are many other advisers avail­
able.
Each freshman is assigned to a faculty member who acts as his
course adviser until this responsibility falls to the chairman of the
student’s major department at the end of his sophomore year. Fac­
ulty members have also been appointed as advisers for each of the
men’s varsity athletic teams. They work closely with the team, at­
tending practices and many of the scheduled contests.
Mrs. Gloria Evans, Consultant for Testing and Guidance, is an
experienced counselor who will assist students with problems of
academic adjustment, study skills and reading proficiency. She also
can give aptitude and interest tests on request. Appointments may
be made at her office in Parrish Hall.
Each women’s dormitory has a head resident. In Parrish and Willets, the head resident is assisted by student residents who are mem­
bers of the junior or senior class.
A group of upperclass women, under the direction of ‘the Women’s
Dormitory Council, serve as counselors for all freshman women, sev­
eral counselors being assigned to each hall. There are also student
proctors in each of the men’s dormitory sections. A group of students
assist the Deans with the orientation program conducted during the
freshman week.
Career Planning and Placement
The college provides vocational information and advice to assist
students in their choice of a career. Conferences are planned period­
ically and interviews are arranged with prospective employers. Help
46

COLLEGE LIFE

is offered to students in finding employment. In addition, summer
work opportunities are made known to students.
Alumni Office
The Alumni Office keeps records of the addresses of all living
graduates and alumni of the college. It helps edit the Swarthmore
alumni magazine, and acts as liaison for the college with all alumni
and alumni groups, interpreting to them the present plans and policies
of the college.
News Office
The News Office does a two-fold job. It helps prepare the several
publications put out by the college known as Swarthmore College
Bulletins. These include the alumni magazine, the President’s Report,
the Catalogue, the Student Handbook, and other miscellaneous issues.
In addition to this, the News Office, with the assistance of the largely
student operated News Bureau, works with the press and other com­
munications media in publicizing news that is of interest to the gen­
eral public.

47

ST U D E N T C O M M U NITY
Student Conduct
The influence of the Society of Friends within the College com­
munity is one of the important factors in making Swarthmore what it
is. Students who choose Swarthmore as their college should under­
stand that they are accepting social and academic standards which,
while subject to periodic review, are essential to the well-being of
the community. In general, the life of students should be governed
by good taste and accepted practice rather than elaborate rules. Cer­
tain regulations, however, are of particular importance and are listed
below.
1. The possession and use of alcoholic beverages on the campus is
regulated by State law and limited to those areas of the campus which
are specified by Student Council and the Deans. The observance of
moderation and decorum in respect to drink is a student obligation.
Disorderly conduct is regarded as a serious offense.
2. The use or possession of injurious drugs or narcotics without
the specific recommendation of a physician and knowledge of the
Deans subjects a student to possible suspension or expulsion. Such
cases normally will be decided by the Deans.
3. The use or possession of firearms or other dangerous weapons
is not permitted. Firecrackers or other explosives are prohibited.
Tampering with fire alarm or prevention equipment is a serious offense.
4. No undergraduate may maintain an automobile while enrolled
at the College without the permission of the Car Authorization Com­
mittee, a student-faculty group. This permission is not extended to
freshmen. Day students may use cars for commuting to College, but
special arrangements for stickers must be made for campus parking.
More detailed information may be obtained from the Office of the
Deans.
5. The participation by any student in any disruption or inter48

STUDENT COMMUNITY

ference with the orderly programs, functions, or conduct of College
activities of any kind is a serious offense.
Penalties for violations of College regulations such as those listed
above are set by judicial committees or the Deans and may involve
suspension or expulsion. Standing regulations may be modified and
new rules may be added at any time upon notice to the student body.
The College reserves the right to exclude at any time students whose
conduct it regards as undesirable, and without assigning any further
reason therefor. Neither the College nor any of its officers shall be
under any liability whatsoever for such exclusion.
Student Marriages
Undergraduates who wish to marry and remain at Swarthmore
must request permission to do so from the Deans. If two students are
married without this permission, one of them must withdraw from
the College.
Student Council
The semi-annually elected Student Council represents the entire
undergraduate community and is the chief body of student govern­
ment. Its efforts are directed toward coordination of student activi­
ties and the expression of student opinion.
Committees of the Council include the Budget Committee, which
regulates distribution of funds to student groups; the Elections Com­
mittee, which supervises procedure in campus elections; and the
Social Committee, see below. In addition to these, there are several
joint Faculty-Student Committees, whose student membership is ap­
pointed by a Student Committee on Committees which acts after con­
sultation with two deans and two members of the faculty.
Judicial Bodies
Four committees have different jurisdictions. The Women’s Judi­
ciary Committee is a branch of the Women’s Dormitory Council
and is elected by the women of the student body. It sits in all cases
of violations of women’s rules or of violations by women of general
campus regulations except as they fall in the sphere of the Student
Judiciary Committee (see below). The Men’s Judiciary Committee
is elected by the male students and sits in all cases of violations of
college rules by male students except in the kinds of cases indicated
below as coming under the jurisdiction of the Student Judiciary
Committee. The Student Judiciary Committee, elected by the entire
student body, acts on cases involving the car rule, dress rule, on cases
49

STUDENT COMMUNITY

involving both men and women, and on others that may require joint
action. The College Judiciary Committee is composed of student and
faculty members and the Deans. It deals with and acts upon cases
referred or appealed from the other Committees and with any viola­
tions of rules or standards of conduct that may involve penalties of
suspension or expulsion.
Women’s Dormitory Councils
There are three women’s dormitory councils: one each in Parrish,
Willets, and the smaller upperclass women’s dormitories. These coun­
cils are composed of the Senior Residents who are appointed by the
Dean of Women, and the Hall Presidents who are elected by each hall.
Each council elects one of its members to serve on the Coordinating
Committee which meets regularly with the Dean. It is through the
Coordinating Committee that certain programs of interest to students
can be implemented and dormitory problems often can be resolved.
Social Committee
An extensive program of social activities is managed by the Social
Committee appointed by the Student Council. The program is de­
signed to appeal to a wide variety of interests, and is open to all stu­
dents. There is usually no charge for college social functions.
EXTRA-CURRICULAR A CT IV ITI ES
In addition to the foregoing organizations, Swarthmore students
have an opportunity to participate in a program of extra-curricular
activities wide enough to meet every kind of interest. There are more
than thirty-five organized activities, not including departmental clubs
or political organizations. They vary as greatly as the interests of the
students vary, from the Flying Club to the Chess Club, from the Cre­
ative Writing Group to the Co-ed Dance Group. The College encour­
ages a student to participate in whatever activity best fits his personal
talents and inclinations, believing that satisfactory avocations are a
necessary part of life.
The Studio Arts Program
The Artist in Residence, Harriet Shorr Baguskas, arranges for
classes in studio arts and for exhibits in the Arts Center and acts as an
adviser to other organizations. See under Studio Arts, page 86, for a
list of credit and non-credit courses.
The Wilcox Gallery provides ten to twelve exhibitions a year,
50

STUDENT COMMUNITY

which are a direct complement to the program. The works of na­
tionally known painters as well as those of younger artists are exhib­
ited in group and one man shows.
The Marjorie Heilman Visiting Artist Program
Each year a committee of students and faculty members selects an
artist to be invited to spend a week at the College. The work of the
invited artist is exhibited in the Wilcox Gallery, and he meets and
talks with students on an informal basis.
Music
The Department of Music administers and staffs several perform­
ing organizations. The College Chorus, directed by Professor Swing,
rehearses twice per week for a total of three hours. (The College
Singers, a select small chorus drawn from the membership of the
Chorus, rehearses an additional hour per week.) The College Orches­
tra, directed by Mr. Freeman, rehearses twice per week: a two-hour
rehearsal for full orchestra and a one-hour rehearsal for strings.
Members of the orchestra, other instrumentalists and solo singers
can participate in the chamber music coaching program directed by
Mr. Kalish and Mr. Zukofsky.
The Chorus and Orchestra give several public concerts per year at
the College and at other schools. Selected members of the chamber
music coaching program give a public concert in the spring.
All three organizations require auditions for membership.
The Bond Concert Committee, a student organization working with
the Department of Music, plans a series of informal Sunday after­
noon concerts to accommodate students interested in preparing solo
and chamber music performances. These concerts also provide an
opportunity for student composers to get public performances.
There are facilities for private practice, and an excellent college
record collection. The Cooper Foundation presents a distinguished
group of concerts each year on the campus.
Dance
The Department of Physical Education for Women sponsors per­
formance groups in Folk Dance and Modern Dance. Both groups meet
regularly each week and give performances throughout the year. In
addition, Mrs. Patricia Boyer will offer this year a non-credit course in
dance composition.
Drama
Professor Lee Devin is Director of Theater. He directs two major
51

STUDENT COMMUNITY

productions and supervises the drama program, which consists of
student-produced workshop productions, and a bill of student-written
one-act plays. The Theater Workshop course is described on page 124.
Athletics
Swarthmore’s athletic policy is based on the premise that any inter­
collegiate program must be justified by the contribution which it can
make to the educational development of the individual student who
chooses to participate. In keeping with this fundamental policy,
Swarthmore’s athletic program is varied and extensive, offering every
student a chance to take part in a wide range of sports. The College
feels that it is desirable to have as many students as possible com­
peting on its intercollegiate teams.
Fraternities
There are five fraternities at Swarthmore; Delta Upsilon and Phi
Sigma Kappa are affiliated with national organizations while Kappa
Sigma Pi, Tau Alpha Omicron and Phi Omicron Psi are local associa­
tions. Fraternities are adjuncts to the college social program and
maintain separate lodges on the campus. The lodges do not contain
dormitory accommodations or eating facilities. New members are
pledged during the late fall of their first year at the college. In recent
years about 40% of the freshman men have decided to affiliate with
one of the five fraternities.
Student Activities Bulletin
A booklet describing more fully all these activities and many others
can be obtained upon request from the Office of Admissions.

52

E D U C A T IO N A L PROGRAM
FA C U L TY R EG U L A T IO N S
DEG REE R EQ UIREM ENTS
AW ARDS A N D PRIZES
FELLOW SHIPS

E D U C A T IO N A L PROGRAM
General Statement
Swarthmore College offers the degree of Bachelor of Arts and the
degree of Bachelor of Science. The latter is given only to students
who major in Engineering; the former, to students in the Humanities,
the Social Sciences, and the Natural Sciences.* Four years of resident
study are normally required for a Bachelor’s degree. (See page 74).
The selection of a program will depend upon the student’s inter­
ests and vocational plans. Programs in engineering, pre-medical
courses, and chemistry, for example, are the usual preparation for
professional work in these fields. Students planning a career in law,
business, or government service find majors in the humanities or
social sciences of great value.
The purpose of a liberal education, however, is not primarily to
provide vocational instruction, even though it provides the best foun­
dation for one’s future vocation. Its purpose is to help students fulfill
their responsibilities as citizens and grow into cultivated and versa­
tile individuals. A liberal education is concerned with our cultural
inheritance, the world of thought, and the development of aesthetic,
moral, and spiritual values.
It is necessary for most students to concern themselves with the
problem of making a living. But this concern should not lead them to
a specialization that is too early and too narrow. They still have need
of broadening the scope of their experience. Particular skills may
afford readier access to routine employment, but positions of greater
responsibility will be occupied by those who are equipped to think
their way through new problems and to conceive of their functions
in a larger context of time and place. Liberal education and voca­
tional training may be the joint products of a common process, and
the courses here offered should be selected with this large purpose in
view.
•For groupings of departments, see page 208.

55

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

All students during the first half of their college program are ex­
pected to satisfy some if not all of the distribution requirements, to
choose their major and minor subjects, and to prepare for advanced
work in these subjects by taking certain prerequisites. The normal
program consists of four courses each semester chosen by the student
in consultation with his course adviser.
The program for upper class students affords a choice between two
methods of study: Honors work and the Course program. An Honors
student concentrates on two or three fields, his major and one or more
minors, which he studies intensively and which occupy three-fourths
of his working time during the last two years. At the close of his sen­
ior year he takes a series of six examinations given by visiting exam­
iners over this work. In addition he takes four courses, or the equiv­
alent, which provide opportunities for further exploration outside of
his Honors program.
A student in the Course program has a somewhat wider freedom
of election and takes four courses or their equivalent in each of the
last four semesters. At the end of his senior year he is required to
pass a comprehensive examination given by his major department.
The program for engineering students follows a similar basic plan,
with certain variations which are explained on page 112. Courses
outside the technical fields are spread over all four years.
The course advisers of freshmen and sophomores are members of
the faculty appointed by the Dean. For juniors and seniors the advis­
ers are the chairmen of their major departments or their representa­
tives.
PROGRAM FOR FRESHMEN
AND SOPHOMORES
The curriculum of the first two years introduces a student to the
methods and content of a variety of fields important to a liberal edu­
cation.
I.
To meet the distribution requirements of the College, a student
must take at least two courses from each of the four groups listed
below and must elect work in at least six departments. Subject to the
restrictions indicated here, students may receive credit toward distri­
bution through taking any numbered course in a given department
that they are eligible to take. Mathematics, though not one of the sub­
jects included in the four groups, may be counted as one of the six
departments.
1. Astronomy, Biology, Chemistry, Engineering, Physics.
56

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

2. Art History, Classics (literature courses numbered 11 or above),
English Literature (except courses numbered 70-72), Modern
Languages (literature courses numbered 11 or above), Music
(except courses numbered 34-39).
3. Classics (courses in ancient history), History, Philosophy, Psychol­
ogy, Religion.
4. Economics, Political Science, Sociology and Anthropology.
Students entering college with special preparation in any of the
subjects included in the distribution requirements may apply to the
Committee on Academic Requirements for exemption from that
requirement.
It is most desirable that students include in their programs some
work in a foreign language. A student who intends to major in one of
the natural sciences, mathematics, or engineering should take an ap­
propriate mathematics course in his freshman year.
In addition to the requirements listed above, prerequisites must be
completed for the work of the last two years in major and minor sub­
jects, and sufficient additional electives must be taken to make up a
full program.
It is expected that, after satisfying the requirements in the general
program of the first two years, the student will devote the remainder
of his sophomore year to preparing himself for more advanced study
of those subjects which have most interested him and to other courses
which will increase the range of his knowledge. He should decide, as
early in his sophomore year as possible, upon two or three subjects
in which he might like to major and should consult the statements of
the departments concerned as to required and recommended courses
and supporting subjects.
Physical education is required of all students (except veterans) in
the first two years with certain provisions for exemption. The require­
ments are stated in full on page 72 and in the statements of the depart­
ments of Physical Education.
COURSE PROGRAM FOR JUNIORS AND SENIORS
The work of juniors and seniors in the Course program includes
some intensive, specialized study within a general area of interest.
This comprises enough work in a single department (designated as a
"major”) to make an equivalent of at least eight courses. There is no
57

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

upper limit to the number of courses a student may take in the major
field, provided that he take at least twenty courses outside the major
field. Before graduation the student must pass a comprehensive ex­
amination in his major subject.
A student must choose his major subject at the end of the sopho­
more year, and apply formally through the Registrar to be accepted
by the division concerned. The decision will be based on an estimate
of his ability in his major subject as well as on his record. If a stu­
dent does not secure divisional approval, he cannot be admitted to
the junior class.
A student’s course adviser during his junior and senior years is the
chairman of his major department (or a member of the department
designated by the chairman) whose approval he must secure for his
choice of courses each semester.
The faculty may award the bachelor’s degree with Distinction to
students who have done distinguished work in the course program.
HONORS PROGRAM FOR JUNIORS AND SENIORS
The Honors Program, initiated in 1922 by President Frank Aydelotte and modified most recently in 1968, is a distinctive part of
Swarthmore’s educational life. It seeks to free from the limitations
of classroom routine those students whose maturity, interest, and
capacity suit them for independent work. While the program is de­
signedly flexible and responsive to new needs, it has been character­
ized from the beginning by three basic elements, which taken together
may be said to be the essence of the system.
(1) Honors work involves a concentration of the student’s atten­
tion during his last two years upon a limited field pf studies. He nor­
mally pursues only two subjects during a semester, thereby avoiding
the fragmentation of interest that may result from a program of four
or more courses with their daily assignments and frequent examina­
tions. The content of the subject matter field is correspondingly
broader, permitting a wide range of reading and investigation and
demanding of the student correlations of an independent and search­
ing nature.
(2) Honors work frees the student from periodic examinations,
since his thinking is under continual scrutiny by his classmates and
instructors. By this program he undertakes to prepare himself to
take examinations in six subjects at the close of his senior year. In
these he is expected to demonstrate his competence in a field of
knowledge rather than simply his mastery of those facts and interpre58

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

tations which his instructor has seen fit to present. These examina­
tions, consisting of a three-hour paper in each field, are set by exam­
iners from other institutions who read the papers and then come to
the campus to conduct an oral examination of each student, in order
to clarify and enlarge the basis of their judgment of his command of
his material.
(3)
Honors work is customarily carried on in seminars or small
classes or in independent projects which may lead to an Honors
paper or thesis. Seminars meet once a week, in many cases in the
home of the instructor, for sessions lasting three hours or more. The
exact technique of the seminar varies with the subject matter, but its
essence is a cooperative search for truth, whether it be by papers,
discussion, or laboratory experiment. Each student has an equal
responsibility for the assimilation of the whole of the material and is
correspondingly searching in his scrutiny of ideas presented by his
fellows or by his instructor. The student is expected to devote half of
his working time during a semester to each seminar or course taken
in preparation for an Honors paper or examination. No student is
permitted under ordinary circumstances to take more than six sem­
inars. He may take fewer than six, since he may prepare in other
ways for his Honors examinations.
In practice three avenues toward an Honors degree are open:
(1) The normal program of Honors work consists of six subjects
studied during the last two years in preparation for papers or exami­
nations given by the visiting examiners at the close of the senior year.
The usual pattern is four papers in the major department and two in
a minor department, but other combinations of major and minor fields
are possible. No student is allowed more than four papers in his
major; in those cases where he offers three subjects in each of two
fields, one of them must be designated as his major. While there is
a general belief that two papers in a minor field are desirable because
of the mutual reinforcement they provide, there are by custom cer­
tain subjects which are allowed to stand alone. Thus there is a con­
siderable flexibility in Honors programs, each being subject to the
scrutiny of the departments and divisions in which the work is done.
(2) Students who have a special reason to study for one or two
semesters abroad or in another American institution must take the
normal number of examinations. Such programs must be worked out
in advance, since it may not be possible to provide visiting examiners
for work offered elsewhere and since instruction in some fields of the
59

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

student’s choice may not be available in the other institution. In gen­
eral the student following this avenue to an Honors degree must
weigh carefully the advantage of working independently or under
tutorial guidance against the loss he incurs by missing both the stim­
ulus and the criticism provided by his fellows in seminar.
(3)
Students who at the end of the sophomore year did not elect
or were not permitted to read for Honors, but whose work has sub­
sequently shown distinction, may be encouraged to enter the Honors
program as late as the middle of the senior year. They shall receive
no remission of the number of examinations by reason of their prep­
aration in Course but shall be subject to the regulations governing
Honors programs of the division concerned. Such students must peti­
tion the division for permission to take the Honors examinations and
must submit an acceptable list of examinations which they are pre­
pared to take.
A candidate for admission to Honors should consult the chairmen
of his prospective major and minor departments during the second
semester of his sophomore year and work out a program for the jun­
ior and senior years. This proposed program must be filed in the of­
fice of the Registrar who will forward it to the divisions concerned.
The acceptance of the candidate by the divisions depends in part
upon the quality of his previous work as indicated by the grades he
has received but mainly upon his apparent capacity for assuming the
responsibility of Honors work. The names of the accepted candidates
are announced later in the spring. The major department is responsi­
ble for the original plan of work and for keeping in touch with the
candidate’s progress from semester to semester. The division is
responsible for approval of the original program and of any later
changes in that program.
At the end of the junior year Honors students are required to take
the Honors examinations set at that time for the fields they have stud­
ied. These trial papers, however, are read by their instructors, not by
the visiting examiners. On the basis of the showing made in these
examinations, the student may be advised or even required to return
to Course, or he may be warned that he continues in Honors at his
own risk. Those students who return to Course under these circum­
stances or for other reasons will receive grades for the work they
have done while reading for Honors, but in no case without taking
examinations over the field covered.
At the end of the senior year the reading of the examinations and
the decision of the degree of Honors to be awarded the candidates is

60

EDUCATIONAL

PROGRAM

entirely in the hands of the visiting examiners. Upon their recom­
mendation, successful candidates are awarded the Bachelor’s Degree
with Honors, with High Honors, or with Highest Honors. When the
work of a candidate does not in the opinion of the examiners merit
Honors of any grade, his papers are returned to his instructors, who
decide, under rules of the Faculty, whether he shall be given a degree
in Course.
E X C E P T I O N S TO T H E F O U R YEAR
PROGRAM
Although the normal period of uninterrupted work toward the Bach­
elor of Arts and Bachelor of Science degrees is four years, graduation
in three years is freely permitted when a student can take advantage of
Advanced Placement credits, perhaps combining them with extra
work by special permission. When personal circumstances warrant a
student may lengthen the continuous route to graduation to five years
by carrying fewer courses than the norm of four during some or all of
his college career: this may occasionally be appropriate for students
who enter Swarthmore lacking some elements of the usual prepara­
tion for college or who, for other reasons, wish to free time for activ­
ities relating to their curricular work although not done for academic
credit. Such five-year programs are possible in Music and Studio Arts
for students who are taking some instruction off campus or who wish
to pursue studio or instrumental work without full credit but with in­
struction and critical supervision; but such programs in the arts are
possible only on application to and selection by the department con­
cerned based on exceptional accomplishment or promise. In all cases
where it is proposed to reduce academic credit and lengthen the period
before graduation the College looks particularly to personal circum­
stances and to careful advising and necessarily charges the regular
annual tuition. Full-time leaves of absence for a semester or a year or
more are freely permitted and in some cases encouraged, subject also
to careful planning and academic advising.
F O R M A T S OF I N S T R U C T I O N
While classes and seminars are the normal curricular formats at
Swarthmore, faculty regulations encourage other modes as well. These
include various forms of individual study, student-run courses, and a
limited amount of “practical” or off-campus work. The rationale and
details of these methods are set out in Critique of a College (1967).
The principal forms of individual work are attachments, directed

61

EDUCATIONAL

PROGRAM

reading, and tutorials. The faculty regulation on attachments provides
that a student may attach to an existing course, with permission of the
instructor, a project of additional reading, research, and writing. If this
attachment is taken concurrently with the course it may be done for
half credit. If it is taken in a later semester (preferably the semester
immediately following) it may be done for either half or full credit.
Actually, this kind of work can be done on either a small group or
individual basis. It is not possible in all courses, but it is in most,
including some introductory courses. For freshmen and sophomores
it is a way of developing capacities for independent work, and for
Honors students it is an alternative to seminars as a preparation for
papers; but all students are encouraged to consider it. Students who
decide before the middle of the semester to do a half-credit attachment
may commonly, with permission, drop a regular course and carry three
and a half credits in that term to be balanced by four and a half credits
in another term. Students may do as many as two attachments each
year.
Directed reading and tutorials are similar; but the faculty role in
the former is more bibliographical than pedagogical, and, because they
require somewhat less faculty time, opportunities for directed reading
are more frequent in most departments than are opportunities for
tutorials. In both cases substantial written work and/or written exam­
inations are considered appropriate, and it is generally desirable that
the work be more specialized or more sharply focussed than is usually
the case in courses or seminars; the work may range from a course of
reading to a specific research project. Such work is available primarily
to juniors and seniors in accordance with their curricular interests and
as faculty time permits.
The faculty regulation on student-run courses permits “a group of
students to propose a topic to an instructor for half or single credit and
to run their own course with a reading list approved by the instructor
and a final examination or equivalent administered by him, but nor­
mally with no further involvement of faculty.” In organizing such a
course students obtain provisional approval and agreement to serve as
course supervisor from a faculty member by December 1st (for the
spring term) or May 1st (for the fall term) on the basis of an initial
memorandum emphasizing the principal subject matter to be studied,
the questions to be asked about it, the methods of investigation, and a
preliminary bibliography. The course is then registered by its organ­
izers with the Provost, who has administrative supervision of such
work, and who may waive the foregoing deadlines to recognize prob62

EDUCATIONAL

PROGRAM

lems in the organization of such courses. The supervising instructor
consults his department and any other departments concerned (and the
Curriculum Committee in the case of an inter-departmental course).
He also reviews the course outline and bibliography and qualifications
and general eligibility of students proposing to participate in the
course. On departmental (or Curriculum Committee) approval the
instructor’s final approval is due ten days before the term begins, fol­
lowing which a revised reading list and class list are given to the
Librarian and the course title and class list are filed with the Registrar.
At the end of the course the instructor evaluates and grades the stu­
dents’ work or arranges for an outside-examiner to do so.
Student-run courses may vary widely in format and content. In par­
ticular, they may be provisionally proposed for half credit to run in the
first half of the semester, and, at mid-term, may be either concluded or,
if the participants and supervising instructor find the work profitable,
be continued for the balance of the term for full credit. Alternatively,
student-run courses may be started after the beginning of the semester
(up to mid-semester) for half credit and then be continued, on the same
basis, into the following term. Or they may be taken for half credit over
a full term. The role of the supervising instructor may exceed that in
planning and evaluation outlined above and extend to occasional or
regular participation. The only essentials, and the purpose of the pro­
cedures, are sufficient planning and organization of the course to facil­
itate focus and penetration. The course planning and organization, both
analytical and bibliographical, are also regarded as important ends in
themselves, to be emphasized in the review of proposals before ap­
proval. Up to four of the 32 credits required for graduation may be
taken in student-run courses.
Finally, as to applied or practical work, the College may under
faculty regulations grant up to one course credit for practical work,
which may be done off campus, when it can be shown to lend itself to
intellectual analysis and is likely to contribute to a student’s progress in
regular course work, and subject to four conditions: (1) agreement of
an instructor to supervise the project; (2) permission of the Curricu­
lum Committee; (3) a basis for the project in some prior course work;
and (4) normally, the examination of pertinent literature and produc­
tion of a written report as parts of the project. This option is intended
to apply to work in which direct experience of the off-campus world or
responsible applications of academic learning or imaginative aspects of
the practice of an art are the primary elements. Because such work is
likely to bear a loose relation to organized instruction and the regular
63

EDUCATIONAL

PROGRAM

curriculum the College limits academic credit for it while recognizing
its special importance for some students’ programs.
IN TER -D ISC IPL IN A R Y WORK
The requirements of the departmental major typically leave room for
significant flexibility in students’ programs, both within and outside the
major. This may be used to pursue a variety of interests and to empha­
size intellectual diversity; it may also be used for the practical integra­
tion of individual programs around interests or principles supplement­
ing the major. Except for International Relations the College does not
offer inter-departmental majors or, except for Black Studies, formal
inter-disciplinary programs short of the major. The programs in Educa­
tion and in Linguistics have departmental status as to staff, although
students do not major in them. It should be recognized that some de­
partments are themselves rather inter-disciplinary in nature; that a
number of courses are cross-listed between departments; that each year
a few courses are taught jointly by members of two or more depart­
ments; that departments commonly recommend or require supporting
work for their major in other departments; and that students can or­
ganize their work into ad hoc concentrations in addition to or as exten­
sions of their majors. One such concentration is formally provided in
the Black Studies program (see page 96). Many other opportunities
exist informally — e.g., in Art History and Studio Arts, in Classics and
Medieval History and Literature, in comparative literature, in Ameri­
can studies, in Religion and Sociology-Anthropology, in Engineering
and Social Sciences, or in Biology and Chemistry. Students are encour­
aged to seek the advice of faculty members on such possibilities with
respect to their particular interests. In some cases faculty members of
several departments have planned and scheduled their course offerings
with some consultation so as to afford a de facto concentration in addi­
tion to the major, and students may wish to know and take advantage
of these cases of overlapping faculty interests. The following listings,
which may be expected to change from year to year, reflect currently
organized opportunities, although some other possibilities are men­
tioned with the listings of departmental programs later in the catalogue.
A SI A N S T U D I E S
Students who wish to undertake work at Swarthmore in Asian
studies should be aware of the course and seminar offerings pertaining
to Asia in a number of departments. The opportunity exists to develop
coordinated programs of study of an interdisciplinary nature drawing
64

EDUCATIONAL

PROGRAM

on Asian materials, in conjunction with a standard department major.
Students who wish to explore these possibilities are invited to discuss
the matter with either Mr. Yuan (History) or Mr. Piker (SociologyAnthropology) .
Courses and seminars dealing primarily or exclusively with Asian
materials:
Department of Art History
51. Far Eastern Art (Mr. Rhys)
Department of History
9. China (Mr. Yuan)
44. Modern China (Mr. Yuan)
45. Modern Japan (Mr. Yuan)
46. Asian Nationalisms (Mr. Yuan)
144. The Modern Far East (Mr. Yuan)
Department of Political Science
19. Comparative Communist Politics
20. Politics of East Asia (Mr. Harding)
107. Comparative Communist Politics
Department of Religion
5. Introduction to Asian Religions (Mr. Swearer)
13. Theravada Buddhism (Mr. Swearer)
14. Mahayana Buddhism (Mr. Swearer)
107. The Religions of Southeast Asia (Mr. Swearer)
108. Studies in Hinduism and Buddhism (Mr. Swearer)
Department of Sociology and Anthropology
73. Japanese Society (Mr. Brandt)
64-65. Colloquium: Buddhism, A Social History (Mr. Piker)
101. Far East Peasant and Urban Cultures (Mr. Brandt)
Courses and seminars which include Asian materials:
Department of Economics
11. Economic Development (Mr. Ooms)
106. Comparative Economic Systems (Mr. Pryor)
109. Economic Development (Mr. Ooms, Mr. Pack)
65

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

Department of History
42. Expansion of Europe (Mr. Wright)
Department of Political Science
3. Comparative Politics (Mrs. Henry)
18. Politics of Developing Nations (Mr. Harding)
59. Marxism (Mr. Smith)
109. Political Development (Mr. Harding)
Department of Religion
24. Mysticism East and West (Mr. Swearer)
Department of Sociology and Anthropology
54. Anthropological Study of Complex Societies (Mrs. Ross, Mr.
Brandt)
66. Independent reading on the culture and history of Theravada
SE Asia is available with Mr. Piker. Prerequisite: permission.
107. Sociology of Religion
PRE-MEDICAL PROGRAM
Students who are considering the possibility of attending medical
(or dental) school after graduation from Swarthmore should plan
their academic programs carefully to meet the pre-medical require­
ments, listed below, as well as the general College requirements.
Specific requirements of the various medical schools, as well as basic
information on other aspects of pre-medical and medical training, can
be found in “Admission Requirements of American Medical Col­
leges” published by the Association of American Medical Colleges.
Recent editions of this book are available in the various libraries on
the campus. All students planning a medical career should be lamiliar with this book.
Sophomores, juniors, and seniors will be in contact with the pre­
medical consultants who, for 1970-71, will be Professor Jenkins
(Biology) and Mrs. Lange, Associate Dean of Admissions. It is also
the consultants’ function to prepare a statement of evaluation and
recommendation to each medical school to which the student may
apply, basing this statement on all available information to it, includ­
ing the student’s record and faculty evaluations.
In conference with the student, the course adviser maps out a pro­
gram based on requirements listed below, the college’s general re­
quirements, and the particular needs and interests of the student.

66

EDUCATIONAL

PROGRAM

Beyond these considerations the need for understanding basic social
problems, the cultivation of sensitiveness to cultural values, and the
values of intensive work in at least one field is kept in mind in map­
ping an individual program.
The following courses are among the minimum requirements of
most medical schools: Biology 1,2; Chemistry 1,2 or 3,4; Chemistry
28,29; Mathematics 3,4 or 5,6; Physics 1,2; English Literature, two
semester courses. The foreign language requirements of medical
schools are automatically met when the student has satisfied the col­
lege language requirement, which includes language course 4 or its
equivalent. Advanced work in biology, chemistry and mathematics
is recommended where the student’s program and interests permit.
Medical school requirements are changing rapidly and the student is
urged to familiarize himself with the specific requirements of those
medical schools in which he is interested.
The work of the junior and senior years may be done in either the
Course or the Honors program. Intensive work of the major may be
done in any department or the student’s choice. Medical schools,
however, expect that students majoring in the Divisions of the Hu­
manities or Social Sciences will demonstrate solid competence in the
scientific subjects which they take.
Although some students have been admitted to medical schools
upon the completion of three years of college work, most medical
schools strongly advise completion of four years of college, and in
practice admit very few with less.
CREATIVE ARTS
Work in the creative arts is available both in the curriculum of
certain departments and on an extra-curricular basis. Interested stu­
dents should consult the departmental statements in English Litera­
ture, Music, and Studio Arts. A total of not more than four courses
in the creative arts may be counted toward the degree of Bachelor
of Arts.
CO O P ER A TI O N W I T H N EI G H BO RI N G
IN ST I T U T I O N S
With the approval of their course adviser and the Dean, students
may take courses offered by Bryn Mawr or Haverford Colleges or the
University of Pennsylvania without the payment of extra tuition. This
arrangement does not apply to the summer session of the University
of Pennsylvania.
67

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

Advanced students in the physical sciences and engineering may
benefit from the Bartol Research Foundation, located on the campus,
which offers a graduate program. (See page 12)
EDUCATION ABROAD
The College recognizes the general educational value of travel and
study abroad and cooperates as far as possible in enabling interested
students to take advantage of such opportunities. It distinguishes,
however, between those foreign study plans which may be taken for
credit as part of a Swarthmore educational program, and those which
must be regarded as supplementary. To be acceptable for credit, for­
eign study must meet Swarthmore academic standards, and must
form a coherent part of the student’s four-year plan of study. The
Honors Program in particular demands a concentration of study
which is not easily adapted to the very different educational systems
of foreign universities. Therefore, while some of the approved pro­
grams listed below may normally be taken as substitutes for a semes­
ter or a year of work at Swarthmore, each case is judged individually,
and the college may withhold its approval of a particular program, or
may insist that the program be carried out as an extra college year.
Plans for study abroad must be approved in advance by the Dean
and by the Chairmen of departments concerned, if credit is to be
given for courses taken, and students may be asked to take examina­
tions upon their return to the College.
1. Established Programs. Students who wish to study abroad un­
der formal academic conditions may apply to one of the programs
administered by other American colleges and universities; for exam­
ple, those of Hamilton College, Smith College, or Sweet Briar College.
These are full-year programs of study at foreign universities, under
the supervision of American college personnel. Interested students
should consult the Dean for details.
2. Direct Enrollment. Application may also be made directly to
foreign institutions for admission as a special student. This should be
done only after consultation with the Dean and the appropriate de­
partment head, and care must be taken to assure in advance that
courses taken abroad will be acceptable for Swarthmore credit. Most
foreign universities severely limit the number of students they accept
for short periods, however, and anyone who applies for admission
directly must be prepared to be refused.
3. University of Keele. For a number of years Swarthmore College
and the University of Keele, Staffordshire, England, have had a stu-

68

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM

dent exchange each year. A student from Swarthmore is selected for
study at Keele by a committee which interviews the applicants. The
year at Keele may take the place of the junior year at Swarthmore,
though it is often taken as an extra year.
4. Peaslee Scholarships. These scholarships, the gifts of Amos
Peaslee (Class of ’07) were instituted in 1953 and are normally
awarded each year, preferably to sophomores and juniors, for lan­
guage study abroad. The scholarships are for a minimum of one
semester plus a summer; course credit is given for the work done
upon approval of the department concerned.
5. International Association for the Exchange of Students for Tech­
nical Experience. This program, administered by the Engineers’
Joint Council, provides opportunities for engineering and science stu­
dents to work for engineering firms and laboratories in Europe dur­
ing summer vacations. Students are paid living expenses by the em­
ploying firm in the currency of the country in which they work; they
pay their own travel costs. Applications must be made by January 1
for work the following summer, and students are notified of the As­
sociation’s decision by March 31. For further information, students
should consult the Director of Career Planning and Placement.
6. University of Warwick, England. A fall semester exchange pro­
gram for members of the Swarthmore junior class majoring in His­
tory and second year students in the School of History at Warwick
was inaugurated in 1966.

69

F A C U L T Y R EG U L A T IO N S
ATTENDANCE AT CLASSES
Registration to take a course for credit implies regular attendance
at classes, unless a student specifically elects to obtain credit in a
course without attending classes. The conditions for exercising this
option are set forth below. With this exception, students are respon­
sible for regular attendance. Faculty members will report to the
Deans the name of any student whose repeated absence is in their
opinion impairing the student’s work. The number of cuts allowed in
a given course is not specified, a fact which places a heavy responsi­
bility on all students to make sure that their work is not suffering as a
result of absences. Since freshmen must exercise particular care in
this respect, and since the Faculty recognizes its greater responsibility
toward freshmen in the matter of class attendance, it is expected that
freshmen, especially, will attend all classes.
When illness necessitates absence from classes, the student should
report at once to the nurses or to the college physician.
A student may obtain credit for a course without attending class
meetings by reading the material prescribed by a syllabus and taking
a final examination, under the following conditions:
1) The student must signify his intent to do so at the time of regis­
tration, having obtained the instructor’s approval in advance.
2) If after such registration the student wishes to change his status
and attend classes normally, he must again obtain the instructor’s
approval.
3) The student may be required to perform such work, in addi­
tion to the final examination, as the instructor deems necessary for
adequate evaluation of his performance.
4) The final grade will be recorded by the Registrar exactly as if
the student had attended classes normally.
70

FACULTY REGULATIONS

GRADES
Instructors report to the Deans’ office at intervals during the year
upon the work of students in courses. Informal reports during the
semester take the form of comments on unsatisfactory work. At the
end of each semester formal grades are given in each course under
the letter system, by which A means excellent work, B good work, C
satisfactory work, D passing but below the average required for grad­
uation, and E failure. W signifies that the student has been permitted to
withdraw from the course by the Committee on Academic Require­
ments. X designates a condition; this means that a student has done
unsatisfactory work in the first half of a year course, but by creditable
work during the second half may earn a passing grade for the full
course and thereby remove his condition. R is used to designate an
auditor or in cases when the work of a foreign student cannot be
evaluated because of deficiencies in English.
Inc. means that a student’s work is incomplete with respect to spe­
cific assignments or examinations. The Faculty has voted that the
grade given in a course should incorporate a zero for any part of the
course not complete by the date of the final examination. The grade
Incomplete should be given only after consultation with the Registrar
and only in cases in which it can be shown that illness, military serv­
ice, or the like made it impossible for the student to complete his
work before the deadline, or in cases in which the instructor wishes
to insist on the completion of the work before giving a grade with
penalties. If an Inc. is received, it must normally be made up in the
term immediately following that in which it was incurred. A date is
set at the end of the first six weeks of each term when make-up exam­
inations must be taken and late papers submitted. Under special cir­
cumstances involving the use of laboratories or attendance at courses
not immediately available, a student may secure permission to extend
the time for making up an incomplete until the second term following.
This permission must be given in writing and filed in the Office of
the Registrar. Any not made up within a year from the time it was
imposed shall be recorded as E, a failure which cannot be made up.
In 1968-69 and 1969-70 the only grades recorded on students’ rec­
ords for courses taken during their freshman year were P (pass) or E
(fail). Beginning in September 1970 this plan will be followed during
the first semester of the freshman year, and students entering as fresh­
men in 1970 may designate four additional courses during the follow­
ing three semesters to be recorded on a pass/fail basis.
71

FACULTY

REGULATIONS

Reports are sent to parents and to students at the end of each
semester.
For graduation in general courses, a C average is required; for
graduation in honors work, the recommendation of the visiting exam­
iners.
RE G I S T R A T I O N
All students are required to register at the time specified in official
announcements and to file programs of courses or seminars approved
by their course advisers. Fines are imposed for late or incomplete
registration.
A regular student is expected to take the prescribed number of
courses in each semester. If more than five or fewer than four
courses seem desirable, he should consult his course adviser and file
a petition with the Committee on Academic Requirements.
Applications involving the late entrance into a course must be re­
ceived within the first two weeks of the semester. Applications
involving withdrawal from a course must be received not later than
the middle of the semester.
EX AMINATIONS
Any student who is absent from an examination, announcement of
which was made in advance, shall be given an examination at another
hour only by special arrangement with the instructor in charge of the
course.
No examination in absentia shall be permitted. This rule shall be
interpreted to mean that instructors shall give examinations only at
the college and under direct departmental supervision.
SUMMER SCHOOL WO RK
Students desiring to transfer credit from a summer school .are re­
quired to obtain the endorsement of the chairman of the department
concerned before entering upon the work, and after completing the
work are required to pass an examination set by the Swarthmore
department.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Physical education is required of all women and non-veteran men
in the freshman and sophomore years, unless an excuse is granted by
the college physician. Three periods' per week are normally required,
but certain provisions for exemption based on achievement are in72

FACULTY

REGULATIONS

eluded. If any semester’s work of the first two years is failed it shall be
repeated in the junior year. No student shall be permitted to enter his
senior year with a deficiency in physical education.
ACADEMIC HONESTY
Members of an academic community have an unequivocal responsi­
bility to present as the result of their own work only that which is truly
theirs. Cheating, whether in examinations or by plagiarizing the work
of others, is a most serious offense, and one which strikes at the foun­
dations of academic life.
The responsibility of the Faculty in this area is three-fold: to explain
the nature of the problem to those they teach, to minimize temptation
and to report any case of cheating to the Deans for action by the College
Judiciary Committee.
The College Judiciary Committee will consider the case, determine
guilt, and recommend a penalty to the President. The order of magni­
tude of the penalty should reflect the seriousness of the transgression.
It is the opinion of the Faculty that for the first offense, failure in the
course, and as appropriate, suspension for a semester or deprivation of
the degree in that year, is not unsuitable; for a second offense the
penalty should normally be expulsion.
E X C L U S I O N FROM C O L L E G E
The College reserves the right to exclude at any time students whose
academic standing it regards as undesirable, and without assigning
any further reason therefor; and neither the College nor any of its
officers shall be under any liability whatsoever for such exclusion.

73

D EG R EE R EQ U IR EM EN TS
BACHELOR OF ARTS AND BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
The degree of Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Science are con­
ferred upon students who have met the following requirements for
graduation:
1. The candidate must have completed thirty-two courses or their
equivalent.
2. He must have an average grade of C on the courses counted for
graduation.
3. He must have complied with the distribution requirements.
4. He must have met the requirements in the major and supporting
fields during the last two years.
5. He must have passed satisfactorily the comprehensive examina­
tions in his major held or met the standards set by visiting examiners
for a degree with honor.
6. He must have completed four semesters of study at Swarthmore
College, two of which have been those of the senior year.
7. He must have completed the physical education requirement set
forth on page 72 and in statements of the Physical Education Depart­
ments.
8. He must have paid all outstanding bills and returned all equip­
ment and library books.
MASTER OF ARTS AND MASTER OF SCIENCE
The degree of Master of Arts or Master of Science may be con­
ferred subject to the following requirements:
Only students who have completed the work for the Bachelor’s
degree with some distinction, either at Swarthmore or at another
institution of satisfactory standing, shall be admitted as candidates
for the Master’s degree at Swarthmore.
The candidate’s record and a detailed program setting forth the
aim of the work to be pursued shall be submitted, with a recommen74

DEGREE REQUIREMENTS

dation from the department or departments concerned, to the Com­
mittee on the Master’s Degree. If accepted by the Committee, the can­
didate’s name shall be reported to the faculty at or before the first
faculty meeting of the year in which the candidate is to begin his work.
The requirements for the Master’s degree shall include the equiva­
lent of a full year’s work of graduate character. This work may be
done in courses, seminars, reading courses, regular conferences with
members of the faculty, or research. The work may be done in one
department or in two related departments.
A candidate for the Master’s degree shall be required to pass an
examination conducted by the department or departments in which
his work was done. He shall be examined by outside examiners, pro­
vided that where this procedure is not practicable, exceptions may be
made by the Committee on the Master’s Degree. The department or
departments concerned, on the basis of the reports of the outside ex­
aminers, together with the reports of the student’s resident instructors,
shall make recommendations to the faculty for the award of the degree.
At the option of the department or departments concerned, a thesis
may be required as part of the work for the degree.
A candidate for the Master’s degree will be expected to show be­
fore admission to candidacy a competence in those languages deemed
by his department or departments most essential for his field of re­
search. Detailed language requirements will be indicated in the an­
nouncements of departments which admit candidates for the degree.
The tuition fee for graduate students who are candidates for the
Master’s degree is $2,300 per year, and the general fee for these stu­
dents is $25 per semester.
ADVANCED E N G I N E E R I N G DEGREES
The advanced degrees of Mechanical Engineer (M.E.), Electrical
Engineer (E.E.), and Civil Engineer (C.E.), may be obtained by
graduates who have received their Bachelor’s degree in Engineering
upon fulfilling the requirements given below:
1. The candidate must have been engaged in engineering work for
five years since receiving his first degree.
2. He must have had charge of engineering work and must be in a
position of responsibility and trust at the time of application.
3. He must make application and submit an outline of the thesis he
expects to present, one full year before the advanced degree is to be
conferred.
75

DEGREE

REQUIREMENTS

4. The thesis must be submitted for approval one calendar month
before the time of granting the degree.
5. Every candidate shall pay a registration fee of $5 and an addi­
tional fee of $20 when the degree is conferred.

76

AW ARDS A N D PRIZES
The Ivy Award Fund was created by a gift from Owen Moon, ’94.
The income of the fund is placed in the hands of the faculty for
award on Commencement Day to a male member of the graduating
class. The qualifications for the Ivy Award are similar to those for
the Rhodes Scholarships and include (a) qualities of manhood, force
of character, and leadership; (b) literary and scholastic ability and
attainments. These have been phrased by the donor in the words
“leadership based upon character and scholarship.”
The Oak Leaf Award was established by David Dwight Rowlands
of the Class of 1909. It was later permanently endowed in memory
of him by Hazel C. Rowlands, ’07, and Caroline A. Lukens, ’98. The
award is made by the faculty each year to the woman member of the
Senior Class who is outstanding for loyalty, scholarship and service.
The McCabe Engineering Award, founded by Thomas B. McCabe,
1915, is to be presented each year to the outstanding engineering stu­
dent in the Senior Class. The recipient is chosen by a committee of
the faculty of the department of Engineering.
The Phi Beta Kappa Prize is awarded by the Swarthmore Chapter
to the member of the junior class who had the best academic record
for the first two years. The value of the prize is $40.
The Brand Blanshard Prize, honoring Brand Blandshard, professor
of philosophy at Swarthmore from 1925 to 1945, has been established
by David H. Scull, of the Class of 1936. The award of $50 is pre­
sented annually to the student who, in the opinion of the department,
submits the best essay on any philosophical topic.
The A. Edward Newton Library Prize of $50, endowed by A. Ed­
ward Newton, to make permanent the Library Prize first established
by W. W. Thayer, is awarded annually to that undergraduate who,
in the opinion of the Committee of Award, shows the best and most
intelligently chosen collection of books upon any subject. Particular
emphasis is laid in the award not merely upon the size of the collec77

AWARDS AND

PRIZES

tion but also upon the skill with which the books are selected and upon
the owner’s knowledge of their subject-matter.
The Katherine B. Sicard Prize of $5, endowed by the Delta Gamma
Fraternity in memory of Katherine B. Sicard, ’34, is awarded annually
to the freshman woman who, in the opinion of the department, shows
greatest proficiency in English.
Public Speaking Contests. Prizes for contests in public speaking
are provided as follows: The Ella Frances Bunting Extemporary
Speaking Fund awards prizes for the best extemporaneous short
speeches. The Owen Moon Fund provides the Delta Upsilon Speak­
ing Contests awards for the best prepared speeches on topics of cur­
rent interest. The William Plumer Potter Public Speaking Fund,
established in 1927, sponsors a contest in the reading of poetry as
well as providing funds for other contests described below and for
the collection of recorded literature described on page 51.
Three prizes for the best student-written one-act plays are provided
by the William Plumer Potter Fund. The winning plays are usually
produced during the fall semester by the Little Theater Club.
Prizes for the best student short stories are also awarded from the
William Plumer Potter Fund.
The Lois Morrell Poetry Award, given by her parents in memory
of Lois Morrell of the Class of 1946, goes to that student who, in the
opinion of the faculty, submits the best original poem in the annual
competition for the award. The award, consisting of $100, is made
in the spring of the year. All entries should be submitted by April 1.
The John Russell Hayes Poetry Prizes, of approximately $25 for a
first prize and $15 for a second prize, are offered for the best original
poem or for a translation from any language. Manuscripts should be
ready by April 1 of each year.
The Academy of American Poets has established at Swarthmore
College one of its five-year award programs. The Academy gives
$100 each year for the prize poem (or group of poems) submitted in
a competition under the direction of the Department of English Lit­
erature. The program was initiated in 1967.
The May E. Parry Memorial Award, given by the Class of 1925 of
which she was a member, is presented each year to the senior woman
who by her loyalty, sportsmanship, and skill in athletics has made a
valuable contribution to Swarthmore College. The recipient is chosen
by the faculty of the Department of Physical Education for Women.
78

FELLOW SHIPS
Three fellowships are awarded annually by the faculty, on recom­
mendation of the Committee on Fellowships, to seniors or graduates
of the college for the pursuit of advanced work. The proposed pro­
gram of study must have the approval of the faculty. Applications for
fellowships must be in the hands of the committee by April 15. Ap­
plicants for any one of these fellowships will be considered for the
others as well.
These three fellowships are:
The Hannah A. Leedom Fellowship of $1,100 founded by the
bequest of Hannah A. Leedom.
The Joshua Lippincott Fellowship of $1,400, founded by Howard
W. Lippincott, of the Class of 1875, in memory of his father.
The John Lockwood Memorial Fellowship of $1,400, founded by
the bequest of Lydia A. Lockwood, New York, in memory of her
brother, John Lockwood. It was the wish of the donor that the fel­
lowship be awarded to a member of the Society of Friends.
Four other fellowships are open to graduates of Swarthmore Col­
lege under the conditions described below:
The Lucretia Mott Fellowship, founded by the Somerville Literary
Society and sustained by the contribution of its life members, yields
an annual income of approximately $1,000. It is awarded each year
by a committee of the faculty to a woman graduate of that year who is
to pursue advanced study at some other institution approved by this
committee.
The Martha E. Tyson Fellowship, founded by the Somerville Lit­
erary Society in 1913, is sustained by the contributions of life mem­
bers of the society and yields an income of approximately $1,000.
It is awarded biennially by a committee of the faculty to a woman
79

FELLOWSHIPS

graduate of that year who plans to enter elementary or secondary
school work. The recipient of the award is to pursue a course of
study in an institution approved by the Committee of Award.
Sigma Xi Research Fellowship. The Swarthmore Chapter of Sigma
Xi appoints, from time to time, as funds are available, Fellows with
research grants with a maximum value of $1,000. The holders of this
fellowship are usually associates of the chapter who have shown con­
spicuous ability in graduate studies. The purpose of the chapter in
awarding these fellowships is to relieve worthy students from teach­
ing and other distracting duties so that they may concentrate as much
as possible upon their research. Applications for these fellowships
should be made to the secretary of the chapter not later than the mid­
dle of March. Appointments will be announced about the middle of
April.

80

COURSES OF IN ST R U C T IO N

A Physics Class in the Du Pont Lecture Room

COURSES OF IN ST R U C T IO N
The course (semester course) is the unit of credit. Seminars and
colloquia are usually given for double credit, i.e., equivalent to two
courses. A few courses are given for half-course credit.
A system of uniform numbering is used in all departments. Courses
are numbered as follows:
1 to 9—introductory courses
11 to 49—other courses open to students of all classes
51 to 69—advanced courses primarily for Juniors and Seniors.
101 to 199—seminars for Honors students and graduate students
Year courses the number of which are joined by a hyphen (e.g., 1-2)
must be continued for the entire year; credit is not given for the first
semester’s work only.

82

ART
Department of Art History
ROBERT M. WALKER, Professor and Chairman
HEDLEY H. RHYS, Professor
JOHN W. WILLIAMS, Associate Professor
TIM OTHY K. KITAO, Associate Professor
MOLLY FARIES, Instructor
The aim of the department is to study the historical significance and aesthetic
values of architecture, sculpture, painting and graphic art (prints and drawings).
Methods and problems of criticism are considered: observation, analysis, inter­
pretation and evaluation. Instruction is given by means of original works of art
as well as by the usual visual aids. Field trips are made to public and private
collections in New York, Philadelphia, Baltimore and Washington and to signifi­
cant examples of architecture in these areas.

Re q u ir e me nt s

and

R e commendati ons

Prerequisites: Majors in Course and majors and minors in Honors must take two
courses, one of which must be Art History 1. This requirement must be fulfilled
before the junior year. For other students the prerequisite for all other courses
is Art History 1, with the exception of Art History 30, Modern Architecture,
which is open to Engineers without any prerequisite.
Majors in Course: The program consists of at least eight courses (including Art
History 1) in the department. The student must have at least one course in each
of the major periods of art history.
Majors and Minors in Honors: Majors in Honors may take four seminars in the
department. A minor in Honors usually consists of two seminars. The seminars
offered in any one semester vary according to the requirements of the students
and the convenience of the department.
Language Requirements for Graduate Schools: Students are advised that gradu­
ate w ork in art history requires a knowledge of French and German.
I. Introduction to Art History. A critical study of the nature of architecture,
sculpture and painting in their historical context.
Each semester.
Staff.

Two hours of lectures and a conference meeting each week.

II. Design in Drawing and Painting. The basic elements of design and their
function in drawing and painting. Types of harmony, sequence and balance such
as linear, tonal and spatial. The methods of design and representation that char­
acterize the various historical styles. Practical exercises required demand no

83

ART
special technical aptitude, since the purpose of the course is to develop a critical
understanding of drawing and painting and not technical skill.
Spring semester. Mr. Rhys.
15. Ancient Art. A study of the development of the forms of architecture,
sculpture and painting as they express the cultural patterns of Ancient Greece
from the Bronze Age through the Hellenistic Age.
Fall semester. Mr. Walker.
16. Early Medieval Art. A concentration on selected aspects of Christian
A rt before A.D. 1000. In the fall of 1970 the topic will be the churches and
mosaics of Ravenna. Students who have taken Art History 16 are not excluded.
Fall semester. Mr. Williams.
17. Romanesque and Gothic Art.
to about 1350 A.D.
Spring semester. Mr. Williams.

The art of Western Europe from about 1000

18. Italian Renaissance Art. A study of Italian Art of the 15th and 16th cen­
turies with a consideration of certain special problems, for example, humanism
in art, art as problem-solving, historicism, idea of perfection and canon in art,
nature of stylistic changes, and the artist’s role in the society.
Fall semester. Mr. Kitao.
20. Northern Renaissance Art. A study of the art of France, The Nether­
lands, and Germany from approximately 1325 to 1550. Each time the course
is taught, one area will be selected for special emphasis, for example: manu­
scripts of the 14th century and the International Gothic style; Jan van Eyck;
Hieronymus Bosch; the development of narrative; Albrecht Diirer; painting of
the early 16th century in The Netherlands; A rt and the Reformation.
Spring semester. Miss Faries.
21. Baroque Art. A study of European art of the 17th century with a con­
sideration of certain special problems, among which the impact of the Catholic
Reformation on art and artists, the development of scientific methods, the rise
of art criticism and Academies, the question of reality and illusion, and com­
merce and consumption of art.
Spring semester. Mr. Kitao.
22. The Genesis of a Work of Art. An investigation of an art project in its
entirety, from its first formulation to its final realization. Intervening influences
and sources drawn upon during the problem-solving processes of its evolution
will be considered. Monuments that are the result of a sequential effort, or a
group effort such as the artist and his workshop, will be selected. The avail­
ability of pertinent information will also affect the selection. Possible examples
are: the stonecutter’s shop and the assemblage of Gothic facade sculpture;
Giotto’s fresco cycles; the conditions of an artist’s contract; Raphael’s Stanze
in- the Vatican; Baroque chapels; a Rubens altarpiece.
Fall semester. Miss Faries.
30. Modern Architecture. An introduction to the nature of architecture and
the functions of the architect through a study of the developments in European
and American building during the late nineteenth and twentieth centuries. The
specific influence of economic, technological and social changes upon design and
structure. Emphasis placed on the study of original examples in the New York

84

ART
and Philadelphia areas and on the work of such men as Sullivan, Wright,
Gropius, Mies van der Rohe, Saarinen and Le Corbusier.
The prerequisite of Art History 1 is waived for students in Engineering.
Spring semester. Mr. Walker
31. Modern Painting. Important stylistic developments in European painting
from the French Revolution through Matisse and Picasso: the meanings of the
various movements and their relationship to changing social and political atti­
tudes.
Fall semester. Mr. Rhys.
32. American Art. Architecture, sculpture and painting in North America
from the Colonial Period to the present day, their connection with European art
and their significance as a reflection of American culture.
Fall semester. Mr. Rhys.
51. Far Eastern Art. An introduction to the history of pictorial art in Asia,
especially China and Japan, from the earliest phases and origins of pictorial art
in China to new movements in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. Iconogra­
phy, stylistic definition and the treatment of form, color and space as they differ
from such concerns in Western art will receive special attention.
Spring semester. Mr. Rhys.
55. The Cinema. An introduction to the study of the cinema as art; a his­
torical survey, examination of techniques, theories, critical methods, and special
topics, varying from year to year.
Spring semester. Mr. Kitao.
56. The City. A study of visual and physical aspects of our man-made en­
vironment—our experiences and use of it, its effect on us, and the nature of its
growth and design. It involves perception, analysis, and interpretation of the
form, structure, imagery, and dynamics of selected historical and contemporary
examples.
Fall semester. Mr. Kitao.
57. Renaissance Tradition in American Cities. A study of the elements of
Renaissance and Baroque architecture and planning as they are found in their
pristine form in Italy and as they persist in American cities today, especially
in Philadelphia and Washington, D.C. Consideration will be given to the prob­
lems of conservation and urban development.
Spring semester. Mr. Kitao.
60. Senior Reading.
Spring semester. Staff.
61-62. Senior Thesis. With the approval of the department a thesis may be
written during the senior year.
Fall and spring semester. Staff.
65-66. Colloquium. Subject to be determined.
Spring semester. Mr. Williams.

H onors S e mi n ar s
101. Ancient Art. A study of the development of the forms of art and archi­
tecture as they express the cultural patterns of Ancient Greece from the Bronze
Age through the Hellenistic Age.
Fall semester. Mr. Walker.

85

ART
103. Medieval Art. The development of the forms of Christian art during the
Middle Ages from the fourth to the thirteenth century.
Fall semester. Mr. Williams.
.104. Italian Renaissance Art. A study of Italian Art of the 15th and 16th
centuries with a consideration of certain special problems, for example: human­
ism in art, art as problem-solving, historicism, idea of perfection and canon in
art, nature of stylistic changes, and the artist’s role in the society.
Spring semester. Mr. Kitao.
105. Northern Renaissance Painting. Developments in painting and the
graphic arts during the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries in France, the Nether­
lands and Germany with intensive study of individual masters: Jan van Eyck.
Roger van der Weyden, Jean Fouquet, Albrecht Dürer, Jerome Bosch and Pieter
Bruegel.
Fall semester. Miss Faries.
106. Baroque Art. A study of European art of the 17th century with a con­
sideration of certain special problems, for example: the impact of the Catholic
Reformation on art and artists, the development of scientific methods, the rise
of art criticism and Academies, the question of reality and illusion, and com­
merce and consumption of art.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Kitao.
107. Modern Painting. Important stylistic developments in European painting
from the French Revolution through Matisse and Picasso: the meanings of the
various movements and their relationship to changing social and political atti­
tudes.
Fall semester. Mr. Rhys.
108. Problems in Twentieth Century Art.
Spring semester. Mr. Rhys.
109. Master Print Makers. A consideration of certain problems in the history
of the graphic arts. A study of the work of such men as Schongauer, Dürer, Rem­
brandt, Goya, Daumier, Toulouse-Lautrec, and Picasso for the development of
expression in the media of woodcut, engraving, etching, aquatint and lithography.
Students work almost exclusively with originals in the Print Room of the Phila­
delphia Museum and the Lessing J. Rosenwald Collection in Jenkintown.
Spring semester. Mr. Walker.

Program in Studio Arts
HARRIET SHORR BAGUSKAS, Artist in Residence
JOSEPH BAILEY
WILL BROWN
LORRAINE SCHECHTER
KIT YIN TIENG SNYDER
The Studio Arts program at Swarthmore, designed to develop the visual
intelligence and analogic thinking, is based on a group meeting or “crit” where
student work is discussed by an instructor in the program or by a visiting artist.
Instructors and students in Studio Arts courses design the curriculum in re­

86

ART
sponse to the needs of students and the development of their work as revealed
by the-crit. Visiting artists and exhibitions in the Wilcox Gallery are integral
to the program.
The Visual Idea is the introductory course and is normally required of
students entering the program. Courses vary depending on the needs of students
and decisions of instructors concerning those needs, but offerings in painting,
drawing, print-making, sculpture, pottery, and photography and film are the
foundation of the program, though not all of these are offered for credit. Courses
involve three consecutive hours of studio instruction and three consecutive
hours of workshop. Students may receive credit for work in drawing, painting,
print-making, and sculpture after a semester’s work in The Visual Idea or on
the basis of the presentation of a portfolio of work to the instructing staff. The
portfolio may be the result of a semester’s work in Studio Arts without credit.
The instructors, engaged on a part-time basis, spend a full day each week
available to students who are enrolled in their courses as well as to those
students who wish to talk to them more generally. The program is guided by
an artist-in-residence who is a full-time faculty member and maintains a studio
at the College.
1. The Visual Idea.
problems in both two
possibilities for form
form.
Each semester. Mrs.

A three-hour studio course meeting once a week. Three
and three dimensions designed to help the student see the
in his visual experience and to explore ways of making
Baguskas.

2. Color. An investigation of color. Through work with colored papers the
student will explore relationships and the possibilities of creating form through
color. Recommended for painting students.
Each semester. Mrs. Baguskas.
3. Drawing. Three hour studio course. The student will be expected to fulfill
twelve drawing assignments in addition to work in the class. Introduction to the
problems of drawing and to the various drawing media. Emphasis on drawing
from the nude figure. Drawing trips, four during the semester, will enable the
student to explore the problems of landscape drawing.
Each semester. Staff.
4. An Introduction to Sculpture. An introduction and approach to the dis­
covery, exploration and practical use of three dimensional form. A course that
will allow the student to work directly with some of the basic concepts, forms
and materials used in producing sculpture through the use of models and other
creative means.
Each semester. Mr. Bailey.
7. Oil Painting.
Fall semester. Visiting staff.
8. Oil Painting.
Spring semester. Visiting staff.
9. Graphics. An introduction to the process of silkscreening. The student will
explore the possibilities of image making through the silk screen process of
reproduction.
Each semester. Miss Schechter.
Studio work, not given for course credit, is offered in photography and film,
and pottery. There will be twelve classes of two hours each during the semester.

87

ART
Photography and Film. Instruction in the techniques of film making. Indi­
vidual projects in film as well as a class film. Instruction in photography and
dark room techniques.
Each semester. Mr. Brown.
Pottery. Beginning course. An introduction to the techniques of forming stone­
ware pottery. Instruction in handbuilding, throwing on the potter’s wheel and
glazing.
Advanced course. (Six two-hour classes). Concentration on individual projects,
with the emphasis on form and glazing. Instruction in kiln operation.
Each semester. Mrs. Snyder.

A STR O N O M Y
PETER VAN DE KAMP, Professor
Chairman and Director of Sproul Observatory
WULFF D. HEINTZ, Associate Professor
JOHN L. HERSHEY, Research Associate and Lecturer
SARAH LEE LIPPINCOTT, Research Associate and Lecturer
KYONGAE CHANG, Research Assistant
Astronomy deals with the nature of the universe about us and the methods em­
ployed to discover the laws underlying the observed phenomena. The elementary
courses present the problems in broad outlines and trace the growth of our
knowledge of the facts and development of theories. The advanced courses con­
sider some of these problems in detail. The seminars deal primarily w ith the
techniques, methods and problems of the Sproul Observatory research program.
The principal instrument of the Sproul Observatory is the twenty-four-inch
visual refractor of thirty-six-foot focal length, used almost exclusively for photog­
raphy. The instrument, recently renovated, has been in operation since 1912 and
provides a valuable and steadily expanding collection of photographs. Measuring
and calculating machines are available for the measurement and reduction of the
photographs. The principal program of the Observatory is an accurate study of
the distances, motions and masses of the nearer stellar systems.
The Sproul Observatory is open to visitors on the second Tuesday night of
each month during the college year—October through May. With clear weather,
visitors have the opportunity of seeing many celestial objects of various types in
the course of a year. The visiting hours are from 7:00 to 8:30 p.m. in the fall and
winter, but are set later during the spring.

Requirements

and

R eco mmen da t i on s

Prerequisites for an Astronomy major, in course, are Astronomy 1-2,1-12,11-2,
or 11, 12, advanced courses and seminars (taken as double courses) in Astron­
omy, combined with work in mathematics and physics.
Prerequisites for admission to the honors program in Astronomy, either as a
major or a minor, are Mathematics 11, 12, Astronomy 1-2, 1-12, 11-2, or 11, 12,
Physics 1-2, and a reading knowledge of French, German or Russian.
1-2. Descriptive Astronomy. These courses provide an introduction to the
methods and results of astronomy. Fundamental notions of physics are studied

88

ASTRONOMY
as they are needed to provide an adequate scientific basis for the course. Three
class periods each week, practical work to be arranged.
Year course. Staff.
11. Intermediate Astronomy (Astromechanics; Descriptive). Celestial sphere,
celestial navigation. Motions of stars, planets and satellites. Kepler’s laws. New­
ton’s law of gravitation.
The two-body problem, introduction to the three-body problem and perturba­
tions. Orbits.
Survey of solar system. Atoms and radiation. Architecture, composition and
radiation of the sun.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 3,4 or equivalent; Physics 1,2, or equivalent, may
be taken concurrently with consent of instructor.
Fall semester. Mr. Heintz.
12. Intermediate Astronomy (Astrophysics; Galactic Structure). Observa­
tional data; spectrum-luminosity relation. Double stars; mass-luminosity relation.
Unstable stars. Stellar clusters. Interstellar material. Galaxies.
Structure of Milky Way system. Expanding universe; origin, age and evolution
of stars and galaxies.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 3,4, or equivalent; Physics 1,2, or equivalent, may be
taken concurrently with consent of instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Heintz and Mr. van de Kamp.
51. Celestial Mechanics. The two-body and three-body problems. Theory of
orbits and perturbations. Satellite motions.
Fall semester. Mr. Heintz.
52. History of Astronomy. Development from early times through Greek
and Medieval science to modern concepts of the universe.
Spring semester. Mr. Heintz.

H onors S emi nars
101. Astrometry. Spherical trigonometry, celestial sphere. Stellar positions and
their changes. Precession, proper motion, parallax and aberration. Solar motion,
galactic rotation. Relation between sphere and plane. Long-focus photographic
astrometry, technique and methods. Analysis of stellar paths for proper motion
and parallax; secular acceleration. Visual binaries; analysis for mass-ratio; per­
turbations. Star fields; clusters and multiple stars. Theory of errors, methods of
least squares.
Spring semester. Mr. van de Kamp.
104. Astrophysics. Review of observational material. Atomic spectra. The
gaseous state. Radiation. Continuous spectra of stars. Formation of absorption
lines. Stellar interiors.
Fall semester. Mr. Hershey.
110. Research Project.
Staff.

G raduate W ork
In conformity with the general regulations for work leading to the Master’s
degree (see page 74), this department offers the possibility for graduate work.
Candidates for the Master’s degree will normally take four Honors seminars,
selected from those listed in astronomy, mathematics or physics, in consultation

89

ASTRONOMY
with the faculty member under whose direction the work is to be done. A thesis
may be substituted for one of the seminars.
Candidates for the Master’s degree must have a good reading knowledge of
two modern languages.
The opportunity exists for pursuing advanced work at the Bartol Research
Foundation, which conducts doctoral programs in astronomy and physics. (See
p. 12).

B IO L O G Y
LAUNCE J. FLEMISTER, Professor
LUZERNE G. LIVINGSTON, Professor
NORMAN A. ME1NKOTH, Professor and Chairman
NEAL A. WEBER, Professor
KENNETH S. RAWSON, Associate Professor
JAMES C. HICKMAN, Assistant Professor
JOHN B. JENKINS, JR., Assistant Professor
ROBERT E. SAVAGE, Assistant Professor
BARBARA Y. STEWART, Assistant
JEAN D. TOMEZSKO, Assistant
The student may be introduced to the study of biology by taking Biology 1 and
Biology 2. Either course may be taken first. Together they offer an overview of
the field of biology. Biology 1 considers those principles and phenomena funda­
mental to all living systems, emphasizing cellular aspects. Biology 2 stresses the
organism. Advanced courses are listed under three categories: those dealing
specifically with plant biology (Botany), or animal biology (Zoology), and those
whose subject matter deals with phenomena common to all living organisms
(Biology).
Advanced work is taken up in two different ways: first, specific aspects of the
broad subjects are treated in a comparative manner as in anatomy and physiol­
ogy; second, broader aspects of a specific subject are treated as in entomology,
parasitology, embryology, genetics and developmental plant anatomy. The struc­
tural and functional consideration is extended to include problems of interde­
pendence of organisms in plant and animal societies and the influence of physical,
chemical and biological factors in the survival of those societies.

Requirements

and

R e co mme n da t i on s

A student may elect to major in biology, botany or zoology. Students in Course
should include the following supporting subjects in addition to the eight courses
in their major subject: chemistry, including at least one semester in organic
chemistry, two courses in physics and two in mathematics. These courses are
required for majors in botany or zoology, and should be completed by the end
of the junior year. The program for biology majors may be modified in respect to
outside requirements when the department considers cause for such modification
to be sufficient.

H onors W ork
Requirements for admission to Honors with major work in the department in­
clude: Biology 1 and 2, another course in the department, chemistry through
organic chemistry, physics, and first year mathematics. It should be noted that

90

BIOLOGY
certain subjects likely to be chosen as minors in other departments require a
second year of mathematics.
Honors students in this department may designate a major in biology, botany
or zoology according to their preferences. Offerings listed under Biology may be
included in a major in botany or zoology, but a botany major may not include
papers listed as Zoology nor the zoology major include those listed under Botany.
A major in biology will by definition include papers selected from among the
total departmental Honors offerings. Any Honors program in the biological sci­
ences must include at least two papers outside the department.
Students planning a minor in biology, botany or zoology should note the pre­
requisites listed for each seminar, and consult with the department chairman.

Biology
1. Principles of Biology. An introduction to the study of phenomena funda­
mental to living systems. The emphasis will be at the cellular level and will in­
clude the consideration of cell structure and function, genetics, cell differentia­
tion, and organic evolution.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory per week.
Fall semester. Staff.
2. Organismal Biology. An introduction to the study of whole organisms,
chiefly the higher plants and animals. While basic taxonomy will be included
stress will be placed on adaptive aspects of the morphology and physiology of
organisms, their development, behavior, ecology and evolution.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory per week.
Spring semester. Staff.
20. Biology of the Gene. The course will deal w ith three basic areas: The
discovery, structure, and replication of the genetic material; the transmission of
the genetic material; and the mode of action of the genetic material, including a
consideration of developmental genetics. Some time will be devoted to the his­
torical development of genetic concepts. Areas of genetics not covered in this
course (i.e. population genetics, quantitative inheritance, etc.) will be treated in
Biology 22.
Three lectures per week and a laboratory or library project.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 and 2, or consent of the instructor.
Recommended: Organic chemistry.
Fall semester. Mr. Jenkins.
21. Cell Biology. A study of the ultrastructure and function of cell components,
including cell division and development, biosynthesis of macro-molecules, and
intermediary metabolism. Laboratory exercises are designed to illustrate the
variety or approaches to findings in cell biology.
Prerequisites: Biology 1, and concurrent registration in organic chemistry.
Spring semester. Mr. Savage.
22. Organic Evolution. The course will concern itself w ith three major areas:
A history of evolutionary thought: an analysis of evolutionary mechanisms, in­
cluding discussions of genetic drift, genetic recombination, and mutation; and a
consideration of selected evolutionary pathways and the evidence which supports
them.
Three lectures per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 and 2, or consent of the instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Jenkins.

91

BIOLOGY
40. Man and Environment. The study of patterns of energy flow and mate­
rial cycling in the world ecosystem with particular reference to human popula­
tion. Consideration will be given to the methodology of ecological analysis and
its application to the study of the causes and consequences of the growth of
technology and human populations, especially in relation to the question of
environmental deterioration. Freshmen admitted by permission of the instruc­
tors. (Also listed as Sociology-Anthropology 40.)
Prerequisite: Biology 2 or Sociology-Anthropology 1.
Spring semester. Mr. Hickman and Mr. Mitchell.
59. Cytology. A consideration of the nucleus in regard to its structure and
activities and to its interaction w ith cytoplasm, including investigations of nuclear
ultrastructure, replication of chromosomal constituents, cell division, biosynthesis
of nucleic acids and proteins, the role of the nucleus and chromosomes in cell
development. Laboratory experiments are designed to illustrate the variety of
approaches to findings in cytology.
Three lectures and one laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 and organic chemistry.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Savage.
65. Directed Reading. W ith the permission of a staff member who is willing to
supervise it a qualified student may undertake a program of directed reading in an
area of biology not included in the curriculum, or as an extension of one of his
courses.
Fall or spring semester. Staff.
68. Biology of Bacteria. An approach to the study of bacteriology w ith prin­
cipal emphasis on the consideration of bacteria as organisms rather than as
causative agents of disease, etc. The morphology, physiology and biochemistry,
ecology, genetics, and classification of bacteria.
Three lectures and one laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1 and organic chemistry.
Spring semester. Mr. Livingston.

H onors S e mi n ar s
102. Cytology. A study of the structure and function of the cell. Living mate­
rial will be examined and modern microscopical techniques employed in the
laboratory.
Fall semester. Mr. Savage.
113. Genetics. An extension of the area covered in course 20, w ith particular
emphasis on current research in the field of inheritance in all its aspects. The
seminar discussion is accompanied by a full day of laboratory work each week.
Spring semester. Mr. Jenkins.

Botany
15. Taxonomy of Seed Plants. An introduction to the classification of flower­
ing plants and gymnosperms and its underlying theory and methods. Emphasis
is upon biologically, culturally, and economically important aspects of the world
flora, with special reference to native spring plants. Recent advances in biosystematics, plant speciation, biochemical and numerical taxonomy, phytogeny,
and biogeography are included. Suggested as an early course for biology majors

92

BIOLOGY
and as a cultural course for non-majors. Three lectures and one field trip
and/or laboratory per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 or consent of instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Hickman.
16. Developmental Plant Anatomy. The fundamentals of anatomy of seed
plants approached from a developmental standpoint. The structure and be­
havior of meristems, problems and processes of differentiation, and a detailed
analysis of cellular, tissue and organ structure in higher plants.
Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 1,2.
Alternate years, fall semester. Mr. Livingston.
18. Biology of Lower Plants. An introduction to the algae, fungi, mosses, and
ferns, including aspects of their classification, phytogeny, structure, physiology,
and ecology. The laboratories are in part exploratory and experimental. Their
content depends in part upon the current interests of staff and students.
Three lectures and one field trip and/or laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 1,2.
Alternate years, fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Livingston.
67. Plant Physiology. An integrated study of the physiological processes of
higher plants, including general cellular physiology, water relations, mineral
nutrition, enzyme action, photosynthesis, metabolic processes, translocation, the
physiology of growth and development, and related topics.
Two lectures, one discussion period, and one laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2 and organic chemistry.
Alternate years, spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Livingston.
70. Plant Ecology. A study of the response of plant individuals and com­
munities to environmental factors and the influence of plants upon their own
environments and those of selected other organisms. The physical nature of
the ecosystem is developed, with reference to the role of plants in energy flow,
material cycles, and soil formation. Divergent concepts of niche, community,
and biotic diversity are discussed, as are world patterns of vegetation and
productivity. Laboratory work emphasizes the collection, analysis, and inter­
pretation of field data.
Three lectures and one field trip or laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 2 and permission of the instructor.
Recommended: Botany 15.
Fall semester. Mr. Hickman.
71-72. Special Topics. With the permission of the department, qualified stu­
dents may elect to pursue a research program not included in the regular Course
program.
Staff.

H onors S e mi n ar s
111. Plant Physiology. An extension of the area covered in course 67, with
particular emphasis on a critical study of original sources, both classical and cur­
rent. The seminar discussion is accompanied by a full day of laboratory work
each week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2 and organic chemistry.
A lte r n a te y ea rs, sp r in g se m e s te r.

Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Livingston.
93

BIOLOGY
112. Problems of Plant Growth and Development. A correlated anatomical
and physiological approach to developmental plant anatomy and morphogenesis.
The seminar discussion is accompanied by a full day of laboratory work each
week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2 and permission of the instructor.
Alternate years, fall semester. Mr. Livingston.
118. Plant Ecology. A study of the interrelationships between plants and their
environment. Discussion periods are devoted to the development of basic prin­
ciples. Field and laboratory work applies these concepts to specific organisms
and habitants. Laboratory work is used to isolate problems encountered in the
field. Both higher plants and microorganisms are used as experimental materials.
Comparisons are made between aquatic and terrestrial habitants.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2 and permission of the instructor.
Alternate years, fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Hickman.
120. Special Topics. With the permission of the department, qualified stu­
dents may elect to pursue a research problem not included in the regular offer­
ings in Honors.
Staff.

Zoology
12. Vertebrate Physiology. A general consideration of the functional process
in animals with emphasis placed on mammals and other vertebrates. The aspects
of adaptation of the animal to environmental stress are treated in such a way as
to serve the individual student’s area of concentration. Two lectures and one
conference per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 recommended.
Spring semester. Mr. Flemister.
14. Vertebrate Morphology. A consideration of the vertebrate body plan at
the microscopic, developmental and adult gross morphological levels. Areas
stressed in some detail will include the structure and microscopic appearance of
vertebrate tissues and organs, embryonic development of an amphibian through
organogenesis and adult mammalian gross morphology.
Three hours of lecture or discussion and one laboratory period per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 2.
Fall semester. Mr. Weber.
25. Field Zoology. Emphasis is on the living animals as they occur in nature,
their systematics, relationships to the environment, habits and distribution.
Regional and world faunas will be discussed. Much of the work will be done in
the field.
Prerequisites: Biology 2, Zoology 14 desirable.
Spring semester. Mr. Weber.
52. Embryology. A study of development of vertebrate anatomy. The lec­
tures are concerned with an investigation of the events which precede develop­
ment, an analysis of the development processes, and a brief survey of the con­
tributions of the field of experimental embryology. Laboratory periods are
devoted to the embryology of the frog, chick and pig. Three lectures and one
laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Biology 1,2, Zoology 14.
F all se m e s te r.

94

Not offered in 1970-71.

BIOLOGY
53. Biology of Arthropods. The study of insects and their relatives, their
morphological and physiological adaptations and their effects on man. Labora­
tory work will include the study of living material and current research will be
considered. Each student will prepare a study collection from field trips.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Weber.
54. Biology of Parasitism. A consideration of parasitology with reference to
evolution and adaptation to the parasitic habit. Surveys are made of parasites in
native animals. Classification, life cycles and epidemiology are reviewed.
Alternate years, spring semester. Mr. Meinkoth.
56. Invertebrate Zoology. A course designed to acquaint the student with the
fundamental morphology, classification, phylogeny and special problems of the
invertebrate phyla.
Three lectures and one laboratory period per week. Occasional field trips.
Fall semester. Mr. Meinkoth.
57. Comparative Physiology. A course of lectures and laboratory experiments
treating functional processes from the standpoint of adaptation of the animal to
its environment. These processes in representative animals are compared in order
to follow their elaboration from the more general to the more specialized.
Two lectures and one laboratory period per week.
Prerequisites: Zoology 14, organic chemistry and physics.
Fall semester. Mr. Flemister.
58. Physiological Ecology. A course of lectures, discussions and experiments
concerning the physiological adaptations of representative animals to environ­
mental stress. Requirements and availability of optimum conditions of tempera­
ture, oxygen, food-stuffs and the maintenance of ionic independence are ap­
praised.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods per week.
Prerequisite: Zoology 57.
Spring semester. Mr. Flemister.
60. Biology of Animal Communities. The study of animals at the emergent
level of populations. Problems of animal behavior as related to the growth and
maintenance of populations will be considered with particular reference to com­
munication and social interaction within animal groups. Both field and labora­
tory study techniques will be used.
Two lectures per week and the equivalent of one laboratory meeting per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 2.
Fall semester. Mr. Rawson.
63,64. Special Topics. With the permission of the department, a qualified
student may elect a program of independent research for either one or two
semester course credits.
Fall and spring semesters. Staff.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

103. Embryology. An analysis of reproduction and development. The labora­
tory work includes individual projects by the students, a study of developmental
anatomy of the chick, pig and frog, and the observation of living material under
normal and experimental conditions.
Prerequisite: Zoology 14.
S p rin g se m e s te r.

Not offered in 1970-71.
95

BIOLOGY
104. Comparative Physiology. An intensive consideration of the physical and
chemical phenomena underlying the function of animals. A comparative ap­
proach is maintained in order to consider the progression from more general to
the most specialized adjustments, acclimatizations and adaptations of animals
to physical, chemical and biological stresses in the environment. The terminal
portion of the laboratory program is devoted to the pursuit of original, inde­
pendent work by the student.
Prerequisites: Zoology 14, organic chemistry and physics.
Fall semester. Mr. Flemister.
106. Biology of Arthropods. Following a survey of insects in general, a de­
tailed study of one aspect of the field will be undertaken. This will involve use of
a scientific library, independent work on one topic, and discussions of current
research.
Alternate years, fall semester.

Not offered in 1970-71.

Mr. Weber.

107. Invertebrate Zoology. A study of the morphology, taxonomy, natural his­
tory, distribution and adaptation of invertebrate phyla with a special emphasis
on evolutionary trends, ecological relations, and problems peculiar to each
group.
Alternate years, fall semester.

Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Meinkoth.

108. Sensory Physiology. The functional specializations of sense organs for
the transfer of information in biological systems are considered in relation to the
adaptations of vertebrate and invertebrate animals to their environments. Electrophysiological and behavioral approaches are used in laboratory studies.
Alternate years, spring semester.

Not offered in 1970-71.

Mr. Rawson.

109. Biology of Animal Communities. The subject of Course 60 in seminar
format. The analysis of the interrelations of species considered in an ecological
context including a study of animal behavior relating to the growth and mainte­
nance of animal populations.
Fall semester.

Mr. Rawson.

110. Special Topics. W ith the permission of the department, a qualified stu­
dent may include a program of independent research as part of his Honors pro­
gram.
Fall or spring semester.

Staff.

BLACK STUDIES
CLEMENT COTTINGHAM, JR., Director
The Black Studies concentration offers students the opportunity to develop
a deeper and broader understanding of the experiences, cultures, and goals of
black people, especially those in Africa and in the Americas. Because of the
unique nature of this area of study, the program offered will differ in some
respects from those of more institutionalized disciplines, and considerable flexi­
bility will be required. Therefore, students in the concentration will need to
work very closely both with the chairman of their department and the director
of the Black Studies program in working out their programs for each semester.

96

BLACK STUDIES
P

rogram

F

eatures and

R

eq u irem en ts

Students majoring in any subject bearing on Black Studies will be permitted to
concentrate in this area as an aspect of the work in their major. The subjects
normally falling in this category are Art History, Economics, English, History,
Music, Political Science, Religion, and Sociology-Anthropology. However, other
combinations are possible: for example, students seeking careers in urban plan­
ning through an Engineering major or in health planning through a Biology
major may wish to concentrate in Black Studies.
To concentrate in this area a student must take at least five semester courses
in the program, as well as fulfill the requirements of his major. Courses selected
must include a course in black history or in black consciousness and a course
involving work off-campus directly concerned with black problems. Other
courses may be taken according to individual preference. The work of students
concentrating in Black Studies will be reviewed and evaluated when completed
by whatever means, such as a comprehensive or a thesis, considered appropriate
by the director of the program.
C

ourse

O

ffering s

As already noted, courses in Black Studies will vary in particular semesters but
the principal offerings which will be generally available are listed below (for
descriptions of courses, see department statements in the catalogue).
Economics
The Black Worker in American Society. Mr. Anderson.

Spring semester

English
Black Literature.

Spring semester

French
Littérature et Négritude.

Mr. Barré.

History
Africa. Mr. Wright.
Topics in African History. Mr. Wright.
Afro-American History.
Topics in Afro-American History.
Philosophy
Black Philosophical Thought.

Fall semester
Not offered in 1970-71.

Mr. Bennett.

Political Science
Politics of Africa. Mr. Cottingham.
Problems in Community Government.

Spring semester
Fall semester

Mr. Cottingham.

Religion
African Religion and American Culture.

Mr. Barrett.

Spring semester

Sociology-Anthropology
African Modernization. Mr. Mitchell. Not offered in 1970-71.
Caribbean Society. Mr. Bramson.
Spring semester
Race and Ethnic Relations in the United States Mr. Van Til.
Not offered in 1970-71.

97

CHEMISTRY
EDWARD A. FEHNEL, Professor
WALTER B. KEIGHTON, JR., Professor and Chairman
JAMES H. HAMMONS, Associate Professor
PETER T. THOMPSON, Associate Professor
JAMES R. HUTCHISON, Assistant Professor
The aim of the Department of Chemistry is to provide a sound training in
the fundamental principles and basic techniques of the science rather than to
deal with specialized branches of the subject.
The minimum requirement for a major in Chemistry is eight courses in the
department. Majors are strongly advised to include in their programs Chem­
istry 28,29 and 61,62 (or 101), as well as a second year of mathematics.
Students are advised that sound preparation for professional work in chem­
istry includes: Chemistry 1,2 (or 3,4); 28,29; 61,62 (or 101); and at least four
additional semesters of chemistry; Physics 1,2 and two years of mathematics;
proficiency in reading scientific German, Russian, or French (preferably
G erm an).
Majors who wish to meet the minimum standards for professional training
of chemists set by the American Chemical Society should consult with their
advisers as to w hat additional work is required.
1,2. Introduction to Chemistry. A study of the central concepts and basic
principles of chemistry; the interpretation of chemical properties and reactions
through equilibrium constants, oxidation potentials, free energies, thermochem­
istry; the relation of chemical properties to atomic and molecular structure and
to the Periodic Table; rates and mechanisms of chemical reactions.
Students who enter college with advanced training in chemistry are en­
couraged to take a placement examination during freshman orientation week to
determine which college chemistry course they should take.
One laboratory period weekly.
Fall and spring semester. Mr. Keighton.
3,4. General Chemistry. The subject matter of this course parallels that of
Chemistry 1,2 but at a more advanced and mathematically oriented level. The
course is intended for students with a strong interest in chemistry, whose high
school preparation has been extensive, and who are prepared to work inde­
pendently.
Admission to this course is based on consultation with the staff and a placement
examination. Prior or concurrent enrollment in Physics 1,2 is highly desirable.
One laboratory period weekly.
Fall and spring semester. Mr. Thompson and Mr. Hutchison.
28,29. Organic Chemistry. An introduction to the chemistry of the more im­
portant classes of organic compounds, with emphasis on nomenclature, structure,
reactions, and methods of synthesis. Current theoretical concepts of structure and
mechanism are applied throughout the course to the interpretation of the proper­
ties and reactions of a wide variety of organic compounds. The laboratory work
illustrates some of the principles and reactions discussed in the classroom and
provides practical experience in the techniques involved in synthesizing, isolat­
ing, purifying, and characterizing organic compounds.
One laboratory period weekly.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1,2 or its equivalent.
Fall and spring semester. Mr. Fehnel.

98

CHEMISTRY
56. Organic Structure Determination. Classroom and laboratory study of the
principles and techniques involved in the elucidation of the structures of organic
compounds. Emphasis is placed on the correlation of structure and properties of
organic molecules and on the theoretical principles underlying various chemical
and spectroscopic methods of identification and structure determination.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 29.
One laboratory period weekly.
Fall semester. Mr. Hammons.
57. Analytical Chemistry. Many of the principles and techniques of analytical
chemistry are taught within the context of other courses listed in this section of
the catalogue. Course 57 is intended to provide further, and more advanced, ex­
perience with the theories, techniques and instruments used in analysis.
Prerequisite: Physical Chemistry.
58. Biological Chemistry. An introduction to the chemistry of living systems,
with emphasis on the relationship of molecular structure and chemical reactivity
to biological function. Consideration will be given to such topics as the organic
chemistry of cellular constituents, certain aspects of intermediary metabolism and
biosynthesis, mechanisms of enzyme action, and the chemical basis of genetics.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 29.
Fall semester. Mr. Hammons.
61,62. Physical Chemistry. The principles of physical chemistry are studied
and a number of numerical exercises are worked; the gaseous, liquid and solid
states, solutions, colloids, elementary thermodynamics, chemical equilibria,
electrochemistry, the kinetics of chemical reactions, elementary quantum theory
and statistical mechanics.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1,2 or its equivalent, a year of mathematics including
differential and integral calculus, Physics 1,2. Engineering students may enter
62 without previously taking 61, provided they have satisfied the other pre­
requisites.
One laboratory period weekly.
Fall and spring semesters. Mr. Hutchison.
65. Quantum Chemistry. Quantum mechanics is introduced and applied to a
variety of problems in valence theory and molecular structure determination.
Such topics as atomic structure, chemical bonding theory, molecular spectros­
copy, dielectric and magnetic phenomena, molecular symmetry, and statistical
mechanics are considered.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 62.
Fall semester. Mr. Hutchison.
65. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. Important principles for the understand­
ing of the chemical behavior of inorganic compounds are discussed. Topics in­
clude: electronic structure of atoms, ionic and covalent bonding, molecular or­
bital theory applied to inorganic compounds, and inorganic reaction mechanisms.
Considerable emphasis is placed on the chemistry of-transition metal coordina­
tion compounds through the application of ligand field theory.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 62. Chemistry 63 is highly desirable.
67. Physical Organic Chemistry. Selected topics in organic chemistry, in­
cluding resonance and molecular orbital concepts, physical properties of or­
ganic compounds, stereochemistry, mechanisms of ionic reactions, free radicals,
electrocyclic reactions, photochemistry, and other topics of current interest. A

99

CHEMISTRY
familiarity with physical chemistry is desirable.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 29.
Spring semester. Mr. Hammons.
68. Advanced Laboratory. Individual projects of the investigative or research
type in which the student has primary responsibility for the design of the
experiment and the solution of the problem. Normally two or three projects
in different areas will be assigned in each semester. This laboratory work is in­
tended to give the student practical experience in the solution of a research
problem, to develop facility in the use of the chemical literature and in the in­
terpretation and communication of experimental results, and to stimulate interest
in current developments in chemical research.
A prerequisite to this course is normally the completion of seven semester
courses in chemistry.
Both semesters. Staff.
69. Special Topics. The course provides an opportunity for qualified ad­
vanced students to undertake original investigations or to make detailed
literature studies of selected topics in the fields of inorganic, organic, analytical,
or physical chemistry. Students who propose to take this course should consult
with the appropriate instructor during the early part of the semester preceding
that in which the work is to be done.
Approximately ten hours of laboratory and/or library work weekly.
Fall and spring semester. Staff.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

Before admission to Honors work the chemistry major should complete Chem­
istry 1,2 or 3,4 and 28,29, two years of mathematics including a year of differ­
ential and integral calculus, and Physics 1,2. An Honors program in chemistry
should include Chemistry 56 and 57.
101. Physical Chemistry. The gaseous, liquid, and solid states, solutions,
elementary thermodynamics, chemical equilibria, electrochemistry, the kinetics
of chemical reactions, elementary quantum theory and statistical mechanics.
Prerequisites: Second year mathematics and general physics.
One seminar and laboratory weekly.
Spring semester. Mr. Thompson.
106. Physical Organic Chemistry. An intensive study of essentially the same
material covered in course 67. A familiarity with physical chemistry is desir­
able.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 28,29.
108. Valence and Molecular Structure. Quantum theory is developed and ap­
plied throughout to a variety of topics including: atomic structure, molecular and
atomic spectroscopy, theories of chemical bonding, and molecular structure de­
termination. Symmetry and group theoretical arguments are developed and ap­
plied extensively.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 101.
Fall semester. Mr. Thompson.
109. Thesis. Honors candidates may write a thesis as preparation for one of
their papers. The thesis topic must be chosen in consultation with some member
of the staff and approved early in the semester preceding the one in which the
work is to be done.

100

CLASSICS
HELEN F. NORTH, Professor and Chairman
MARTIN OSTWALD, Professort
RUSSELL MEIGGS, Cornell Visiting Professor
JULIA HAIG GAISSER, Assistant Professor
THOMAS N. MITCHELL, Assistant Professor
GILBERT P. ROSE, Assistant Professort
The Department of Classics offers instruction in the various fields which con­
stitute the study of Greek and Roman culture. Courses numbered from 1 to 20 are
devoted to the Greek and Latin languages and literatures. Courses numbered
from 31 onwards presuppose no knowledge of the Greek or Latin languages and
are open (except for 42 and 44) without prerequisite to all students; they deal
with the history, mythology, religion, archaeology, and other aspects of the
ancient world and include the study of classical literature in translation.
Swarthmore College contributes to the American Academy in Rome and the
American School of Classical Studies in Athens, and its students have the privi­
leges accorded to undergraduates from contributing institutions (use of the
library at both schools and consultation with the staff). Swarthmore is also one
of the institutions sponsoring the Intercollegiate Center for Classical Studies in
Rome, which provides facilities for the study of Classics, Archaeology, and
Ancient History. Classics majors, recommended by the Department, are eligible
to study at the Center, usually during their junior year, either for one semester or
for two.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

R

eco m m end a tio ns

Greek, Latin, or Ancient History may be offered as a major subject either in
Course or in Honors, and as a minor subject in Honors.
A major in Greek or Latin in Honors or in Course should complete during
the first two years either Intermediate Greek or Intermediate Latin.
In Honors, a major in Greek is also expected to study Latin through the
intermediate level and a major in Latin is expected to study Greek through the
intermediate level before graduation.
Minor students in Honors should complete during the first two years either
Intermediate Greek or Intermediate Latin.
Majors in both Honors and Course are strongly advised to take for at least
one semester a course in prose composition (Greek 9,10 or Latin 9,10).
In the Honors program, three or four papers constitute a major in Greek
or in Latin. Normally all but one of these will be prepared for by seminars.
Either Directed Reading in a field in which a seminar is not given (courses
17,18), a thesis, or a course supplemented by additional independent work
(i.e., an “attachment”) may be used to prepare for the remaining paper. A
minimum of two papers constitutes a minor in Greek or in Latin, at least
one of which must be prepared for by a seminar.
A major in Ancient History will consist of (1) Classics 42, with attachments,
(2) Classics 44, with attachments, and (3) either or both of the following:
Greek 113, Latin 102. The prerequisites for Classics 42 and 44 are Classics 31
and 32. For Greek 113 the prerequisite is one year of Intermediate Greek, for
Latin 102, one year of Intermediate Latin.
A minor in Ancient History will consist of (1) and (2) above, with the
specified prerequisites.
tAbsent on leave, 1970-71.

101

CLASSICS
Majors in Latin in Course or Honors are eligible for certification as secondary
school teachers in Pennsylvania, provided that they include in their programs
a course in Roman history and either Classics 35 or Classics 36.

Greek
1-2. Elementary Greek. The essentials of Greek grammar are covered and
selections from masterpieces of Greek literature are read.
Year course. Miss North.
9,10. Greek Prose Composition. Course meets one hour a week. This course
is recommended in conjunction with courses at the intermediate level or above,
to provide the student w ith grammatical and stylistic exercise.
Half course, each semester. Staff.
11,12. Intermediate Greek.
tions from Homer are read.
Mr. Mitchell.

Plato’s Apology, a play of Euripides, and selec­

13,14. Greek Prose Authors. The works read are determined by the interests
and needs of the members of the class. These readings are supplemented by a sur­
vey of the history of Greek Literature. Credit is given for each semester.
Miss North.
15,16. Greek Poets. The works read are determined by the interests and
needs of the members of the class. Credit is given for each semester. The course
is offered only when required.
Mrs. Gaisser.
17,18. Directed Reading. A program of independent work under the super­
vision of the instructor. It is open only to advanced students and may be taken
only with the consent of the departmental chairman.
Staff.
19. Comparative Grammar of Greek and Latin. A study of the morphology,
phonology, and inflection of Greek and Latin words derived from Indo-Euro­
pean. Students are expected to have the equivalent of at least two college years
of one language and one college year of the other. No prior experience in linguis­
tics is assumed.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Rose.
20. Special Topics. Readings selected to fit the needs of individual seniors in
preparation for their comprehensive examinations.
Staff.

Latin
_1-2. Elementary Latin. An intensive course in the essentials of Latin grammar
aiming to provide sufficient knowledge of the language to make possible the
study and appreciation of Latin literature.
Study of the language is combined with a weekly meeting in which students are
introduced to a wide range of topics related to the study of Latin. These include
such subjects as Roman art, archaeology, palaeography, religion, and (in transla­
tion) masterpieces of Latin literature. These meetings will normally be conducted
by specialists from the Swarthmore faculty and from neighboring colleges.

102

CLASSICS
The course will have four one-hour meetings each week, for the study of the
language, and one two-hour meeting each week for lecture and discussion. It
carries one and one-half course credits each semester.
Year course. Mr. Mitchell.
3. Intermediate Latin: Catullus. A study of the lyric, elegiac, and hexameter
poetry of Catullus. This course follows Latin 2 and is open to those with two
or three years of high school Latin.
Fall semester. Mrs. Gaisser.
4. Intermediate Latin: Cicero. An Oration and Selected Letters. This course
is designed to introduce students to a great historical and literary figure of the
Roman Republic. It combines a study of his major political and literary
achievements with a careful analysis of his prose style.
Spring semester. Mr. Mitchell.
9,10. Latin Prose Composition. The development of Latin prose style is
studied, with an analysis of Latin texts and extensive translation of English into
Latin. A requirement for majors, it is recommended in conjunction with Latin 3
and Latin 4. The course meets one hour a week.
Half course, each semester. Staff.
11. Introduction to Latin Literature. A study of Roman Comedy. This course
is normally open to students who have had four or more years of high school
Latin. Students admitted with fewer than four years of Latin are required to
take Latin 9 in conjunction with this course.
Fall semester. Mrs. Gaisser.
12. Horace. A study of the Odes of Horace. This course is normally open to
students who have had four or more years of high school Latin. Students ad­
mitted with less than four years of high school Latin are required to take Latin
10 in conjunction with this course.
Spring semester. Miss North.
13. Ovid and Latin Elegy. A study of Ovid and the Roman elegists, Propertius
and Tibullus.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Staff.
14. Mediaeval Latin. Works chosen from the principal types of mediaeval
Latin literature (including religious and secular poetry, history and chronicles,
saints’ lives, satire, philosophy, and romances) are studied in this course.
Spring semester. Miss North.
17,18. Directed Reading. A program of independent work under the super­
vision of the instructor. It is open only to advanced students and may be taken
only with the consent of the departmental chairman.
Staff.
20. Special Topics. Readings selected to fit the needs of individual seniors in
preparation for their comprehensive examinations.
Staff.

Ancient History and Civilization
31. History of Greece. The course is devoted to the study of the political and
social history of the Greek states to the time of the Hellenistic kingdoms. This is
preceded by a brief survey of the Oriental civilizations by which the Greeks

103

CLASSICS
were influenced. Special attention is given to the 6th and 5th centuries B. C.
Considerable reading is done in the primary sources in translation. Classics 31
meets the distribution requirement for Group 3; it counts towards a major
in History.
Fall semester. Mr. Meiggs.
32. The Roman Republic. A study of the Roman world in the period 300-44
B.C. Four major subjects will be dealt w ith in detail: (1) The evolution of the
Republican constitution, (2) Rome’s wars of expansion and the acquistion of her
empire, (3) The Roman Revolution, and (4) The cultural background.
Students will be required to read the pertinent original sources in translation, as
well as a selection of modern viewpoints. Students’ reports and discussion will
accompany the lectures. There is no prerequisite. Classics 32 meets the distribu­
tion requirement for Group 3; it counts towards a major in History.
Spring semester. Mr. Meiggs.
33. Greek Literature in Translation. The works read in this course include
the Iliad, Hesiod’s Theogony and Works and Days, much of Greek tragedy and
comedy, selections from the historians, the lyric and elegiac poets, and the preSocratic philosophers, and several dialogues of Plato. The course is given in
alternate years.
Fall semester. Miss North.
34. Colloquium on the Ancient Theatre. All extant examples of Greek and
Roman drama (both tragedy and comedy) will be read in translation, and there
will be a study of ancient dramatic production and the physical remains of Greek
and Roman theatres. There is no prerequisite, but preference will be given to
students who have had some previous acquaintance with dramatic literature, or
have taken Classics 33 or 35.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Miss North.
35. Latin Literature in Translation—Classical and Mediaeval. The works
studied in this course range in time from the age of the Roman Republic to the
twelfth century after Christ. They include the major authors of the classical
period, St. Jerome and St. Augustine from the Latin Fathers, and from the Middle
Ages Boethius, Prudentius, the chief figures of the Carolingian Renaissance, and
the writers of Mediaeval Latin hymns and secular poetry.
The course is given in alternate years.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Miss North.
36. Classical Mythology in Literature and Art. The course is designed to give
familiarity with those myths and legends that have served as material for writers
and artists from ancient times to the present. The principal works studied are
Homer’s Odyssey, Hesiod’s Theogony, selected Greek tragedies, Virgil’s Aeneid,
the Metamorphoses of Ovid, and Dante’s Commedia. A study is made of the way
in which mythological themes have been handled in painting and sculpture at
various periods, and topics for papers provide an opportunity for the study of the
treatment of mythology by writers from the Renaissance to modern times.
The course is normally given in alternate years.
Spring semester. Miss North.
42. Greece in the Fifth Century B.C. An intensive study, chiefly on the basis
of primary sources, of Athens and the Greek world from the reforms of Cleisthenes to the end of the Peloponnesian War. Special emphasis is placed on the
political, social, and economic institutions of the Athenian democracy and on

104

CLASSICS
the problems of the Delian League, both internal and in its relation to the Greek
and non-Greek world. Classics 42 counts towards a major in History.
The course is normally given in alternate years.
Prerequisite: Classics 31 or its equivalent.
Fall semester. Mr. Meiggs.
44. The Roman Empire. This course treats in detail the political, economic,
social, and cultural history of the Roman world from the death of Julius Caesar
to the death of Marcus Aurelius in A.D. 180. Special attention is given to Octavian’s rise to power, the transformation of the republican constitution into an
autocracy, and the impact of this change on the administration of the empire, on
the structure of Roman society, and on literary and artistic movements. Classics
44 counts towards a major in History.
The course is normally given in alternate years.
Prerequisite: Classics 32 or its equivalent.
Spring semester. Mr. Meiggs.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

102. Roman Historians. This seminar combines a survey of Latin historical
writing to the end of the Silver Age with intensive study of selected books of
Livy and Tacitus, both as examples of Roman historiography and as sources for
Roman history.
Spring semester. Mr. Meiggs.
103. Latin Epic. This seminar traces the development of Roman epic poetry,
with particular emphasis on the De Rerum Natura of Lucretius and the Aeneid of
Virgil. Some attention is also given to early Roman epic, as represented by the
Annales of Ennius, and to the later epic, typified by Lucan’s Pharsalia.
Spring semester.
104. Roman Satire. A study of the Satires and Epistles of Horace and of the
Satires of Juvenal is supplemented by a general survey of the development of
Roman satire.
Fall semester. Mr. Mitchell.
105. Cicero. A study of the political and forensic speeches of Cicero and of his
personal correspondence as sources for the political and constitutional history of
the final years of the Roman Republic. Attention is also paid to Ciceronian prose
style as exemplified in his letters and orations.
Fall semester. Mr. Mitchell.
111. Greek Philosophers. This seminar is devoted mainly to the study of
Plato, which is supplemented by study of the pre-Socratic philosophers and of
Aristotle and the Hellenistic schools. The orientation of the seminar is primarily
philosophical, although the literary merits of the Greek philosophers receive con­
sideration.
Fall semester.
112. Greek Epic. The study of Homer’s Iliad or Odyssey constitutes the chief
work of this seminar. Some attention is also paid to Hesiod’s Theogony and to
the Argonautica of Apollonius of Rhodes.
Spring semester. Miss North.

105

CLASSICS
113. Greek Historians. This seminar is devoted to a study of Herodotus and
Thucydides, both as examples of Greek historiography and as sources of Greek
history.
Fall semester. Mr. Meiggs.
114. Greek Drama. The whole body of extant Greek tragedies and comedies
is studied, w ith a careful reading in the original language of one play by each of
the major dramatists.
Spring semester. Miss North.

ECONOMICS
EDWARD K. CRATSLEY, Professor
FRANK C. PIERSON, Professor and ChairmanX
VAN DOORN OOMS, Associate Professor and Acting Chairman
HOWARD PACK, Associate Professor
FREDERIC L. PRYOR, Associate Professor
BERNARD SAFFRAN, Associate Professor
LEWIS R. GATY, Lecturer
HELEN M. HUNTER, Lecturer
ANITA A. SUMMERS, Lecturer
BERNARD E. ANDERSON, Visiting Lecturer*****
ROBINSON J. HOLLISTER, JR., Visiting Lecturer**
The courses in economics are designed: first, to acquaint the student w ith the
institutions and processes through which the business of producing, exchanging,
and distributing goods and services is organized and carried on; second, to train
him in the methods by which these institutions and processes may be analyzed;
and third, to enable him to arrive at informed judgments concerning relevant
issues of public policy.
Course 1-2A is prerequisite to all other work in the department except courses
3 and 4. Students intending to major in economics are advised to take Political
Science 1 (Elements of Politics) and Economics 4 (Statistics). While not essen­
tial, college-level mathematics would also be helpful. Students intending to do
graduate work in economics should also take Mathematics 5,6,11, and, if possi­
ble, 22. Majors in Course are required to take courses 50 and 51 in the junior
year, and course 59 in the senior year. Majors in Honors are advised to take
seminars 103 and either 101 or 102. Students intending advanced work in busi­
ness finance, money and banking, public finance, or public regulation, and those
intending to go to law school or business school, will find accounting helpful.
1-2A. Introduction to Economics. This course, which is IV2 semesters in
length, is designed both to afford the general student a comprehensive survey and
to provide students doing further work w ith a foundation on which to build. It
describes the organization of the economic system and analyzes the allocation of
resources, the distribution of income, the maintenance of economic stability, and
international economic relations. On completing the course, students will have
the option of joining seminars for one half course credit held during the last seven
weeks of the semester.
Staff.
{Absent on leave, 1970-71.
**Fall semester, 1970-71.
***Spring semester, 1970-71.

106

ECONOMICS
3. Accounting. The purpose of this course is to equip the student with the
rudiments of accounting that he will need to employ in his advanced work in
business finance, banking, taxation, and public regulation.
Spring semester. Mr. Cratsley.
4. Statistics. The course is designed to make the student a critical user of
statistics. Topics covered include frequency distributions, sampling, correlation,
economic time series, and an introduction to econometric analysis. Students ac­
quire some familiarity with the IBM computer.
Fall semester. Mrs. Hunter.
11. Economic Development. Requisites for the economic development of un­
derdeveloped countries. Obstacles to development. Strategy and tactics of de­
velopment. Aid for development.
Spring semester. Mr. Ooms.
50. Economic Theory. Determination of prices in theory and in practice. Dis­
tribution of income. Economic welfare aspects of various market structures.
Fall semester. Mr. Gaty.
51. Money and Banking. Organization and operation of commercial banking
in the United States. Central banking; the Federal Reserve system. Macroeconomic and monetary theory. Monetary policy.
Spring semester. Mrs. Hunter.
52. Public Finance. Social goals and fiscal institutions, Federal, state, and
local, including analysis of public expenditures, taxation, the national debt, fiscal
federalism, and current fiscal policy.
Fall semester. Mr. Pack.
53. Econometrics. A six-week survey of the theory of multiple regression and
the problems encountered in using multiple regression in economic analysis. This
will be followed by individual empirical research projects on economic topics
selected by students. Admission by permission of the instructor.
Spring semester. Mrs. Hunter.
54. Business Finance. Analysis of private financial instruments, markets, and
institutions, and public regulation of financial practices.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Gaty.
55. Labor Problems. The structure and functions of labor unions. Employer
approaches to labor relations. Analysis of wage policies. Governmental control of
labor relations.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Pierson.
56. Social Economics. The extent, consequences, and causes of poverty and
economic insecurity; an appraisal of reforms in social insurance, medical care,
public housing, and rural development; the economics of discrimination and
urban ghettos.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
57. Managerial Economics. Analysis of business decision-making; economic
theory and management control; market structure, pricing, and output; the
budgetary process and business planning; business behavior and social welfare.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71.

107

ECONOMICS
58. Public Control of Business. Maintenance of competition in American in­
dustry; moderation of competition in agriculture, extractive industries, and dis­
tributive trades. Regulation of public utilities, transport, and communications.
Public ownership and operation of industry.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Gaty.
59. Economic Stability. National income theory. Analysis of business fluctua­
tions and long-term economic change. Public policies for stabilization and
growth.
Spring semester. Mr. Pack.
60. International Economics. Theory and practice of international trade. Bal­
ance of payments, foreign exchange, national commercial policies, international
investment, and foreign aid.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Ooms.
61. Comparative Economic Systems. Analysis of methods by which economic
systems can be compared; case studies of the Soviet Union, Yugoslavia, and sev­
eral West European nations.
Spring semester. Mr. Pryor.
65. Political Economy of Multinational Enterprises. This course will ex­
amine the political and economic significance of multinational enterprises,
which have recently become increasingly important in the international econ­
omy. Problems discussed will include those of efficiency of resource allocation,
economic and political concentration, distributive equity in the use of and
payment for resources, and political relationships between host and investing
countries. The concept of political and economic “imperialism” will be ex­
amined within a framework of modern economic and political analysis.'
Students enrolling in this course should have some knowledge of economic
analysis and international politics, such as is provided in Economics 1-2A
and Political Science 4. Students without this background should consult the
instructors before enrolling.
Fall semester. Mr. Keohane and Mr. Ooms.
70. Economic Anthropology. Examination of the economic institutions of
primitive and peasant societies. Theoretical issues such as the meaning of “eco­
nomic” and the nature of surplus will be considered, in addition to such sub­
stantive issues as the origins and kinds of money, property, labor, trade and
markets.
Fall semester. Mr. Novick and Mr. Pryor.
75. The Black Worker in American Society. This course will trace the eco­
nomic status of black workers in this country from the period of slavery to the
present. The relative income position and career patterns of black workers
will be examined in terms of geographical, industrial and occupational changes,
and in terms of the economic, political and institutional influences which have
brought about these changes. Relevant policies of union, management and
government will also be reviewed. One major feature of the course will be
independent investigation and research of contemporary employment prob­
lems of black workers.
Enrollment will be limited. Prerequisite: Economics 1.
Spring semester. Mr. Anderson.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

101. Finance. Social goals and fiscal institutions, Federal, State, and local, in­
cluding analysis of public expenditures, taxation, the national debt, fiscal fed­

108

ECONOMICS
eralism, and current fiscal policy. Analysis of private financial instruments,
markets, and institutions, and public regulation of financial practices.
Fall semester. Mr. Pack.
102. Economic Stability and Growth. The theory of cyclical fluctuations and
secular growth. Money and banking. Monetary and fiscal policy. Wage-price pres­
sures and the control of inflation.
Spring semester. Mr. Pack.
103. Economic Theory. Contemporary theory: price determination, the func­
tional distribution of income, the level of employment. Evaluation of theory in
the light of simplifying assumptions and empirical evidence. The relevance of
theory to socio-economic problems.
Each semester. Mr. Saffran.
104. Public Control of Business. The maintenance of competition in American
industry. The moderation of competition in agriculture, the extractive industries,
and the distributive trades. The regulation of public utilities, transport, and com­
munications. Public ownership and operation of industry.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Gaty.
105. International Economics. Theory and practice in international economic
relations. The pure theory of international trade. The balance of payments and
the mechanism of international exchange. Restrictionism and discrimination.
Regionalism. Relations w ith controlled economies. International investment and
foreign aid.
Spring semester. Mr. Ooms.
106. Comparative Economic Systems. Analysis of methods by which economic
systems can be compared; study of resource allocation and growth in socialist,
capitalist, and mixed economies; case studies of the U.S.S.R., Yugoslavia, China,
France, and other nations; examination of special problems in economic plan­
ning.
Spring semester. Mr. Pryor.
107. Labor and Social Economics. The organization of labor. Analysis of wage
policies. Government control of labor relations. Problems stemming from income
inequality and insecurity. Methods of income maintenance. Economic aspects of
education, medical care, public housing. Special topics in urban economics.
Fall semester. Mr. Hollister and Mr. Pryor.
108. Econometrics. Econometric theory and empirical studies. An empirical
research paper is required.
Prerequisites: Mathematics 11 and Economics 103.
Spring semester. Mr. Saffran.
109. Economic Development. An examination of the problems of economic
development and growth in low-income countries, with attention to both
historical experience and current issues of development policy. Techniques of
economic planning and instruments of policy will be studied. Emphasis will
be placed upon case studies of individual countries, and each student will
prepare at least one research paper of considerable depth.
Fall semester. Mr. Ooms and Mr. Pack.

109

EDUCATION
JOSEPH B. SHANE, Professor
ALICE K. BRODHEAD, Lecturer & Director of Student Teaching
BARBARA Z. PRESSEISEN, Lecturer
There is no major in Education, but Swarthmore students may offer the
following program of courses in conjunction with a major or a concentration
of courses stipulated by the departments in the following fields for the Instruc­
tional I Certificate for secondary schools teachers in Pennsylvania: Biology,
Chemistry, Comprehensive English, Comprehensive Social Studies, Economics,
French, German, History, Latin, Mathematics, Physics, Physics and Mathe­
matics, Russian, Sociology, and Spanish. Students are referred to the pertinent
department, to Mrs. Brodhead, or to the Registrar for further information about
teacher certification. Courses in Education may also be taken by students who
are not seeking certification.
Psychology 3. Introduction to Psychology.
Psychology 11. Educational Psychology.
Either Education 14. Introduction to Teaching
or Education 12. Principles & Methods of Secondary Education.
Either Education 15. History of Education,
or Education 17. Problems in Urban Education.
Education 16. Student Teaching.
11. Educational Psychology. Problems and issues in contemporary educa­
tion viewed in a psychological context. Specific content of seminar discussion
and reading to be determined by the class. Possible topics include: curriculum
development, learning theory, epistemology, socialization, morality, discipline,
motivation, testing and measurement, language and communication, and the
theories of Piaget, Skinner, and Bruner. Open only to students previously or
currently enrolled in Introduction to Teaching except by permission of the
instructor.
Fall semester. Mr. Bernheim.
12. Principles and Methods of Secondary Education. A study of the prin­
ciples of secondary education, with emphasis upon aims and organization.
Visits to nearby schools are made.
Spring semester. Mr. Shane.
14. Introduction to Teaching. An exploratory course designed ‘ to help
students determine their own interest in preparing to teach, as well as to
furnish them with opportunities for learning about elementary and secondary
schools in order to operate as informed parents and citizens. Current educa­
tional theory will be discussed and compared with contemporary practice.
Each semester. Mrs. Brodhead and Mrs. Presseisen.
15. History of Education. Educational thought in our western culture from
the Greeks to the present day, with emphasis upon the development of the
public schools in the U.S. Weekly seminar in which members of the Classics,
History, Philosophy, and Religion departments participate.
Mrs. Brodhead.
16. Student Teaching. Practice teaching with appropriate guidance in sub­
ject methods is available to juniors and seniors who seek teacher certification
at the secondary level. Education 14, Introduction to Teaching, or Education
12, Principles and Methods of Secondary Education, and Psychology 11, Edu­
cational Psychology, are required.
Each semester. Mrs. Presseisen.

110

EDUCATION
17 Problems in Urban Education. This course considers the problems of
schools in big cities, related to topics such as financial support, community
relations, professional staff, curricular innovation, pupil personnel. A weekly
seminar, individual study, and field investigation in the city of Philadelphia.
Fall semester. Mrs. Brodhead.
Linguistics 38. Reading and Writing. This course is designed primarily for
students involved in reading tutorial programs, and for those intending to
teach. At issue is the problem of reading in both its conceptual and social
aspects. Students will tutor or assist in teaching reading as part of the course
work. Weekly meetings with the instructor will concern theoretical issues m
phonology, reading, and writing; methods of teaching; and discussion of the
ongoing tutorial programs.
Spring semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
Philosophy 30. The Philosophy of Education. The idea of education in phi­
losophy, and the implications of philosophical and psychological theories for
educational practice. Readings may include: Plato, Rousseau, Kant, Tolstoy,
Dewey, James, Whitehead, Montessori, Skinner, Piaget, Neill, Laing, and
McLuhan.
Fall semester. Mr. Bennett and Mr. Bernheim.

ENGINEERING
SAMUEL T. CARPENTER, Professor and Chairman
JOHN D. McCRUMM, Professor
BERNARD MORRILL, Professor
CARL BARUS, Associate Professor
DAVID L. BOWLER, Associate Professort
RAYMOND DOBY, Associate Professor
M. JOSEPH WILLIS, Associate Professor
G. STUART PATTERSON, JR., Assistant Professort
VICTOR K. SCHÜTZ, Assistant Professort
The Department of Engineering offers engineering programs directed toward
four principal educational aims: to introduce the student to a body of knowledge
fundamental to all of modern engineering; to provide him with a comprehensive
base of mathematics, chemistry and physics; to allow him maximum flexibility in
electing plans of study to suit individual objectives; to provide him the oppor­
tunity to study in the humanities and social sciences. The overall plan leading
to a degree of Bachelor of Science with the major in Engineering is accredited
by the Engineers’ Council for Professional Development.
The professional practice of engineering requires skill and resourcefulness in
applying scientific knowledge and methods to the solution of engineering prob­
lems of ever growing technical complexity. In addition, the role of engineering in
our society demands that the engineer recognize and take into account the eco­
nomic and social factors that bear on his technical problems. The successful engi­
neer will therefore possess an understanding of socio-economic forces, an appre­
ciation of the cultural and humanistic aspects of the society in which he lives,
and a sound working knowledge of human relations. O ur total program furthers
these objectives by providing the student with a broad technical knowledge, to­
gether with the foundation of a liberal education.
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71.
$Absent on leave, 1970-71.

Ill

ENGINEERING
Courses in the Department of Engineering are open to all students who have
the interest and the prerequisite background. Special inquiries may be made
through the chairman of the department. Courses E l, E2, E7, E8 and E56 may be
especially relevant to some student programs.
The use of the College’s computer facilities is central to an engineering educa­
tion at Swarthmore. The Department has developed a number of courses dealing
with computers which would be of interest to students in all departments of the
College. These include an introductory course in Digital Computers, a course in
Special Computer Topics, and a course in Special Topics—Numerical Analysis
for Computers. Additional courses will be offered if the demand warrants.
Educational plans available to engineering students at Swarthmore are as
follows:
(1) Four year course programs w ith the major in Engineering, with elected
concentrations of study in the professional branches of engineering such
as Civil, Electrical, and Mechanical Engineering, and in related engineer­
ing areas. (See suggested Elective Plans).
(2) Four year course programs with the major in Engineering, w ith elected
combinations of study in Biology, Chemistry, Economics, Mathematics,
Political Science, etc.
(3) Reading for Honors in Engineering.
(4) Special combinations to meet unusual needs or interests:
(a) A four year program relating Engineering with other College areas of
study, or
(b) A five year program leading to both a B.S. degree with a major in
Engineering, and a B.A. degree.
A candidate for a degree in Engineering must meet the general requirements of
the College as well as the requirements of the Department of Engineering. Cur­
ricular plans for the first two years must take two objectives into consideration:
(1) courses should provide an adequate background for work in Engineering at
the upperclass level, and (2) the satisfying of the general College requirements.
During the second semester of the sophomore year the student, following College
procedure, will apply for a major in Engineering. All four-year programs lead to
the degree of Bachelor of Science with the major in Engineering.
Course Program
The prerequisites leading to a major in Engineering are Engineering 1 and
Engineering 2 in the first year and Engineering 11 and Engineering 12 in the
second year. Prospective Engineering majors are strongly urged to enroll in ap­
propriate courses in Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics. In special cases, stu­
dents with preparation comparable to, but differing from, the above may apply
to major in Engineering after consultation w ith the department chairman.
The departmental requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Science with a
major in Engineering fall into two categories: (1) satisfactory completion of
those courses common to all Engineering students; namely, Fields and Continua,
Thermodynamics, Structure and Properties of Materials, and Theoretical Chem­
istry; (2) satisfactory completion of a minimum of four advanced Engineering
courses beyond those listed in category (1) during the junior and senior years
with no more than seven such courses normally permitted in any program. All
programs leading to a Bachelor of Science degree with the major in Engineer­
ing must be submitted for approval to the Department of Engineering.
Course Advising
Students are advised to make their educational goals known to their advisers
at the earliest possible time. In this way the student can best benefit from the

112

ENGINEERING
flexibility provided for course election and provide for a curricular program
specifically oriented to his future educational goals. The plan for upperclass
study in Engineering should be formulated during the second semester of the
sophomore year when the student applies for a major in Engineering.
Reading for Honors in Engineering
Students who wish to become candidates for a Bachelor of Science degree in
Engineering with Honors should follow the application procedure given on
pages 58-60.
A student’s program should include seminars and/o r other work in Engineer­
ing and, normally, science and mathematics. A student who wishes to concen­
trate in civil, electrical, or mechanical engineering may prepare for up to four
examination papers in his chosen area. The other two papers will usually be
chosen from mathematics, science, or (since the Engineering Department com­
prises the merged civil, electrical and mechanical departments) a branch of
engineering other than the field of concentration.
Elective Plans in the Course Program
The following suggested plans of study for the last two years are listed to indi­
cate the flexibility of choice open to the student. Other plans may also be ar­
ranged beyond those suggested. At least four elected and approved advanced
courses in Engineering must be included in the program of the junior and senior
years. Electives in the humanities, social sciences and life sciences can also con­
tribute, in many cases, to the central educational aims. A course in Special Topics
or a Thesis is available for meeting special interests or needs.

Suggested Elective Plans
Bio-E n

g in eerin g

The application of engineering principles
to biological and medical problems. Students
with this interest will normally elect two
semesters of biology and two semesters of
organic chemistry, and an appropriate se­
quence of engineering courses. Suggested se­
quences of study in this interdisciplinary field
are available upon request or can be de­
veloped with the assistance of your Engineer­
ing adviser.

A minimum of four Engi­
neering courses with addi­
tional elections in Engineer­
ing, Biology, and Chemistry.

C ivil E

n g in e e r in g and

General Civil Engineering
Structures
Urban and Regional Plan­
ning
Water Resources

R

elated

A

reas

The suggested course program is Mechan­
ics of Solids, Structural Mechanics I, Earth
Science, Civil Engineering Design, with a
fifth course chosen from Fluid Mechanics,
Structural Mechanics II, or Soil Engineering.
The sequence provides the prerequisites for
an additional elective sequence in Structures,
Water Resources and Planning, Pre-Architec­
ture, or General Civil Engineering. Plans may
be made for work in Bio-Engineering with an
emphasis on Environmental Control and
Water Resources.

113

ENGINEERING
The early planning of electives in Biology,
Economics, Political Science, Sociology, or
Fine Arts, is essential for programs related
to Urban and Regional Planning or Water
Resources.
E

lectrica l

E

n g in ee r in g and

General Electrical Engi­
neering
Electronics and Informa­
tion Processing
Systems and Control
Electric Power and Energy
Conversion
Engineering Physics
E

nergy

elated

A

reas

C onv ersio n

Energy conversion is one of the outstand­
ing problems of the present and future. Con­
ventional sources and means of conversion
will continue to be important. New and as
yet undeveloped systems will become in­
creasingly significant. A concentration of elec­
trical and mechanical courses built on funda­
mental courses in thermodynamics can be
developed for students w ith a special interest
in energy conversion.

Electromechanical Energy
Conversion
Thermodynamics and Heat
Transfer

E

R

Students who plan to do work in elec­
trical engineering will normally include the
following courses in their programs: Cir­
cuit Theory, Electromagnetic Theory, Elec­
tronic Circuit Theory I (73).
The program should be filled out with
additional courses selected partly from those
numbered 55 and 74 to 80, inclusive, ac­
cording to individual interest. The full pro­
gram may emphasize an area of study such
as those listed at the left.

n g in eerin g

Scien ces

A number of feasible pro­
grams may be elected from
Engineering, M athem atics,
Chemistry, Physics, with the
engineering courses dealing
primarily with the theoretical
bodies of knowledge.
E n g in eer in g Com
O t h e r C ollege A

Biology
Chemistry
Economics
Mathematics
Political Science
Psychology
Physics

114

bin ed

A program in Engineering Sciences pro­
vides for diversity and depth in engineering,
combined with mathematics, chemistry, or
physics. It is suitable for those planning to
enter college teaching or engineering research
after graduate study.
W

ith

Study

in

reas

An engineering student is required to in­
clude at least four approved engineering
courses beyond the required engineering core.
Fourteen electives, including the six to satisfy
the College distribution requirements, are
available for planning a sequence of study
leading to concentrations or diversity in other
College areas. The areas listed on the left are
not exclusive but they do represent areas in
which engineering students may find a strong
interest and a relationship to future engineer­
ing work.

ENGINEERING
M

ech a nica l

E

n g in eer in g and

General Mechanical Engi­
neering
Applied Mechanics
Thermodynamics and
Energy Conversion
Fluid Mechanics and Heat
Transfer
Engineering Design

R

elated

A

reas

Sequences in general mechanical engineer­
ing will normally include, in addition to the
required engineering core, courses in ad­
vanced dynamics, solid mechanics, fluid me­
chanics and heat transfer, and automatic
controls. Courses in thermodynamics, applied
mechanics, fluids, heat transfer, and engineer­
ing design can be used to develop such spe­
cialized sequences as those shown at the left.
Plans may be made for work in bio-engineering with an emphasis on the structure and
function of biological systems.

1. Introduction to Engineering. An introduction to engineering analysis evolv­
ing solution to engineering problems through the use of simple mathematical
models. The body of mathematics necessary for structuring these models is fully
developed within the course. The use of the digital computer is introduced
and several engineering problems are assigned for computer solution. During
the last four or five weeks of the course, the class is broken up into small
seminar groups directed by the engineering faculty and covering various cur­
rent engineering topics. The laboratory work introduces graphical concepts
and some shop practice.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Fall semester.
2. Mechanics I. Special areas in the field of mechanics are discussed. Ele­
mentary beam theory and theory of torsion constitute the material discussed in
the first half of the course. The latter half concerns itself with problems in
dynamics which are approached from a Lagrangian point of view.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Spring semester.
7,8. Principles and Problems of Modern Technology. This course is designed
to meet the needs of non-science majors and fulfills the group I distribution re­
quirement. (See p. 56.) In the first semester, the logic and programming of the
digital computer will be introduced, elementary decision theory will be de­
veloped, and the engineering concepts of optimization, feedback, and informa­
tion discussed. Newton’s laws of motion and the laws of thermodynamics will be
introduced to illustrate the use of science in technology. In the second semester,
special topics illustrative of modem technological problems and activity will be
developed. Topics will be chosen for their timeliness, interest and importance to
both society and technology. Past topics have been: world communications, en­
vironmental engineering, and bio-engineering.
Three class periods and a laboratory every other week.
11. Electrical Engineering Science. The subjects to be considered in this
course are the following: the analysis and design of electric circuits; force and
energy in electromagnetic fields; problems involving static electric and magnetic
fields such as, for example, magnetic circuits and dielectric materials. Students
registering for this course are assumed to be familiar w ith the basic concepts of
electricity and magnetism.
Three class periods weekly and a laboratory every other week.
Prerequisite: To be preceded or accompanied by Integral Calculus.
Fall semester.

115

ENGINEERING
12. Physical Systems Analysis. The study of physical phenomena and systems
which may be represented to a good degree of approximation by a linear model
or a lumped-parameter pictorial model. The formulation of the mathematical
model from basic physical laws and the treatment of the ordinary differential
equations resulting therefrom. Emphasis will be placed upon the unity resulting
from the mathematical representation for many types of physical systems: me­
chanical, electrical, electromechanical, thermal, etc. Techniques of analysis will
include classical solution of differential equations including power series solu­
tions, and also solution by Laplace transform methods. Transient and steady state
response, frequency response, pole-zero concepts, notions of stability, and energy
considerations. The analog computer will be used extensively.
Three class periods and a laboratory every other week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 11, or equivalent.
Spring semester.
23. Digital Computers. An introductory course on general aspects of informa­
tion processors. Topics covered include machine and system organization, lan­
guages (including both assembly language and a problem oriented language),
applications including Monte Carlo methods, non-numeric data processing, and
data banks. There will be extensive use of the College’s computer facilities.
Three class periods each week.
No prerequisites.
Fall semester.
24. Special Computer Topics. Topics covered may include systems program­
ming, compiler construction, or more advanced treatment of topics covered in
Engr. 23.
Three class periods each week.
Prerequisite: A knowledge of “ASSEMBLER” language.
Spring semester.
51. Introduction to Fields and Continua. Analysis of field phenomena in a
variety of continuous media. Fluid-flow, elastic, thermal, electromagnetic, and
other fields are treated with emphasis on their common properties. The partial
differential equations governing time-invariant fields, diffusion, wave motion,
etc., are developed from basic principles. Application is made to realistic engi­
neering situations.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12, or equivalent.
Fall semester.
53. Thermodynamics. Macroscopic concepts of thermodynamics: temperature,
the First Law, thermodynamic properties, reversibility. Statistical inference of
thermodynamics: probability, entropy and equilibrium, the partition function.
Ideal gases. The Second Law of Thermodynamics. Cycles. Maxwell’s Relations.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Fall semester.
55. Systems Theory. Mathematical analysis of an assemblage of interacting
elements comprising a generalized system. Fourier methods and the Laplace
transform. Linear graphing and operators. Root locus theory. State variables, the
system state transition matrix and canonical forms. Linear vector spaces. Digital
data systems and the Z transform. Response to random inputs. Correlation func­

116

ENGINEERING
tions and spectral distribution. Some aspects of socio-economic and urban sys­
tems. The role of the digital computer in systems analysis.
Three class periods each week; conference or laboratory every other week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12, or equivalent.
56. Operations Research. The principles of operations research as applicable
to defining optimum solutions of engineering and financial problems as an aid to
managerial decision making. Probability and probability distributions, reliability,
random number simulation, queuing theory, linear programming, dynamic pro­
gramming, allocation and transportation theory. The working principles of engi­
neering economy are introduced and combined w ith operations research topics.
Three class periods each week.
Normally for junior and senior students.
Spring semester.
59. Mechanics of Solids. This course deals w ith the internal stresses and
changes of form when forces act on solid bodies. State of stress and strain,
strength theories, stability, deflections, and photoelasticity. Elastic and Plastic
theories.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Mechanics I, or equivalent.
Fall semester.
61. Structure and Properties of Materials. The physical nature of matter in
the solid state. Electrical, mechanical, optical, and thermal properties. Macro­
scopic, phenomenological characteristics in terms of microscopic fundamentals.
Design of material structures for meeting engineering specifications.
Three class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Theoretical Chemistry.
Fall semester.
62. Structural Mechanics I. Principles of structural systems and advanced
mechanics of deformable bodies pertaining to deflection and stability. Structural
mechanics of space and plane framed structures including stress analysis, influ­
ence lines, and matrix solutions.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 59.
Spring semester.
63. Structural Mechanics II. A study of statically indeterminate structural sys­
tems and advanced structural theory. Response of structures to complex dynamic
inputs such as earthquakes and moving loads. Digital computer applications.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Structural Mechanics I.
Fall semester.
64. Earth Science. Using the basic concepts of physical geology as a unifying
framework, the principles of soil mechanics and hydrology are studied. Subjects
introduced include clay mineralogy, theory of consolidation of soils, stresses in
earth masses, flow through porous media, precipitation-runoff relationships, open
channel flow, ground water hydraulics, and sedimentation.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Spring semester.
65. Civil Engineering Design. An introduction to the design of engineering
structures with emphasis on structural components and structural materials; de­

117

ENGINEERING
sign projects involving planning, analysis and synthesis, structural models, and
optimization criteria.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Fall semester.
66. Structural Design. An advanced course in the design of structures dealing
with stability, flat plates, shells, pre-stressed concrete, high strength steels, ulti­
mate design, dynamic force systems, comprehensive design problems, advanced
structural model studies.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisites: Engr. 59,62,63,65.
Spring semester.
67. Water Resources. An introduction to the fundamentals of water-resources
engineering, including pertinent areas of hydrology and hydraulics, precipitationrunoff relationships, groundwater flow, sedimentation, and hydraulics of steady
and gradually varied flow through channels and reservoirs are studied. Funda­
mentals are related to engineering aspects of planning for water-resources proj­
ects, followed by some case studies of existing projects which draw on the back­
ground of the student in engineering science, design, the humanities, and the
social sciences.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
69. Soil Engineering. Advanced principles of soil mechanics w ith application
to problems in design. Theoretical aspects of seepage, settlement and foundation
stability analysis. The design of retaining walls, foundations, and earth structures
are among the specific topics.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 64.
71. Circuit Theory. Transient and steady-state analysis of electric circuits and
networks with emphasis on state variable as well as classical methods and
s-plane interpretation. Network topology, equilibrium equations, theorems,
network functions and their properties. Energy in electric networks. Matrix
formulation for the systematic representation of generalized networks for com­
puter analysis. Linear, nonlinear, time varying and time-invariant cases.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisites: Engr. 12, or Physics 12.
Fall semester.
72. Electromagnetic Theory. Application of Maxwell’s equations. Macroscopic
field treatment of magnetic, dielectric and conducting bodies. Forces, motion and
energy storage. Field basis of circuit theory. Electromagnetic waves; wave-guides,
transmission lines, and antennas.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 51, or equivalent.
Spring semester.
73,74. Electronic Circuit Theory. The principal emphasis of the course is on
the use of transistors as active circuit elements. The Ebers-Moll, charge control
and hybrid-pi models are introduced and used, together with appropriate analyti­
cal techniques, in such applications as biasing circuits, low-pass amplifiers, tuned
amplifiers, power amplifiers, feedback circuits and switching circuits. The bulk
of the laboratory work is oriented toward circuit design. Students are encouraged
to become familiar with and use the IBM Electronic Circuit Analysis Program
which is available in the Computer Center.

118

ENGINEERING
The first semester provides a working knowledge of some basic aspects of the
subject for those who are unable to pursue it further.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12, or equivalent.
75. Electromechanical Energy Conversion. The conversion of energy by means
of electromagnetic fields. Electromechanics of lumped parameter systems, forcefield relationships, energy storage and transfer in electrodynamic systems. Trans­
ducers and rotating machines in engineering practice. Practical engineering as­
pects of general purpose machines and special electromechanical devices.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12, or equivalent.
77. Topics in Information Transmission. Selected topics relating to the trans­
mission and processing of information and information-bearing signals. Applica­
tion to communication and information-processing systems.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12, or equivalent.
78. Control Theory and Design. An introduction to classical and modern con­
trol theory. Concepts of state, controllability and observability. Analysis and de­
sign of linear automatic control systems by means of Nyquist diagram, frequency
response and root locus method. Design by matrix methods and state variables.
Stability criteria. Computers and logic systems in control. Analog to digital con­
version. Introduction to optimum control. Special topics; sampled data systems,
nonlinear processes, etc., according to class interest.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 12 (and preferably Engr. 55).
80. Physical Electronics. The course begins w ith a study of the properties of
semiconductors based on the quantum mechanical point of view. This back­
ground is then used in a detailed consideration of the operation of semiconductor
devices. The connection between material properties and the characterization of
devices as circuit elements is stressed.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 61.
82. Fluid Mechanics. Fluid mechanics is treated as a special case of continuum
mechanics for which the relevant equations expressing the conservation of
mass, momentum, and energy are derived. Examples and applications are given
for the perfect fluid and the linearly viscous fluid. Current research and problem
areas in fluid mechanics and heat transport are discussed.
Four class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Ordinary differential equations and multivariate calculus.
84. Advanced Fluid Mechanics. A study of the more specialized areas of fluid
mechanics: boundary layer theory, compressible flow, wave motions, materialspatial coordinate transformations, and convective heat transfer. Independent
work in either an experimental or analytical area is an important part of each
student’s work.
Four class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 82.

119

ENGINEERING
86. Advanced Thermodynamics. An extension of the basic core thermo­
dynamics, Engr. 53. The fundamental laws of thermodynamics are applied to
conventional systems of energy conversion. Principles of irreversible thermo­
dynamics are developed and applied to systems of direct energy conversion.
Four class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 53.
87. Conduction and Radiation Heat Transfer. A course dealing with the basic
introduction to physical phenomena involved in the conduction and radiation
heat transfer processes. Work is done in both steady state and transient condi­
tions. Analytical, empirical and numerical approaches are covered.
Four class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Ordinary differential equations.
88. Advanced Dynamics. Review of kinematics and particle dynamics using
vectors. Vibrations and stability of lumped parameter system. Rigid body dy­
namics, including gyroscopes, in vector form. Lagrange’s equations and Hamil­
ton’s Principle. Vibration of distributed systems.
Four class periods each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 51.
89. Machine Design. The study of the analysis and synthesis of the elements of
machines.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Engr. 59.
90. Engineering Design. A generalized approach to the design of engineering
systems and components is developed stressing inventiveness, engineering analy­
sis and decision making. The design process is studied through case histories and
student projects which utilize a number of areas of engineering science. Optimiza­
tion theory, the use of probability and statistics in design, decision theory, and
reliability theory are discussed.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Senior Engineering standing.
91. Special Topics. Subject matter dependent on a group need or individual
interest. Normally restricted to senior students and offered only when staff in­
terests and availability make it practicable to do so.
92. Thesis. With approval, a student may undertake a thesis project as a part
of his program in the senior year. The student is expected to submit a prospectus
of his thesis problem before the start of the semester in which the thesis project
is carried out.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

Seminars beyond those listed may be arranged on sufficient demand. Suggested
seminar areas are: Thermodynamics, Fluid Mechanics, Linear Systems and Elec. tromagnetic Theory.
102. Engineering Systems. This seminar concerns itself with the representa­
tion of engineering systems as mathematical models. These models fall into the
two fundamental classes of lumped parameters and distributed systems. Empha­
sis will be placed on the physical meaning of the applied mathematics.
109. Thesis. Elective, upon approval of an acceptable field of original investi­
gation.

120

ENGINEERING
111. Circuit Theory. Classical and modern treatments of electric circuits
and networks. Time-domain and frequency-domain analysis of linear circuits.
Analytic properties of network functions and introduction to synthesis. Appli­
cation of linear graph theory. State variable analysis and computer applica­
tions including nonlinear and time-varying cases.
113. Electronics. A study of electronic devices and circuits. Subject matter in­
cludes physical theory of electronic devices; design of electronic circuits applic­
able to communications, instrumentation, information processing systems, etc.;
transient and steady-state analysis of electronic circuits and systems; introductory
topics in the theory of communication and information. The seminar is ac­
companied by a full-day laboratory.

ENGLISH LITER A TU R E
DAVID COWDEN, Professort
HAROLD E. PAGLIARO, Professor and Chairman
DEREK TRAVERSI, Professor
THOMAS H. BLACKBURN, Associate Professor
LEE DEVIN, Associate Professor and Director of Theatre
SUSAN B. SNYDER, Associate Professor
JOHN S. SHACKFORD, Assistant Professort
JANE HEDLEY, Instructor
PHILIP M. KEITH, Instructor
THOMAS L. SHERMAN, Instructor
CAROLYN G. HEILBRUN, Visiting Lecturer
VICKI W. KRAMER, Lecturer
ROBERT TEITELBAUM, Technical Director of Theatre
This department offers courses and seminars in English literature, American
literature, and some foreign literatures in translation. The departmental curricu­
lum is planned to provide experience of several critical approaches: the intensive
study of the works of major writers, study of the literature of limited periods,
and thorough study of the development of literary types. The department also
provides instruction in the techniques of writing.
Req

u irem en ts

and

R

eco m m end a tio ns

Prerequisites: English 1 or its equivalent by Advanced Placement is the pre­
requisite for all other courses in literature. (This prerequisite does not apply to
seniors.) The minimum requirement for admission as a major in English is Eng­
lish 1 plus one other semester-course in the department. However, students con­
sidering a major in English are strongly urged to take one or two additional
courses during the sophomore year. The study of history, particularly of the
history of England, is also recommended. Advanced study in a classical or mod­
em foreign language is also desirable, and is virtually a requirement for admis­
sion to graduate school.
Major in Course: The work of a major in Course consists of a minimum of eight
semester-courses in the department, including Shakespeare and Problems of Lit­
erary Study and at least two other courses in literature written before 1800.
^Absent on leave, 1970-71.

121

ENGLISH LITERATURE
Major in Honors: Majors in Honors must take three or four seminars in the de­
partment, two of which should be from Group I.
Minor in Honors: Minors in Honors are ordinarily required to take two seminars
in the department.
1. Studies in Poetry and Prose. Emphasis on sensitive reading and analysis:
exploration of lyrics, longer poetic forms, and imaginative prose works from
various periods.
Each semester. Staff.
5,6. English for Foreign Students. Individual and group work on an ad­
vanced level for students with non-English backgrounds.
Each semester.
10. Advanced Composition. Analysis, organization, and effective presentation
of complex subject matter. The course will be conducted for the most part on a
tutorial basis.
Spring semester. Staff.
21. Poetics. Consideration of the essential aspects of poetry. Readings will
include poetry in English from all periods, as well as some of the major docu­
ments of poetics.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
22. Satire. Examination of satire as a literary genre.
Spring semester. Mr. Blackburn.
23. Main Currents of Nineteenth-Century Literature. The major movements of
romanticism, realism-naturalism, and symbolism in European literature.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
24. Main Currents of Twentieth-Century Literature. Emphasis on the Euro­
pean novel. The creation of new forms of literary experience by such figures as
Proust, Gide, Camus, Kafka, Mann, Joyce, and Nabokov.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
25. Shakespeare (for non-majors). Study of representative plays. Not open to
majors in the department.
Spring semester. Staff.
29. Black Literature. Afro-American writers, or on occasion comparative
Black writers. The form and content of the course will vary with the instructor.
Spring semester.
31. Chaucer. Reading in Middle English of most of Chaucer’s poems, with
special emphasis on The Canterbury Tales. The course attempts to place the
poetry in the context of medieval culture.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
32. Medieval Literature. Study of the literature of England from Beowulf to
Malory. From time to time the course will focus on more specialized topics, such
as the Germanic epic or the emergence of romance from Celtic narrative and
mythology.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71.

122

ENGLISH LITERATURE
33. Renaissance Poetry. Lyric and narrative poetry of the Elizabethan age and
the early seventeenth century.
Fall semester. Miss Snyder.
34. Renaissance Comparative Literature. Selected major writers of the Conti­
nental Renaissance will be studied in translation.
Spring semester. Miss Snyder.
35. Tudor-Stuart Drama. Development of the English drama in the sixteenth
and seventeenth centuries.
Fall semester. Mr. Blackburn.
36. Milton. Study of the main body of Milton’s poetry w ith particular empha­
sis on Paradise Lost.
Spring semester. Mr. Blackburn.
37. Eighteenth-Century Literature. The eighteenth-century literary scene, ex­
amined through the principal works of Dryden, Swift, Pope, Johnson, and a
few others. The. context for this study will include biographies of the four
major authors, and essays on the political, religious, and aesthetic preconcep­
tions of the age.
Fall semester. Mr. Pagliaro.
38. Romantic Poetry. The major English romantic poets, with attention given
to the ideas as well as to form and structure.
Spring semester. Mr. Pagliaro.
39. The English Novel. Study of the beginnings of the novel concentrating on
eighteenth-century, romantic, and Victorian novels.
Fall semester. Mrs. Kramer.
41. Nineteenth-Century American Literature. Selected major writers: Haw­
thorne, Melville, Thoreau, Whitman, Dickinson, Twain, James.
Fall semester. Mr. Keith.
43. Victorian Literature. Study of representative figures of the period.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
44. Twentieth-Century American Fiction. Selected major writers: Fitzgerald,
Hemingway, Faulkner, Nabokov. A study of experimentation with the form of
the novel.
Spring semester.
45. Modern Poetry (British). A variety of critical approaches to major
British poets of the last hundred years. Additional readings may include
criticism, autobiography, social documents, and the work of minor poets.
Each semester. Mr. Sherman.
46. Modern Poetry (American). Selected major poets: Frost, Stevens, Wil­
liams, Pound.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
48. Modern Drama. Examination of the range of dramatic literature since
Ibsen.
Each semester. Mr. Devin.
50. The Modern Novel. Study of the development of the modern novel be­
ginning with James and continuing to the present.
Spring semester. Mrs. Kramer.

123

ENGLISH LITERATURE
51-52. Colloquium.
Staff.
55. Special Topics. From time to time intensive courses will be offered in
fields not covered by the regular program.
Staff.
54. Independent Study. Students who plan independent study must submit
a prospectus to the appropriate instructor and receive general approval for the
project before the beginning of the semester during which such study is actually
done.
61-62. Shakespeare. Study of the complete works of Shakespeare, tracing the
development of his craftsmanship and ideas. Required of majors in the depart­
ment, who meet weekly in small groups during the first semester of the senior
year. Students should read through the plays before beginning the course.
Fall semester. Staff.
63-64. Problems of Literary Study. Group meetings of departmental majors in
the second semester of the senior year. About half the semester is devoted to
writing a research paper of magnitude.
Spring semester. Staff.
65-66. Thesis. Majors may elect to substitute a thesis for Problems of Literary
Study. Application must be made by May 15 of the junior year.
Spring semester.
70. Fiction Writers’ Workshop.* Projects in imaginative writing. Meetings
will be devoted primarily to the analysis of stories submitted by students;
secondarily to the discussion of readings in the theory of fiction, the craft
of fiction, and the work of contemporary authors.
Each semester.
71. Poetry Workshop.* A seminar in which students will write, read, and
talk about poetry. Limited to twelve. Students should submit three poems or
the equivalent for admission to the course. The class will meet once a week
together, and in individual conferences.
Each semester.
72. Theater Workshop.* A course open to all students interested in acting,
directing, and play production. Lectures, demonstrations and laboratory. Each
semester a different element is stressed. Fall will stress production and spring
acting and directing.
Each semester. Mr. Devin.
’ Students interested in receiving credit for their first semester’s work in any creative work­
shop should see the instructor of the workshop or the department chairman.

H onors Se mi nar s
Group I
101. Shakespeare. Study of Shakespeare as dramatist and poet. The emphasis
is on the major plays, with a more rapid reading of the remainder of the canon.
Students are advised to read through all the plays before entering the seminar.
Each semester. Staff.
103. Chaucer. Reading of Chaucer’s poems in the original Middle English,
with particular attention to Troilus and Criseyde and The Canterbury Tales.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71.

124

ENGLISH LITERATURE
104. Milton. Study of Milton’s works with special emphasis on Paradise Lost.
Spring semester. Mr. Blackburn.
105. Tudor-Stuart Drama. The development of English drama from the
medieval morality plays to Restoration tragedy and comedy.
Fall semester.
108. Renaissance Poetry. Poetic modes and preoccupations of the English
Renaissance, with emphasis on Sidney, Shakespeare, Spenser, Donne, Herbert,
and Marvell.
Spring semester. Miss Snyder.
109. Eighteenth-Century Literature. An examination of the literary forms and
critical values of the age, with special attention given to the works of Dryden,
Swift, Pope, and Johnson, and to a few representative playwrights.
Fall semester. Mr. Pagliaro.
110. The Romantic Poets. An examination of the poetry of Blake, Words­
worth, Coleridge, Byron, Shelley, and Keats.
Fall semester. Mr. Pagliaro.
Group II
113. The Novel. Studies in four novelists: James, Conrad, Joyce, and Woolf.
Each semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
115. Modern Comparative Literature. Consideration of some of the major
themes and philosophic attitudes embodied in recent literature.
Each semester.
116. American Literature. Three novelists and three poets from the nineteenth
and twentieth centuries, representative of the themes, forms, and character of
American literature. The authors for 1969 are Hawthorne, Twain, Faulkner,
Whitman, Dickinson, Stevens.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Shackford.
118. Modern Poetry. Study of the modern tradition in English and American
poetry from Yeats to the present. The seminar will concentrate on the work of a
few major poets.
Spring semester. Mr. Sherman.
119. Special Topics in Literature. Occasional seminars will be given in special
fields not part of the regular program.
Staff.
120. Thesis. A major in Honors may elect to write a thesis as a substitute for
one seminar. He must select his topic and submit his plan of w ork for depart­
mental approval by the end of the junior year. Then during one semester of the
senior year he writes his thesis under the direction of a member of the depart­
ment.
125. Independent Study. Students may prepare for an Honors examination in
a field or major figure comparable in literary significance to those offered in the
regular seminars. Independent study projects must be approved by the depart­
ment and supervised by a department member.
Staff.

125

HISTORY
PAUL H. BEIK, Professor
JAMES A. FIELD, JR., Professor
HARRISON M. W RIGHT, Professor and Chairmant
ROBERT C. BANNISTER, Associate Professort
BERNARD S. SMITH, Associate Professort
GEORGE E. McCULLY, Assistant Professor
JEROME H. WOOD, JR., Assistant Professor
MARGARET A. YARVIN, Assistant Professor
TSING YUAN, Assistant Professor*
ROBERT D. CROSS, President
JAMES F. GOV AN, Librarian
The Department of History attempts to give students a sense of the past, an
acquaintance with the cultural and institutional developments which have pro­
duced the world of today, and an understanding of the nature of history as a
discipline. The courses of the department emphasize less the accumulation of
data than the investigation, from various points of view, of those ideas and insti­
tutions—political, religious, social, economic—by which man has endeavored to
order his world.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

R

eco m m end a tio ns

Prerequisites: Any one of the introductory history courses (those numbered 1
through 9), or its equivalent by Advanced Placement, is the prerequisite for ad­
vanced history courses open to students of all classes (those numbered 11
through 49). In the sophomore and junior years, with the consent of the instruc­
tor and of the department chairman, an advanced course may be taken concur­
rently with an introductory course. In the senior year advanced courses may, with
the consent of the instructor, be taken without prerequisite. The prerequisite for
admission to the department as a major in Course or Honors or as a minor in
Honors is at least two history courses taken at Swarthmore and a satisfactory
standard of work in all courses.
Advanced Placement: The department will grant one semester’s credit for in­
coming students who have achieved a score of 4 or 5 in Advanced Placement his­
tory tests. This credit may be counted toward the number of courses required for
graduation. It may be used in partial fulfillment of the college distribution re­
quirements. It may serve as the prerequisite for advanced courses in history.
Major in Course: The work of the major in Course consists of at least eight
semester courses in the department, one of which is History 68. The choice of
courses is made so as to prepare for a comprehensive examination, in the spring
of the senior year, on three of the four following fields: (1) Ancient, Medieval
and Early Modern Europe; (2) Modern Europe; (3) the United States; (4)
Africa, Asia, and Latin America. Students are expected to take at least two
courses (introductory or advanced) in each of the three fields on which they
intend to be examined.
Major and minor in Honors: Students entering the Honors program may elect
history as a major or a minor in the Division of the Humanities, in the Division of
the Social Sciences, or in cross-divisional programs. Majors in Honors may take
either three or four seminars in the department. Minors in Honors are ordinarily
expected to take at least two seminars.
t Absent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71.
t Absent on leave, 1970-71.
♦Absent on leave, fall semester, 1970-71.

126

HISTORY
General: Students seriously considering a major in history should try to take
more than two history courses during their freshman and sophomore years. Those
who intend to continue their studies after graduation should bear in mind that a
reading knowledge of one or two foreign languages (particularly French and
German) is now generally assumed for admission to graduate school.
Courses

1. Early Europe. Europe from the fall of the Roman Empire to the Enlight­
enment. This course will provide a theoretical and technical introduction to
the study of history, stressing the uses of primary sources in literature, religion,
philosophy, science, politics, and the arts.
Fall semester. Mr. McCully.
2. Modern Europe. Europe from the Enlightenment to the mid-twentieth cen­
tury.
Each semester. Mrs. Yarvin.
5. The United States to 1877. The colonial experience; independence, a new
society and a new government; transcontinental expansion and the struggle be­
tween North and South.
Fall semester. Mr. Wood.
6. The United States Since 1877. Industrialism and its consequences; the
United States as a great power; the problems of a shrinking world.
Spring semester. Mr. Field.
8. Africa. African history and civilization, with an emphasis on tropical Africa
in modern times.
Fall semester. Mr. Wright.
9. China. The formation and maturing of Chinese civilization.
Spring semester. Mr. Yuan.
10. Freshman-Sophomore Seminar. Collaborative small group investigation
of subjects within the particular fields of interest of members of the depart­
ment. The seminar this year will be Ethnic Groups In American History. The
study of the arrival, development, and interrelationship of ethnic groups in
American history. The presupposition of this course is that the most important
determinants of ethnicity in America have been religion, national origin, and
color. Limited enrollment. There is no prerequisite for this course. It counts
for one course credit.
Fall semester. Mr. Cross.
11. Early Medieval Europe. The history of western Europe from the acces­
sion of Diocletian to the last Carolingians.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Smith.
12. Later Medieval Europe. The history of western Europe from the tenth
to the fifteenth century, with emphasis on the role of the Papacy.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Smith.
13. England to 1483. The political, cultural, and religious history of England
from the Roman occupation to the accession of the Tudors.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Smith.
14. Medieval European Intellectual History. The history of ideas in western
Europe from the fifth to the fourteenth century, with roughly equal attention

127

HISTORY
being paid to the development of political theory, theology, philosophy, edu­
cation and science.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Smith.
16. The Renaissance. The birth of modern western civilization considered
in terms of intellectual and artistic developments and their relation to eco­
nomic, social, and political conditions.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. McCully.
17. The Reformation and the Seventeenth Century. The attempt to reform
religion, its failure, and the subsequent secularization of culture and society.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. McCully.
18. Tudor and Stuart England. The English Renaissance and Reformation,
constitutional developments and the origins of radical politics, the Civil War,
the Restoration and the Glorious Revolution.
Spring semester. Mr. McCully.
19. The Scientific Revolution, 1500-1800. The history of the sciences, from
the Renaissance through the Enlightenment, and especially of their interac­
tions with technology, commerce, politics, societies, and the arts.
Spring semester. Mr. McCully.
Classics 31.

History of Greece.

Classics 32.
Classics.)

(See listing under Department of Classics.)

The Roman Republic.

(See listing under Department of

Classics 42. Greece in the Fifth Century B.C.
of Classics.)
Classics 44.

The Roman Empire.

(See listing under Department

(See listing under Department of Classics.)

21. The French Revolution and Napoleon. The place of the French Revolu­
tion and Napoleon in the development of European political institutions and
social theories.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Beik.
22. French Regimes Since Napoleon. The succession of political shocks and
readjustments from 1814 to the present, studied in the context of social changes
and popular aspirations.
Fall semester. Mr. Beik.
24. Modern England. The development of constitutional government and
the transition from an agricultural and aristocratic nation to an urban and
socialist one.
Fall semester. Mr. Govan.
25. Modern Russia. The course begins with the reign of Peter and gives half
its time to the twentieth century.
Spring semester. Mr. Beik.
26. Modern Europe. Modern Germany 1815-1950. Germany’s transforma­
tion from a people in search of a national state to a national state in search
of world power.
Spring semester. Mrs. Yarvin.
28. Europe of the Dictators, 1914-1945. The assault of radical politics, left
and right, on the social and political fabric of Europe; the interaction of
domestic and international conflict; nationalism, racism, militarism in their
historical context; the first effective experiments in the use of ideology, tech­

128

H ISTORY
nology, and terror as means of social control; the political responses to the
crises of modernization and industrial capitalism.
Fall semester. Mrs. Yarvin.
50. American Diplomatic History. Official United States foreign policy con­
sidered as a part of the larger problem of American participation in world
affairs.
Fall semester. Mr. Field.
31. American Intellectual History to 1865. The history of ideas in the
United States from the colonial period through the mid-nineteenth century. A
general knowledge of the political and social history of the period is assumed.
Fall semester. Mr. Wood.
32. American Intellectual History Since 1865. The history of ideas in the
United States from the mid-nineteenth century to the present time. A general
knowledge of the political and social history of the period is assumed.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Bannister.
33. The American Colonies. The transit of civilization to British North
America, and the modification of Old World ideas and institutions in a New
World environment, 1607-1763.
Fall semester. Mr. Wood.
34. The American Revolution. The conflict between intensive self-govern­
ment in the colonies and English ideas and projects for empire; the revolt
against colonial status and the elaboration of a “republican” ethos and “repub­
lican” institutions, 1763-1789.
Spring semester. Mr. Wood.
35. Afro-American History. A general survey from the era of the slave
trade to the present.
36. Topics in Afro-American History. A course of limited enrollment which
seeks to illuminate important aspects of Afro-American History.
37. American Religious Thought. The course of religious thought in the
colonies and the United States, with appropriate reference to general intellec­
tual history and American church history.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Wood.
38. America in the Progressive Era, 1896-1920. The attack on political priv­
ilege and the movement for the control of industry; urban poverty, the new
immigration, race relations, women’s rights, temperance, and conservation;
the emergence of America as a world power.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Bannister.
39. Topics in American History. Intensive study of particular problems.
Offered as opportunity permits.
Not offered in 1970-71.
Religion 38. Quakerism. (See listing under Department of Religion.)
40. Topics in African History. Special problems in African history. Offered
as opportunity permits. Limited enrollment.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Wright.
42. The Expansion of Europe. A survey of European overseas expansion
since 1415, and of its impact on non-European societies. The emphasis is on
South and Southeast Asia.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Wright.

129

HISTORY
44. Modem China. The search for a modern Chinese identity since 1840.
This course will concentrate on such themes as the impact of the West on the
traditional Confucian society, reform and revolution, the failure of democratic
liberalism, and the adaptation of Marxism to China.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Yuan.
45. Modern Japan. The transformation of Tokugawa Japan into a modern
nation, with emphasis on westernization, imperialism, and the search for
national identity.
Spring semester. Mr. Yuan.
46. Asian Nationalisms. A comparative study of middle eastern and far
eastern Asian nationalisms, with emphasis on the Turkish, Arab, Chinese,
and Japanese forms.
Spring semester. Mr. Yuan.
48. Latin America. The development of the Latin American countries from
colonial times to the present.
Not offered in 1970-71.
51-2. Colloquium. A double-credit course of restricted enrollment which
seeks, through intensive investigation of a limited topic, to illuminate an
important historical field. Open to majors in Course in any department. In
1970-71 the subject will be Thomas Jefferson: The Man and the Meaning.
Intensive analysis of the interplay between Jeffersonian ideas and other modes
of thought in American politics, social theory, literature, religion, and archi­
tecture.
Spring semester. Mr. Wood.
53. Directed Reading. Individual or group study in fields of special interest
to the student not dealt w ith in the regular course offerings. The consent of
the chairman and of the instructor is required. History 53 may be taken
for one-half credit as History 53A.
Members of the department.
54. The Nature and Meaning of History. A systematic description of a phi­
losophy of history, supplemented by reading and discussion of such topics
as order and violence, institutions and revolutions, the relations between
natural and human history, the moral content of history, the historic func­
tions of art, science, religion, and politics, and the relations between the
study of history and other academic disciplines.
Fall semester. Mr. McCully.
67. Thesis. With the consent of the chairman and of the supervising member
of the department a thesis may be substituted for a course in the fall semester of
the senior year.
Members of the department.
68. Special Topics. Group meetings of senior majors in their final semester to
review, integrate, and supplement their programs. The readings and discussion
center on the development of historical writing from the Middle Ages to the
present, on the relationship of the historian to his time, and on historical method
and its problems.
H

onors

Sem

in a rs

The following seminars are offered by the department to juniors and seniors
who are preparing to be examined for a degree with Honors. They may be taken
in any combination and without regard to chronological order. Some preliminary

130

HISTORY
reading or other preparation may be required for seminars on subjects in which
no work has previously been done.
Those who wish to specialize in international relations w ith a major in history
(see page 132), should include in their programs at least three of the following
seminars: 128,134,140,144.
111. Medieval Europe. The course of European civilization from the con­
version of Constantine to the foundation of the western kingdoms.
Prerequisite: History 11 or the permission of the instructor.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Smith.
116. The Renaissance and Reformation. The birth of Modem Europe as seen
in such developments as the recovery of classical culture, the crisis of religion
and the Church, the establishment of centralized polities, and the origins of
modem science.
Fall semester. Mr. McCully.
118. Tudor and Stuart England. The English Renaissance and Reformation,
constitutional developments, the Civil W ar and the Restoration.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. McCully.
122. Europe 1760 to 1870. The disintegration of the old regime and the rise of
liberalism.
Fall semester. Mr. Beik.
123. Europe 1870 to 1945. Political and social changes in Europe through the
Second World War.
Spring semester. Mrs. Yarvin.
124. England Since 1785. The rise of the first modern industrial state. Its
social, political, and economic problems.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Govan.
128. Eastern Europe. The origins and consequences of the Russian Revolu­
tion and the development of the nations of East Central Europe.
Spring semester. Mr. Beik.
130. Early American History. Political, economic, social, and cultural aspects
of the period from the explorations to the early National period.
Spring semester. Mr. Wood.
132. Problems in American History.
United States.
Each semester. Mr. Field.

Selected topics in the history of the

134. Problems in American History: Foreign. A study of the evolution since
1776 of American relations with the outer world w ith emphasis on ideological,
economic, and strategic developments.
Spring semester. Mr. Field.
140. Modern Africa. Studies in African history w ith emphasis on the period
since 1800, the region south of the Sahara, and the European impact.
Fall semester. Mr. Wright.
144. The Modern Far East. Political, social, and intellectual movements in
China and Japan since about 1840.
Spring semester. Mr. Yuan.

131

HISTORY
167. Thesis. With the permission of the department Honors students may
write a thesis for either single or double course credit. Double-credit theses will
normally be written in the fall semester of the senior year for submission as
papers to the visiting examiners. Honors students wishing to write a thesis for
single credit should elect History 67.

IN TER NA TIO N AL RELATIONS
Students who plan to enter upon a career in the field of international relations
should include in their programs, during the first two years, introductory
courses in economics, history, and political science and should complete the in­
termediate course in one or more modern languages.
Advanced courses selected from the groups listed below may be incorporated
in the programs of students who do their major work in economics, history, politi­
cal science, or a modern language.
These students who wish to concentrate in international relations may take
their Senior Comprehensive Examination in this field. Students preparing for
this examination should take eight, nine, or ten courses from among those listed
below, including all of those listed in Group 1, one or more in Group II, and one
or more in Group III. The examination is administered by a committee ap­
pointed by the chairmen of the Departments of Economics, History, and Political
Science, under the chairmanship of the Department of Political Science.
Group I
Political Science 4. International Politics
Political Science 13. International Law and Organization
Political Science 14. American Foreign Policy
Political Science 63. Advanced International Politics
Economics 60. International Economics
Group II
History 8.
History 25.
History 30.
History 42.
History 44.
History 45.
History 46.
History 48.

Africa
Modern Russia
American Diplomatic History
The Expansion of Europe
Modern China
Modern Japan
Asian Nationalisms
Latin America

Group III
Economics 11. Economic Development
Economics 61. Comparative Economic Systems
Political Science 3. Comparative Politics
Political Science 18. Politics of Developing Nations
Political Science 19. Comparative Communist Politics
Political Science 20. Politics of East Asia
Political Science 21. Politics of Africa
Political Science 55. Modern Political Theory
Political Science 64. Topics in International Relations
Economics 65. Political Economy of Multinational Enterprises
Students who plan to enter the Honors program will find it possible to select a
similar combination of courses and seminars in the field of international relations.
In planning such programs, they should consult with the chairman of their
prospective major department.

132

LINGUISTICS
LILA R. GLEITMAN, Associate Professor
Linguistics is the study of human language. The discovery and description
of universal features characterizing all languages is the primary theoretical
goal. Specifically, synchronic linguistics is the study of the syntactic, phono­
logical, and semantic structure of language; diachronic linguistics approaches
these issues through the study of genetic language relationships. Linguistic
studies are closely linked with broad issues in the social sciences. Possible
connections between language typology and culture have made language a
central concern of anthropologists and sociologists. Psychologists have recog­
nized that language studies bear on fundamental issues in human cognitive
organization. The resulting collaboration between linguists and psychologists
(Psycholinguistics) is among the more hopeful current directions in the study
of cognition. Students of individual languages and students of philosophy and
mathematics may also find linguistics relevant to their academic concerns.
The linguistics program of studies (which is not a major) can usefully be sup­
plemented with courses in a number of related areas. Of particular interest to
students of language are Cognitive Development (Psychology), Language,
Culture and Society (Anthropology), and The Philosophy of Language (Philos­
ophy) . Students of linguistics will also find their background enhanced by com­
parative studies of various languages (particularly the nonlndoEuropean lan­
guages) , and by some acquaintance with concepts of logic and modern algebra.
1. Introduction to Linguistics. Languages of the world; language change;
dialect; human and animal languages; concepts in synchronic linguistics: syntax,
semantics, and phonology; transformational and structural grammars; reading
and writing.
Fall semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
2. The Psychology of Language. Developmental linguistics (acquisition of a
first language) ; the origins of language; the perception and use of language;
bilingualism; linguistic abnormalities (aphasia, deafness, anarthria) ; dialect and
the social context; linguistic determinism; machine translation and information
retrieval; issues in cognitive psychology.
Prerequisite; Psychology 1 or Linguistics 1.
Spring semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
38. Reading and Writing. This course is designed primarily for students
involved in reading tutorial programs, and for those intending to teach. At issue
is the problem of reading in both its conceptual and social aspects. Students will
tutor or assist in teaching reading as part of the course work. Weekly meetings
with the instructor will concern theoretical issues in phonology, reading, and
writing; methods of teaching; and discussion of the ongoing tutorial programs.
Spring semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
52. Diachronic Linguistics. Not offered 1970/71.
53. Recreational Linguistics. An approach to questions of language organiza­
tion through a survey of language games: crypts, ciphers, puns, and anagrams;
bridge bidding and other special-purpose languages; machine languages; signs,
creoles, and pidgins.
Prerequisite: Linguistics 1 or 2. Not offered 1970-71.
68. Directed Reading or Research. Students may conduct a reading or research
program in consultation with the instructor (permission of the instructor
required).
E ith e r se m e s te r.

Mrs. Gleitman.
133

LINGUISTICS
106b. Cognitive Development. (see Psychology 106b).
Fall semester. Mr. Feldman, Mrs. Gleitman.
107. Language and Thought. Philosophical, psychological, and linguistic
approaches to the problem of meaning.
Prerequisite: Linguistics 1 and 2 or permission of the instructor.
Fall semester. Mrs. Gleitman, Mr. Feldman.
108. Transformational Grammar.

Not offered 1970/71.

MATHEMATICS
DAVID ROSEN, Professor and Chairman
JAMES W. ENGLAND, Associate Professor
STEVENS HECKSCHER, Associate Professor
EUGENE A. KLOTZ, Associate Professor
ROLAND B. di FRANCO, Assistant Professor
THOMAS W. HAWKINS, Assistant Professor
J. EDWARD SKEATH, Assistant Professor
Pure mathematics is an abstract subject and may be looked upon as the model
of a deductive science. On the other hand, the subject matter of mathematics
has for the most part arisen out of concrete applications to the physical sciences,
among which geometry occupies a central position. The courses offered in the
Department of Mathematics attempt to combine these points of view and to give
a picture of the power and beauty of the subject when studied for its own sake,
as well as its many relations to other fields of thought. The study of mathematics
is essential as a tool for the understanding of the principles of the physical sci­
ences and engineering; a knowledge of its techniques is indispensable for a suc­
cessful pursuit of these subjects. The same is becoming increasingly true in the
biological sciences and the social sciences.
The sequence consisting of Courses 5, 6, 11, 22 forms the normal preparation
for further work in mathematics as well as for work in physics, other sciences,
and engineering. Courses 7, 8 are Honors courses and can be taken in place of
Courses 5, 6 by properly qualified students. Those students who have obtained a
grade of 3 or better on the Advanced Placement AB examination normally take
Course 6 while those who similarly qualify in the BC examination normally take
Course 11.
A student who wishes to major in mathematics in Course must complete six
courses in addition to the normal sequence of four courses listed above. It is
expected that a Course major in mathematics will take some advanced courses
from the three major areas, namely analysis, algebra, topology-geometry. Physics
1, 2 is highly recommended and a reading knowledge of French, German, or
Russian is desirable for all mathematics majors.
In order to be admitted to the Honors program with work in mathematics a
student must have completed Course 22. An Honors student with a major in
mathematics will normally take in his junior year seminars 101 (Real Analysis),
and 102 (Modern Algebra). In his senior year he will normally take seminars 103
(Complex Analysis), and 104 (Topology); or 105 (Probability and Statistics),.
An Honors student minoring in mathematics will normally offer two papers in
mathematics. A student may use Courses 51, 52 as partial preparation for an
Honors paper in mathematics.

134

MATHEMATICS
Mathematics majors in Course or Honors automatically meet the mathematics
requirements for being certified to teach mathematics in secondary school. Min­
imum requirements for certification in mathematics are: (a) 5 and 6; (b) one
course from 24, 41, 42, 102; (c) one course from 23, 53,104; (d) two additional
courses that may be taken from 11, 14, 22, 30, 51, 52, 101, 103, 105. Certification
to teach mathematics in secondary school requires departmental recommenda­
tion.
I. Elementary Statistics. This is a non-calculus statistics course available to
students in all disciplines. It does not satisfy any mathematics prerequisite nor
can it be counted toward a major or minor in the department. The course begins
with an introduction to discrete probability, and then shifts to methods and
techniques of statistical inference such as assembling and handling data, estima­
tion of parameters, hypothesis testing, correlation and regression analysis. Other
topics will be considered as desired by the class.
Fall semester.
3,4. Probability and Calculus for the Biological and Social Sciences. This
course is intended to introduce biology and social science majors to the concepts
and techniques of probability and calculus. Topics to be included are the main
concepts of discrete probability and one variable calculus, sequences and series,
and an introduction to continuous probability. Statistical techniques are discussed
as appropriate.
Students wishing to continue with mathematics should take M ath 6 and/or 11.
One year of mathematics required by many medical schools may be satisfied by
this course.
5. Differentiation and Integration. This is an introductory calculus course
which presupposes such normal high school mathematics as algebra, analytic
geometry, and elementary trigonometry. Derivatives and integrals of functions of
one variable are studied in detail. Applications of the methods of calculus are
given, when possible.
Fall semester.
6. Topics in Calculus. Topics to be included are infinite series, techniques of
integration, transcendental functions, improper integrals and an introduction to
differential equations.
Prerequisite: Math 5 or its equivalent, or a grade o f 3 or better on AB Advanced
Placement.
Both semesters.
7,8. Functions on the Real Numbers. This course, which is an alternative for
5,6, studies functions defined on the real numbers from a mathematician’s per­
spective. It begins with a study of the topological structure of the real numbers
and then develops the derivative and the integral as tools which provide informa­
tion about the structure of these functions. Permission to enroll in this course
must be obtained from the instructor.
II. Linear Algebra. This course is the normal sequel to Math 6 or 8. It intro­
duces the student to vector spaces, matrices, and linear transformations, with
applications to the solutions of systems of linear equations, determinants and
the eigenvalue problem.
Prerequisite: Math 4, 6, or 8. Freshmen who score a grade of 3- or better on BC
Advanced Placement examination may begin with this course.
B o th se m este rs.

135

MATHEMATICS
12H. Analytic Geometry. This half course presents applications of linear
algebra to the geometry of n-space w ith special emphasis on n = 2, and 3. It will
include such topics as lines, planes, and their higher dimensional analogs;
euclidean spaces, orthogonality, least squares, rigid motions, symmetric matrices,
quadratic forms, classification of surfaces corresponding to second degree
equations.
Prerequisite; Math 11.
Spring semester.
14. Probability and Statistics. This course deals with the mathematical
theory of statistics, based upon a study of the concepts of probability. An intro­
duction to sampling and statistical inference will be given.
Prerequisite: Course 5 or Course 7.
Spring semester.
17. Set Theory. Set theory will be presented in an axiomatic framework.
The course will include; operations on sets, well ordering and well founded
relations, transfinite induction, ordinal numbers, axiom of choice and its
equivalents, cardinal numbers and their arithmetic, and construction of the
real numbers.
Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
Fall semester.
18. Metamathematical Methods in Mathematics. Topics will be selected de­
pending on the interests of the class. Among the topics that will be considered
are: first order theories with equality, Godel Incompleteness Theorem,
models of set theory, consistency of the axiom of choice and the continuum
hypotheses, model theory in algebra.
Prerequisite: Logic 12 (Phil. Dept.) and Math 17, or permission of the in­
structor.
Spring semester.
22. Several Variable Calculus. This course considers differentiation and
integration of functions of several variables with special emphasis on two
and three dimensions. It is the normal sequel to Math 11 and is a prerequisite
for several other mathematics courses.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Both semesters.
23. Higher Geometry. This course considers an assortment of specialized
topics in geometry that are important in the present stream of mathematics.
The material consists of parts of euclidean geometry, convexity, and trans­
formation theory which will also relate to other courses in mathematics. The
emphasis will be on the theory of convex sets and the theory of congruence
and similarity in euclidean two space and three space.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Fall semester.
24. Introduction to Modem Algebra. This course, which is offered in alter­
nate years, is especially designed to accommodate those people who desire to
be certified to teach mathematics in secondary school or who desire a brief
introduction to modern algebra. The course will be a survey of some of the
important topics of modern algebra, such as groups, integral domains, rings,
and fields.
Prerequisite: Math 11 or permission of the instructor.
S p r in g se m e s te r.

136

1970-1971.

MATHEMATICS
30. Differential Equations. An introduction to differential equations that will
include such topics as: first order equations, linear differential equations, ap­
proximative methods, some partial differential equations.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Spring semester.
34. Numerical Methods. This course will deal with the numerical solution
of various mathematical problems, pure and applied. A laboratory period will
be included, and a knowledge of computer programming will be useful.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Spring semester.
35. Mathematics for the Social Sciences. This course will deal with vari­
ous topics in mathematics that have arisen from the social sciences. Topics
include such areas as Markov chain models, simulation, linear programming,
game theory, utility theory, and graph theory with applications to organization
theory, integer programming and optimal assignment problems. Examples will
be drawn from economics, political science, psychology and sociology-anthro­
pology. Some computer programming may be included.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Spring semester. Not offered 1970-1971.
41. Groups and Representations. An introduction to the theory of abstract
groups with applications to such areas as symmetry groups, followed by the
elements of representation theory.
Prerequisite: Math 11.
Spring semester.
42. Applied Modem Algebra. Topics will be selected from such areas as
Boolean algebras, finite state machines, programming languages, optimization
and computer design, and coding theory.
Prerequisite: M ath 11 or permission of the instructor.
Fall semester.
51. Applied Real Analysis. Among the topics to be covered are normed
vector spaces, Fourier series, the Fourier integral, and such important theorems
as those of Gauss, Green and Stokes.
Prerequisite: M ath 22, or permission of the instructor.
Fall semester.
52. Applied Complex Analysis. An introductory course in the theory of
functions of a complex variable, including the theory and application of con­
formal mappings.
Prerequisite: Math 51, or permission of the instructor.
Spring semester.
53. Topology. This course is intended to bridge the gap between Advanced
Calculus and certain topics in abstract mathematics. The topics covered will
vary from year to year and will be selected from those topics in seminar 104.
Spring semester.
H

o n o r s

S

e m in a r s

101- Real Analysis. This seminar concentrates on the careful study of the
principles underlying the calculus of real valued functions of real variables.
Fall semester.

137

MATHEMATICS
102. Modem Algebra. This seminar deals with the theoretical properties of
such formal systems as groups, rings, fields and vector spaces. While these
concepts will be illustrated by many concrete examples, the emphasis will be
on the abstract nature of the subject.
Spring semester.
103. Complex Analysis. A brief study of the geometry of complex numbers
is followed by a detailed treatment of the Cauchy theory of analytic functions
of a complex variable. Various applications are given and some special classes
of functions, such as elliptic functions, are studied. Analytic continuation and
the theory of Weierstrass are also discussed.
Prerequisite: Seminar 101 or Math 51.
Fall semester.
104. Topology. The subject matter of this semester will include such topics
as point set topology w ith some applications, piecewise linear topology,
homology and homotopy theory.
Spring semester.
105. Probability and Statistics. The purpose of this seminar is to give the
mathematical background necessary for an understanding of the mathematical
analysis of statistical data. In addition, the modern development of this subject
provides a valuable application of the concepts and techniques acquired in
the study of advanced calculus. The topics treated may include: the axiomatic
approach, the use of Stieltjes integrals, correlation and regression, some special
distributions, sampling theory, and a short introduction to the theory of statis­
tical estimation.
Spring semester.
In recent years several additional seminars and courses have been offered
and are available when there is sufficient interest. These include:
Functional Analysis
Theory of Numbers
Foundations and Philosophy of Mathematics
Applied Mathematics
Group Representations
Differential Geometry
Set Theory (Course 17)
Metamathematical Methods in Mathematics (Course 18)

138

MODERN LANGUAGES
AND LITERATURES
HILDE D. COHN (Germ an), Professor
FRANZ H. MAUTNER (German) , Professor
FRANCIS P. TAFOYA (French), Professor and Chairman
ELISA ASENSIO (Spanish), Associate Professor
GEORGE C. AVERY (Germ an), Associate Professor
JEAN ASHMEAD PERKINS (French), Associate Professort
GEORGE KRUGOVOY (Russian), Associate Professor
PHILIP METZIDAKIS (Spanish), Associate Professor
JEAN-CLAUDE BARRÉ (French), Assistant Professor
THOMPSON BRADLEY (Russian), Assistant Professor
ROBERT ROZA (French), Assistant Professor
SIMONE VOISIN SMITH (French), Assistant Professor
RICHARD TERDIMAN (French), Assistant Professort
OLGA FERNANDEZ CONNOR (Spanish), Visiting Lecturer
ANNE MENARD (French), Visiting Lecturer.
ELKE PLAXTON (German), Visiting Lecturer
HELEN P. SHAT AGIN (Russian), Visiting Lecturer
URBAIN J. DE WINTER (Spanish), Assistant
The purpose of the departmental major is to acquaint the student w ith the
important periods and major figures in the literature of France, the German­
speaking countries, Russia, Spain and Latin-America, and to provide training in
critical analysis while developing his appreciation of literary and cultural values.
Courses numbered 1 through 6 are primarily designed to help students acquire
the linguistic competence necessary to pursue literary studies in a foreign lan­
guage through work with the language and selected literary texts. For a detailed
description of the orientation in these courses see the Explanatory Note on
language courses below. Courses numbered 11 or above stress the study of
literature as a humanistic discipline but also have as one of their aims the
achievement of competence in the spoken and written language.
Students who show unusual promise or a willingness to do intensive supple­
mentary work can major or enter Honors seminars in a language started in
college, but in general, students planning to major in a foreign language and its
literature are advised to present enough credits upon admission to enable them
to register for courses numbered 11 and 12 in their freshman year or at the very
latest by the beginning of the sophomore year. Students who enter w ith no
previous knowledge of the foreign language but who are interested in major­
ing in it should register for the intensive course (1B-2B) in their freshman year.
Language courses numbered 1 through 5 do not count toward the minimum of
eight courses required for the major.
Students who w ant to continue a language begun elsewhere will be placed
at the course level where they will profit best according to the rating of the
College Entrance Examination or placement tests administered by the depart­
ment. Students who place in courses numbered 1 through 4 must in addition
take the Modern Language Aptitude Test during freshman orientation. Students
beginning their study of a foreign language at Swarthmore are also required
to take the Modern Language Aptitude Test.
Swarthmore College does not offer courses in Italian but arrangements have
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71.
t Absent on leave, 1970-71.

139

MODERN LANGUAGES
been made at neighboring institutions which will permit students to study
Italian if they so desire. PMC, in Chester, offers courses in first-year and
second-year Italian, each meeting three times a week. Students interested in
registering for these courses should consult the Chairman of the department.
Prerequisites for majors are noted under the listing of each of the literatures
taught. Exceptions to course requirements are made for those who show com­
petence in the language of specialization. Students who speak French, German,
Russian or Spanish fluently should consult with the department before electing
courses.
Majors are urged (a) to elect supporting courses in other literatures (classical
or m odem ), History, Philosophy, Political Science, Anthropology, Sociology,
Psychology, Art History and Music; (b) to investigate seriously the possibility
of spending, during or after their sophomore year, at least a summer and a
semester abroad. Interested students should request assistance of departmental
advisers familiar with programs in foreign countries.
Students wishing to receive teaching certificates in French, German, Russian
or Spanish should plan on taking the regular program of language and litera­
ture courses required for the major or show proof of the equivalent. In addi­
tion, they should take Linguistics 1 and courses in the foreign history and cul­
ture to prepare them for the MLA Foreign Language Test for Teachers and
Advanced Students. This examination consists of seven sections: the four basic
skills (listening, speaking, reading and writing), Applied Linguistics, Culture,
and Professional Education. In order to be certified, students must pass this
examination at the level of “good.” Prospective teachers of a foreign language
are urged to include in their program at least a summer and a semester abroad.
Students planning to do graduate work are reminded that, in addition to the
language of specialization, a reading knowledge of other languages is generally
required for admission to advanced studies. Students who need advice concern­
ing the choice of languages should consult with the department.

Continental European Literature
(Courses conducted in English)
Students acquainted with a particular foreign language would do best to elect
the appropriate literature course taught in the original language and not the
corresponding CEL 12 or CEL 50, though they might well take one in another
literature. These courses cannot be substituted for the 11 or 12 level courses in
the original languages to satisfy the departmental prerequisites for a major or
minor. The CEL 50s may in some cases form an appropriate part of the upperlevel work in the major in one of the foreign literatures or serve as the basis
of preparation for an Honors paper. Students planning programs where such
considerations would apply must consult with the department.
CEL 12 and CEL 50 courses will be offered according to the following seqUenC6:

1970-71
Fall
CEL 12 French
CEL 50 Spanish

Spring
CEL 12 German
CEL 50 Russian

1971-72
Spring
Fall
CEL 12 Russian
CEL 12 Spanish
CEL 50 German
CEL 50 French
12F. Man and Society in French Literature. An examination of the double­
tradition of introspective individualism and deep social concern—and the

140

MODERN LANGUAGES
inevitable conflict between these impulses—in the works of such writers as
Montaigne, Corneille, Molière, Diderot, Stendhal, Balzac and Zola.
Fall semester, 1970. Mr. fiarré.
12G. The Quest for a Tradition in German Literature. A selection of repre­
sentative works written in German-speaking countries from the Middle Ages to
the end of the nineteenth century. Emphasis on the emergence of characteris­
tically German themes and forms as a response to the influences of historical and
cultural forces and of the European literary tradition. Authors will include
Gottfried, Grimmelshausen, Lessing, Schiller, Goethe, Keller, Fontane, and
Wedekind.
Spring semester, 1971. Mr. Avery.
12R. Russian Thought and Literature in the Quest for Truth. The develop­
ment of Russian intellectual tradition as reflected in Russian philosophy and
literature from the eighteenth century to the present day. Brief consideration of
Russian medieval literature and thought. Historical and cultural consequences
of the introduction of Christianity into Russia from Byzantium. Eighteenth cen­
tury: secularization of culture. Nineteenth and twentieth centuries: philosophi­
cal and literary polemics within framework of current secular ideologies and
religious thought. Russian and the West and the dream of Perfect World.
Spring semester, 1972.
12S. The Development of Spanish Literature. A study of works representative
of the most significant currents in Hispanic literature from the Renaissance
through the nineteenth century. Special emphasis on Spain’s unique contribu­
tion to world literature: the figure of the picaro, la Celestina, Don Juan and
Don Quixote. Includes selective prose works of the Realistic and Naturalistic
periods.
Fall semester, 1971.
13. Medieval Comparative Literature. The tension between ideals and their
realization as reflected in the literature of the Middle Ages, especially the epic
(Roland, Cid, Nibelungen) and the romance (Tristan, Y vain, The Grail.)
Fall semester, 1970. Mrs. Perkins.
17. The Age of Enlightenment. The intellectual history of the late seven­
teenth and the eighteenth century in Europe as illustrated in selected works
exemplifying such important themes as the rise of rationalism and its eventual
decline, the opposing forces of optimism and pessimism, and new views of the
nature of man and his place in society.
34. Renaissance Comparative Literature. See English 34.
48. Modern Drama. See English 48.
50F. Intellectual Trends in 20th Century French Literature. Principal doc­
trines (Bergsonism, Surrealism, Marxism, Existentialism, Structuralism) as re­
flected in, or related to, the major literary or critical works and essays of Proust,
Gide, André Breton, Louis Aragon, Malraux, Sartre, Camus, de Beauvoir, Roland
Barthes, and Claude Lévi-Strauss.
Fall semester, 1971.
30G. German Literature Since 1900. The reflection in German literature of
the political and cultural crises that have dominated the century. Works by
Rilke, Thomas Mann, Hesse, Kafka, Musil, Broch, Dôblin, Brecht, and con­
temporary authors.
Spring semester, 1972.
50R. Russian Literature and Revolutionary Thought. A study of continuity
and change: the relationship between the major political and social movements

141

MODERN LANGUAGES
and the writers before and after 1917. Special attention will be given to the post­
revolutionary literary and political struggle in the 1920’s and the literary revival
of the 1960’s with emphasis on Herzen, Bakunin. Chernyshevsky, Trotsky, Babel,
Olesha, Mayakovsky, Tertz and Solzhenitsyn.
Spring semester, 1971. Mr. Bradley.
50S. Spanish Thought and Literature of the 20th Century. The struggle be­
tween traditionalism and liberalism, its background and manifestations in Span­
ish thought and letters from the turn of the century through the Civil W ar to the
present day. Emphasis on Unamuno, Ortega y Gasset, Federico García Lorca,
José Camilo Cela, Carmen Laforet and Juan Goytisolo.
Fall semester, 1970. Mrs. Connor.
E xplanatory N ote

on

L anguage C o u r ses N u m b e r ed 1 T h r o u g h 4

French, German, Russian and Spanish language courses numbered 1 through
4 are taught in sections with different orientations. The work load for courses
numbered 1 through 4 without a postscript capital and those numbered 1A
through 4A is similar except that students in A sections prepare a greater pro­
portion of their daily assignments under the supervision of a specialist who
speaks the target language natively. Courses numbered IB through 3B are more
intensive than those numbered with or without the postscript capital A and carry
extra credit.
a. Courses numbered 1 through 4 without a postscript capital combine the
presentation or review of grammar essentials w ith extensive reading and
translation of texts of literary, cultural or general interest. These courses
meet three times per week with additional sessions in the language labora­
tory as assigned. These courses do not normally prepare students for the
intermediate or advanced courses in literature taught in the original lan­
guage. Admission contingent upon departmental testing.
b. Courses numbered 1A through 4A are designed to impart an active com­
mand of the language and combine the study or review of grammar essen­
tials and readings of literary texts w ith intensive practice to develop the
ability to speak the language. This orientation is recommended for those
interested in acquiring a thorough command of the language or in preparing
for intermediate or advanced courses in literature taught in the original
language. These courses (a) meet as one section for grammar presentation
and in small groups for oral practice with a special instructor (b) require
periodic w ork in the language laboratory. Admission contingent upon de­
partmental testing.
c. Courses numbered IB through 3B are similar in orientation to those des­
ignated with a capital A but meet more frequently for extra credit. Three
semesters in this sequence 1B-2B, 3B are the equivalent of two years of
work at the college level. Recommended for students who w ant to pro­
gress rapidly and especially for those with no previous knowledge of the
language who are considering majoring in that literature.

French
French may be offered as a major in Course or as a major or minor in Honors.
Prerequisites for both Course and Honors students are as follows:
Required: French 6, 11 and 12; the equivalent, or evidence of special compe­
tence.
Recommended supporting subjects: see the introductory departmental state­
ment.

142

MODERN LANGUAGES
Majors in Course and Honors, as well as minors in Honors, are expected to be
sufficiently proficient in spoken and written French to do all of their work in
French, i.e., discussions and papers in courses and seminars, and all oral and
written examinations, including comprehensive and Honors examinations.
Courses
n o t e : Not all advanced courses are offered every year. Those announced for
1970-71 and 1971-72 guarantee adequate coverage for majors but do not pre­
clude additional offerings or special arrangements to satisfy manifest interest.
Students wishing to major or minor in French should plan their program in
consultation with the department.
1-2. First-Year French. For students who begin French in college. This is a
terminal course which is primarily designed for those students who w ant a
reading knowledge of French.
Year course.
1B-2B, 3B. Intensive French. For students who begin French in college.
Designed to impart an active command of the language. Combines the study of
grammar with intensive oral practice and readings in literary and expository
prose. Class and drill sessions meet seven and one-half hours per week. Periodic
language laboratory attendance required. Each semester carries one and one-half
credits; three semesters of work satisfy the prerequisites for intermediate
courses in literature taught in French. Recommended for students who want
to progress rapidly and especially for those with no previous knowledge of
French who are considering majoring in French literature. Admission con­
tingent upon satisfactory scores in the Modern Language Aptitude Test or
special permission. Normally followed by 6, 11, or 12.
5. Composition and Diction. Emphasis is placed on syntax, translation and
composition. An effort is made to encourage fluency and to correct faulty pro­
nunciation. (Does not count towards a French major.)
6. Studies in Stylistics. For majors or those who wish an advanced course to
develop self-expression in the written and oral language. Original compositions
are based on a stylistic study of texts (by representative French authors) from
the X V IIIth Century to the present. Generally taught in both fall and spring
semesters.
11. Readings in French Literature. The transition from language learning to
literary study is facilitated through intensive readings in modem French litera­
ture (works by authors such as Beckett, Butor, Camus, Genet, Gide, Sartre or
others). Frequent oral exposés and written compositions as well as extensive
readings are assigned to improve fluency and accuracy in French.
Prerequisite: French 3B, the equivalent, or special permission.
Each semester.
12. Introduction to Literary Studies. A comparative study of representative
works by classical and modern authors: poetry (DuBellay-Rimbaud), drama
(Racine-Beckett), novel (Prévost-Proust), essay (Pascal-Camus).
Prerequisite: French 11, the equivalent or special permission.
Each semester.
13. Freshman Seminar. For freshmen only. Limited enrollment.
Prerequisite: a score of 675 or above in French, and special permission of the
instructor. The topic for fall semester, 1970 is: Littérateurs Engagés. An exami­
nation of ideas of commitment as exemplified in selected literary works and
essays by Malraux, Sartre, Camus, de Beauvoir, Merleau-Ponty or others.
Fall semester, 1970. Mr. Tafoya.

143

MODERN LANGUAGES
14. L’Humanisme de la Renaissance. The evolution of French thought from
the optimism of Rabelais to the skepticism of Montaigne as reflected primarily in
the prose works of the Renaissance.
Mrs. Smith.
15. Le Théâtre Classique. The development of dramatic techniques in French
drama from the sixteenth century through the age of Classicism. Emphasis on
Corneille, Racine and Molière.
Mrs. Smith.
16. Le Classicisme. The major writers of the 17th century, excluding the
dramatists; Descartes, Pascal, La Fontaine, Boileau, La Rochefoucauld, La
Bruyère, Mme» de La Fayette.
Fall semester, 1970. Mrs. Smith.
17. L’Esprit Critique du 18e Siècle. Development of the critical approach in
the works of Montesquieu, Voltaire, Diderot and Rousseau.
Mrs. Perkins.
19. Roman du 19e Siècle» A study of innovations in technique and form as
well as the examination of moral problems arising from socio-political changes
in 19th century France. Based primarily on the novels of Balzac, Stendhal, Flau­
bert and Zola.
Mr. Terdiman.
20. Roman du 20® Siècle, A study of aesthetic innovations and of principal
themes in their ideological and sociological context. Readings to be chosen from
the works of authors such as Beckett, Breton, Butor, Camus, Céline, Gide,
Malraux, Queneau, Robbe-Grillet, Sarraüte, Sartre or Others.
Spring semester, 1971. Mr. Tafoya.
21. Théâtre Moderne, Major trends in 20th Century drama w ith special em­
phasis on the Works of Giraudoux, Anouilh, Sartre, Camus, and the Theatre of
the Absurd.
Fall semester, 1970, Mr. Roza.
22. Littérature du Moyen-Age. The genesis of the French novel in its rela­
tion to the epic model and its successor. The function of Love and Adventure
in the courtly romance. Emphasis on the Chanson de Roland, the romances
of Chrétien de Troyes and La Quête du Graal.
Mrs. Perkins.
23. Poésie Symboliste. The evolution of symbolist aesthetics from Baudelaire
through Apollinaire. Includes Rimbaud, Mallarmé, Verlaine, LaForgue and
Valéry»
Spring semester, 1971. Mr. Roza.
25. Poésie Contemporaine. Major poets after Apollinaire: includes the
Surrealists (Breton, Reverdy, Eluard, Aragon and Char) as Well as Saint-John
Perse, Supervielle and representative poets since World W ar II (Guillevic and
Bonnefoy) »
30. Littérateurs Engagés. A study of the literature of commitment before and
after World W ar II. Principally an examination of the literary manifestations of
French Existentialism. Includes works by Malraux, Sartre, de Beauvoir, Camus
or others.
Mr. Tafoya.
40. Littérature et Négritude. This course is designed to provide interested
students with an introduction to the works of French-speaking African and
West Indian writers. Some emphasis Will be placed on the relationship of

144

MODERN LANGUAGES
African authors to the French literary milieu, on the link between their socio­
political and aesthetic concerns, and finally on their efforts to adjust themes
and forms typical of African vernacular literatures to the tenets of French
cultural tradition. The two major figures to be discussed are Léopold Senghor
and Aimé Césaire.
Mr. Barré.
50, 51. Colloquium. Offered for single or double credit and devoted to the
intensive investigation of subjects or topics not covered by the regular pro­
gram. Enrollment is limited and subject to departmental approval. The subject
for the spring semester of 1970-71 is: “Littérature et troubles sociaux." The
course will consist of an investigation into works dealing w ith social disorders
(riots, civil war, revolution) ; a great deal of attention will be paid to the ways
in which various writers (mostly novelists) perceive and appraise social events,
describe the development of their characters in the midst of those events, and,
in some instances, propose solutions to existing social problems. The authors
dealt with are: Madame de la Fayette, Victor Hugo, Stendhal, Balzac, Flaubert,
Rimbaud, Zola, Malraux, Sartre, Vercors and Camus.
Spring semester, 1971. Mr. Barré.
52. Special Topics (for senior majors). Study of individual authors, selected
themes or critical problems.
Spring semester, 1971.
53. Thesis.
54. Directed Reading.
H

onors

Sem

in a rs

100. Littérature du Moyen-Age. Old French readings in lyric poetry, theatre
and romance.
Mrs. Perkins.
101. La Renaissance. Prose works of Rabelais, Marguerite de Navarre, and
Montaigne. Poetic innovations from Marot through the Pléiade.
Mrs. Smith.
102. Le Théâtre Classique. Corneille, Racine, Molière.
Mrs. Smith.
103. L’Age des Lumières. The “Philosophes,” the theater and the novel of the
eighteenth century.
Mrs, Perkins.
104. Stendhal et Flaubert.
Spring semester, 1971. Mr. Roza.
105. Proust.
Mr, Terdiman.
106. Poésie Moderne. Baudelaire, Rimbaud, Verlaine, Mallarmé, Claudel,
Valéry.
Fall semester, 1970. Mr. Roza,
108. Le Roman du 20« Siècle.

Mr. Roza.
110. Special Topics. Study of individual authors, selected themes or critical
problems not included in the regular program to satisfy the interest of students
and instructors.

Each semester.
145

MODERN LANGUAGES
112. Thesis.
n o t e : Some seminars treat the same, subjects as the courses, but the reading
required in both texts and critical material is more extensive. The work of a
seminar corresponds to two courses.

German
German may be offered as a major in Course or as a major or minor in Honors.
Prerequisites for both Course and Honors students are as follows:
Required: German 11 or 12, or equivalent work.
Recommended supporting subjects: see the introductory departmental state­
ment.
Majors are expected to speak German with sufficient fluency to take part in
discussion in courses and seminars in the language and to pass oral examina­
tions in German.
n o t e : Not all advanced courses or seminars are offered every year. Students
wishing to major or minor in German should plan their program in consultation
with the department.
Courses
n o t e : See the Explanatory Note on Language Courses numbered 1 through 4
in the introductory departmental statement.

1-2. First-Year German. For students who begin German in college. Equiva­
lent to two years of German in secondary school. Normally followed by German
3, 4, but exceptionally qualified students may request permission to continue in
German 3A, 4A. Emphasis on fundamentals of grammar; readings in literary
and expository prose.
Year course.
1B-2B, 3B. Intensive German. For students who begin German in college.
Designed to impart an active command of the language. Combines the study
of grammar with intensive oral practice and readings in literary and exposi­
tory prose. Class and drill sessions meet seven and one-half hours per week.
Periodic language laboratory attendance required. Each semester carries one
and one-half credits; three semesters of work satisfy the prerequisites for
intermediate courses in literature taught in German. Recommended for
students who w ant to progress rapidly and especially for those with no
previous knowledge of German who are considering majoring in German
literature. Admission contingent upon satisfactory scores in the Modern
Language Aptitude Test or special permission. Normally followed by 6,
11, or 12.
3,4. Second-Year German. For students who have completed German 1-2 or
its equivalent as determined by departmental testing. Normally a terminal course
but exceptionally qualified students may, with permission, take an appropriate
sequential course. (Students in German 4 in the fall semester may, without spe­
cial permission, continue in German 11 in the spring semester.) German 3 is
offered in the fall semester only; German 4 is normally offered in both semesters.
Review of first-year grammar, followed by emphasis on special problems of
grammar; literary and expository readings beginning with texts of moderate
difficulty such as Hesse, Knulp; Brecht, Kalendergeschichten; Schweitzer, Leben
und Denken.
3A, 4A. Second-Year German. For students who have completed German
1A-2A or its equivalent as determined by departmental testing. Completion of

146

MODERN LANGUAGES
German 4A fulfills the prerequisites for German 6, 11 or 12. German 3A is
offered only in the fall semester and 4A only in the spring semester. Grammar
and readings similar to German 3, 4 but with emphasis on development of
speaking and writing ability.
6. Writing and Speaking German. Oral discussions and writing practice based
on general and literary topics of contemporary interest. For students who want
to consolidate their skills of expression. Usually offered each semester.
Prerequisite: German 3A, 4A or its equivalent. Eligibility as it applies to stu­
dents from German 4 is explained under German 3 ,4 above.
7-8. Elementary German (Special Reading Course). A special course designed
for those who wish to acquire only a reading knowledge of German. German 7-8
may be used to fulfill the requirements of certain departments or of graduate
schools.
Year course.
11. Introduction to German Literature (19th and 20th Centuries). A study of
representative prose fiction, poetry, and drama from the German Romantics to
Kafka. Discussion, papers. Not a survey course.
Prerequisite: German 4A or its equivalent. Eligibility as it applies to students
from German 4 is explained under German 3,4 above.
12. Introduction to German Literature (Goethe and his Age). A study of
works by Lessing, Goethe, and Schiller. Discussion, papers. Not a survey course.
Prerequisite: German 4A or its equivalent. Eligibility as it applies to students
from German 4 is explained under German 3,4 above.
14. Goethes Faust, Erster und Zweiter Teil. An intensive study of Faust, I and
II. Also for students who only know Faust, Part One.
Mr. Mautner.
15. Die Deutsche Romantik. Also taught as a seminal'. See German 105
below.
Mr. Avery.
16. Die Deutsche Novelle seit Goethe. Also taught as a seminar. See German
110 below.
Miss Cohn.
17. Moderne Deutsche Literatur. A study of leading German writers of the
twentieth century, including Hauptmann, Thomas Mann, Rilke, Hofmannsthal,
Kafka.
Mr. Avery or Miss Cohn.
18. Studies in German Poetry. Also taught as a seminar. See German 111
below.
Mr. Mautner.
20. Die Deutsche Komödie. Also taught as a seminar. See German 109 below.
Fall semester, 1970. Mr. Mautner.
21. Kafka und Brecht. A study of the principal works of each author with
stress on the interpretation of major themes and the examination of literary
craftsmanship. Includes consideration of the cultural and social environment in
which the works were written.
Spring semester, 1971. Mr. Avery.
30. Herman Hesse. A study of the central themes and the development of
narrative technique in Hesse’s novels. Works to be examined will include:

147

MODERN LANGUAGES
Knulp, Demian, Siddhartha, Der Steppenwolf, and Die Morgenlandfahrt.
Prerequisite: German 11 or 12, or SAT score of 650. Primarily for freshmen and
sophomores; meets 1 Vz class hours per week.
Half-course. Mr. Avery.
50-51. Colloquium. Offered from time to time in response to student and
faculty interests. Devoted to an intensive examination of subjects or topics not
covered in the regular program. Enrollment is limited and subject to depart­
mental approval.
52. Special Topics (For senior majors). Study of individual authors, selected
themes or critical problems.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

103. Deutsches Barock und Aufklaerung. A study of German literature in the
seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries. The lyric poetry of the period, the
mysticism of Angelus Silesius and Jakob Böhme, the plays of Gryphius, and the
prose of Grimmelshausen; a study of Lessing.
104. Goethe. Goethe’s most significant works and his role in German in­
tellectual history will be studied.
Mr. Mautner.
105. Die Deutsche Romantik. Romanticism as the dominant movement in
German literature, thinking, and the arts of the first third of the nineteenth
century. Authors: Hölderlin, Novalis, Tieck, Arnim, Brentano, Eichendorff.
Spring semester, 1972. Mr. Avery.
106. Von Romantik zu Realismus.
Keller, Meyer, Storm, and Fontane.

Studies in the works of Mörike, Stifter,

107. Moderne Prosa. The development of German prose fiction since 1900
as reflected in works by Schnitzler, Hofmannsthal, Rilke, Mann, Kafka,
Döblin and Grass.
Fall semester, 1970. Mr. Avery.
108. Das Deutsche Drama. Representative examples of the dramatic genre in
German literature from the end of the 18th century to the present.
109. Die Deutsche Komödie. Outstanding comedies from Goethe to the pres­
ent time will be studied in their own right, as examples of the genre, and as
illustrations of German intellectual history.
110. Die Deutsche Novelle. A study of significant examples of this typically
German genre. Authors: Goethe, Eichendorff, Kleist, Stifter, Keller, Meyer,
Storm, Thomas Mann, and contemporary writers.
Spring semester, 1971. Miss Cohn.
111. Studies in German Poetry. A study of selected examples of German
poetry from the Baroque period to the present time. The interrelation of
Aussage, Gehalt und Gestalt.
112. Modernes Drama und Lyrik des XX. Jahrhunderts. The emergence of
modern trends as reflected primarily in the poetic and dramatic works of
Hauptmann, George, Hofmannsthal, Rilke, Trakl, Stemheim, Benn and Brecht.
Miss Cohn.

148

MODERN

LANGUAGES

Russian
Russian may be offered as a major in Course or as a major or minor in Honors.
Prerequisites for both Course and Honors students are as follows:
Required: Russian 11,12 and 13, or evidence of equivalent work.
Recommended supporting subjects: see the introductory departmental state­
ment.
Courses

Not all advanced courses or seminars are offered every year. Students wishing
to major or minor in Russian should plan their program in consultation with the
Department.
See the explanatory note on language courses numbered 1 through 4 in the
introductory departmental statement.
1-2. First-Year Russian. For students who begin Russian in college. Equiva­
lent to two years of Russian in secondary school. Normally followed by Russian
3,4; emphasis on fundamentals of grammar; readings in literary and expository
prose.
Year course.
1B-2B, 3B. Intensive Russian. For students who begin Russian in college.
Designed to impart an active command of the language. Combines the study of
grammar with intensive oral practice and readings in literary and expository
prose. Classes and drill sessions meet seven and one-half hours per week.
Periodic language laboratory attendance required. Each semester carries one
and one-half credits; three semesters of work satisfy prerequisites for intermedi­
ate and advanced courses in literature taught in Russian. Recommended for
students who want to progress rapidly and especially for those with no previous
knowledge of Russian who are considering majoring in Russian. Admission
contingent upon satisfactory scores in the Modern Language Aptitude test or
special permission. Normally followed by Russian 6 and 12.
3,4. Second-Year Russian. For students who have completed Russian 1-2
or the equivalent as determined by departmental testing. See Section a of the
explanatory note on language courses in the introductory departmental state­
ment. Normally a terminal course but exceptionally qualified students may, with
permission, take an appropriate sequential course. Students who completed
Russian 4 during the academic year 1969-70 may freely elect to continue in
sections of 11 or 12.
5, 6. Advanced Russian. For majors and those primarly interested in per­
fecting their command of language. Advanced conversation, composition, trans­
lation and stylistics. Readings of dramas and newspapers. Conducted in Russian.
11. Introduction to Literature. A survey of the development of Russian lit­
erature from the eleventh century through the Golden Age of Russian Poetry in
the nineteenth century. Classics of Russian medieval literature. Baroque poetry.
Classicism of the eighteenth century. Romanticism of the first third of the nine­
teenth century. Pushkin and Lermontov. Readings and class discussions in
Russian.
12. Introduction to Literature. A survey of Russian literature of the nine­
teenth and twentieth centuries to 1918. Age of Realism and literary tendencies
in the first two decades of the twentieth century. Works of Gogol, Turgenev,
Dostoevsky, Tolstoy, Leskov, Chekhov, Gorky and Bely will be read and dis­
cussed in Russian.

149

MODERN LANGUAGES
13. Russian Novel. Lectures and reading in English. The Russian majors will
be required to read a part of the material in Russian.
52. Special Topics. (For senior majors).
lected themes or critical problems.
H

onors

101.
102.
103.
104.
105.

Sem

Study of individual authors, se­

in ars

Tolstoy.
Russian Short Story.
Pushkin and Lermontov.
Dostoevsky.
Literature of the Soviet Period.

Spanish
Spanish may be offered as a major in Course or as a major or minor in Honors.
Prerequisites for both Course and Honors students are as follows:
Required: Spanish 11 and 12, or equivalent work.
Recommended supporting subjects: see the introductory departmental state­
ment.
Majors are expected to speak Spanish with sufficient fluency to take part in
discussion in courses and seminars in the language and to pass all oral compre­
hensive or oral Honors examinations in Spanish.
n o t e : Not all advanced courses are offered every year. Those announced for
1970-71 and 1971-72, guarantee adequate coverage for majors but do not pre­
clude additional offerings or special arrangements to satisfy manifest interest.
Students wishing to major or minor in Spanish should plan their program in
consultation with the department.
Courses

1B-2B, 3B. Intensive Spanish. For students who begin Spanish in college.
Designed to impart an active command of the language. Combines the study
of grammar with intensive oral practice and readings in literary and exposi­
tory prose. Class and drill sessions meet seven and one-half hours per week.
Periodic language laboratory attendance required. Each semester carries one
and one-half credits; three semesters of work satisfy the prerequisites for
intermediate courses in literature taught in Spanish. Recommended for students
who w ant to progress rapidly and especially for those with no previous knowl­
edge of Spanish who are considering majoring in Spanish literature. Admission
contingent upon satisfactory scores in the Modern Language Aptitude Test or
special permission. Normally followed by 6, 11, or 12.
3A, 4A. Second-Year Spanish. For students who have completed Spanish
1A-2A or the equivalent as determined by departmental testing. See Section b
of the Explanatory Note on language courses in the introductory departmental
statement. Completion of 4A satisfies the prerequisites for intermediate courses
in Spanish. Normally followed by Spanish 11.
5, 6. Composition and Diction. For majors and others who wish advanced
courses in which the emphasis is not primarily literary. An effort is made to
correct faulty pronunciation and to improve self-expression in the language both
oral and written.
11. Introduction to Spanish Literature. A study of representative prose fic­
tion, poetry and drama of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries (works by

150

MODERN LANGUAGES
authors such as Espronceda, Zorrilla, Bécquer, Pérez Galdós, Unamuno, Baroja,
Lorca, etc.). Discussion, papers.
Prerequisite: Spanish 4A, the equivalent, or special permission.
12. Introduction to Spanish Literature. A study of representative prose fic­
tion, poetry and drama from the late Middle Ages through the Golden Century
(authors to be read include: Jorge Manrique, Romances, Cervantes, Lope de
Vega, Calderón, Quevedo, etc.). Discussion, papers.
Prerequisite: Spanish 4A, the equivalent, or special permission.
n o t e : Spanish 11 and 12, the equivalent, or consent of instructor, are pre­
requisite for the courses in literature that follow.
20. La Literatura Medieval. From the Poema del Cid to La Celestina. Also
included are works by Gonzalo de Berceo, Don Juan Manuel, el Arcipreste de
Hita, and Jorge Manrique.
21. El Teatro del Renacimiento y del Siglo de Oro. Special emphasis will be
placed on the outstanding dramatists of the Golden Century (Lope de Vega,
Tirso de Molina, Ruiz de Alarcón, Calderon, etc.).
23. La Poesía del Renacimiento y del Siglo de Oro. From the Romancero
through the Baroque. Special emphasis on Garcilaso de la Vega, Herrera, Fray
Luis de León, San Juan de la Cruz, Lope de Vega, Quevedo and Góngora.
Spring semester, 1971. Mr. Metzidakis.
24. Cervantes.
Quijote.

The works of Cervantes with special emphasis on the

26. La Novela en el Siglo XIX. Realism and Naturalism in nineteenth cen­
tury prose fiction. Works by Alarcón, Valera, Pérez Galdós, Pardo Bazán, Clarín,
Blasco Ibáñez and others.
Fall semester, 1970. Mrs. Asensio.
27. La Generación del 98. Studies in the works of Valle-Inclán, Azorin,
Baroja, Unamuno, Benavente and Antonio Machado.
28. Literatura Española Contemporánea. Major figures of the twentieth cen­
tury not covered in Spanish 27: Juan Ramón Jiménez, García Lorca, Alberti,
Salinas, Guillén, Hernández, Hierro and Aleixandre among the poets; novels by
Cela and Goytisolo; the theater of Casona and Sastre.
29. Literatura Hispanoamericana. The nineteenth-century realistic novel,
modernism and the post-modernist novel. Representative works of authors such
as Rubén Darío, Silva, Rodó, Lugones, Chocano, Rivera, Gallegos, Azuela, or
others.
30. La Poesía Hispanoamericana en el Siglo XX. A study of the poetry of
Mistral, Agustini, Ibarbourou, Storni, Vallejo, Huidobro, Gorostiza, Paz, Nicolas
Guillén, Neruda, Borges, and others.
Spring semester, 1971. Mrs. Connor.
31. La Novela Hispanoamericana en el Siglo XX. Works by Mallea, Sábato,
Lynch, Carpentier, Asturias, Rojas, Vargas Llosa, Rulfo, Fuentes, García
Márquez and others.
50-51. Colloquium. Offered for double credit and devoted to the intensive
investigation of subjects or topics not covered by the regular program. Enroll­
ment is limited and subject to departmental approval.

151

MODERN LANGUAGES
52. Special Topics (for senior majors). Study of individual authors, selected
themes or critical problems.
H

onors

Sem

in a rs

108. Las Obras de Cervantes.
109. La Generación del 98: Valle-Iuclán, Azorin, Baroja, Unamuno, Maeztu,
Benavente, Antonio Machado.
Fall semester, 1970. Mr. Metzidakis.
110.

Literatura Española Contemporánea.

111. La Poesía Hispanoamericana en el Siglo XX.
112.

La Novela Hispanoamericana en el Siglo XX.

113. El Teatro del Renacimiento y del Siglo de Oro.
114.

La Poesía del Renacimiento y del Siglo de Oro.

note: Some seminars treat the same subject as the courses, but reading re­

quired in both texts and critical material is more extensive. The w ork of a
seminar corresponds to that of two courses.

MUSIC
PETER GRAM SWING, Professor and Chairmant
JAMES D. FREEMAN, Assistant Professor and Acting Chairman
DAVID H. STEINBROOK, Instructor
JANE A. COPPOCK, Lecturer
CAROLINE M. CUNNINGHAM, Lecturer**
GILBERT KALISH, Associate in Performance
MICHAEL KORN, Associate in Performance
ROBERT M. SMART, Associate in Performance
PAUL ZUKOFSKY, Associate in Performance
The study of music as a liberal art requires an integrated approach to theory,
history and performance, experience in all three fields being essential to the un­
derstanding of music as an artistic and intellectual achievement. Theory courses
and seminars train the student to work with musical materials, to understand
modes of organization in compositions, and to evolve methods of musical analy­
sis. History courses and seminars introduce students to methods of studying the
development of musical styles and genres, and the relationship of music to
other arts and areas of thought. The department encourages students to develop
performing skills through private study and through participation in the orches­
tra, chorus and chamber music coaching program which it staffs and administers.
Scholarships are available to assist music majors who are talented instrumen­
talists or singers finance the cost of private instruction.
Students wishing to combine instrumental or vocal studies outside the College
w ith a major in music at Swarthmore can, with special permission from the de­
partm ent and the provost, elect a five-year plan of study, thus reducing the
normal number of courses to be taken per semester.
lAbsent on leave, 1970-71.
“ Fall semester, 1970-71.

152

MUSI C
Req

u irem en ts

and

R

eco m m end a tio ns

Two semester courses in theory and one semester course in history are pre­
requisite for acceptance as a major. Majors will normally take six semester
courses in theory (including Music 61-62), four semester courses in history (in­
cluding Music 15,16), and meet the basic piano requirement.
Major in Honors: A student intending to major in Honors will generally stand
for four papers in music. The department strongly recommends that one paper
be a thesis or research project. Music 61-62, required of all majors, may be used
as the basis of a paper. Papers in history can be prepared by tutorial, by seminar
or by taking a history course with a concurrent or subsequent attached unit of
additional research.
Minors in Honors: A student intending to minor in Honors will generally
stand for two papers in music. Two semester courses in theory and one semester
course in history are prerequisite for a minor. Music 1 may, with permission of
the department, be substituted for the theory prerequisite.
Language Requirements for Graduate Schools: Students are advised that gradu­
ate work in music requires a reading knowledge of French and German. A
reading knowledge of Latin is also desirable for students planning to do gradu­
ate work in musicology.
Proficiency on an instrument: All majors in music will be expected to play a
keyboard instrument well enough to perform at sight a two-part invention of
J. S. Bach and a first movement of an easy late 18th or early 19th century sonata.
By the end of the junior year they should be able to read chamber music scores,
also vocal music in four clefs, and realize figured basses. The department recom­
mends that majors take one or two semesters of Music 39 to develop these skills.
Students with exceptional proficiency in an instrument other than the piano, or
in singing, will not be expected to meet the performing standards of pianists.
The basic piano program: This program is designed to develop keyboard pro­
ficiency to a point where a student can effectively use the piano as a tool for
study, also to help students meet the keyboard requirements outlined above.
It is open to freshmen and sophomores planning to major in music. No aca­
demic credit is given for basic piano.
C redit

for

P

erformance

A student who has taken Music 1, Music 11-12, or Music 13-14 (or who has
equivalent prior training) has the option to receive credit for study of an instru­
ment or voice, participation in the department’s chamber music coaching pro­
gram, participation in the Swarthmore College Orchestra, and participation in
the Swarthmore College Chorus. The amount of credit received will normally be
a half-course in any one semester, and will usually be granted only to students
participating for a full year in a particular activity. Students applying for credit
will be given an audition at the beginning of the semester and will fulfill re­
quirements established for each activity, i.e. regular attendance at rehearsals
and performances and participation in any supplementary classes held in con­
nection with the activity. Students will be graded on a pass-fail basis.
A student applying for credit for study of an instrument or voice will first
demonstrate to the department his ability to undertake such study at least at an
intermediate level. He will arrange to work with a teacher of his choice, subject
to approval of the department. The department will then supervise the course
of study in any semester for which credit is to be given. The teacher will submit

153

MUSIC
a written report of the student’s w ork at the close of the semester to be used by
the department in making its evaluation. The department may use public per­
formance or a final audition as additional evidence for evaluating work. The
College does not undertake to pay for instruction; the student is expected to
make his own financial arrangements directly with the teacher.
Courses

and

Sem

in ars

n o t e : All seminars are open to qualified Course students.
1. Introduction to Music. A course combining study of the materials of music
(including fundamentals) w ith training in listening and analysis. Students will
work with a selected repertory of compositions from different eras. The course
assumes no prior training in music.
Open to all students without prerequisite.
Fall semester. Mr. Freeman.
Spring semester. Mr. Steinbrook.

Theory and Composition
11-12. First Year Theory. A course in elementary tonal theory offering basic
training in harmony and counterpoint. Emphasis will be placed on written
exercises along w ith ear-training, dictation and keyboard harmony. Frequent
reference will be made to a variety of keyboard and chamber compositions
which will be carefully analyzed.
Year course. Miss Coppock.
13-14. Second Year Theory. A continuation of Music 11-12.
Year course. Mr. Steinbrook.
41. Composition. Open to qualified students with permission of the in­
structor.
Fall semester. Mr. Steinbrook.
61-62. Third Year Theory. A continuation of Music 13-14 covering special­
ized areas of harmony, counterpoint and analysis.
Year course. Mr. Steinbrook.
H

onors

S

e m in a r s

141. Composition.
Fall semester. Mr. Steinbrook.
163. Advanced Theory.
Not offered in 1970-71.

History of Music
15. Introduction to the History of Music (I). Topics in music of the Middle
Ages and the Renaissance, with emphasis given to the analysis and performance
of selected compositions. This course is concerned with studying the relationship
of music to the art and thought of the times, and the function of music in the
Roman Catholic liturgy.
Prerequisite: Music 1 (or the equivalent).
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Swing.
16. Introduction to the History of Music (II). Topics in music of the 17th,
18th and 19th centuries.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Freeman.

154

MUSIC
22. Contemporary Music.
Not offered in 1970-71.
26. Instrumental Music of the 16th and 17th centuries. Development of the
fantasy, canzona, ricercare, suite, trio sonata and concerto grosso w ith partic­
ular emphasis on performance and the preparation of editions from original
sources.
Open to students with permission of the instructor.
The performance workshop held in connection w ith this course may be
taken for chamber music (Music 34) credit. Music 26 may be substituted for
Music 15 or 16 in the major program.
Fall semester. Mrs. Cunningham.
27. J. S. Bach. A study of representative compositions (including the Mass in
B minor and the Passion according to St. Matthew) coordinated w ith readings
in primary and secondary sources. A reading knowledge of German is desirable,
but not essential.
Open to students with permission of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Swing.
32. History of the String Quartet. This course traces the development of the
string quartet from the middle of the 18th century to the present through study
and (whenever possible) performance of selected works.
Open to students with permission of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Swing.
40. Analysis, Research, Performance. An examination of the relevances of
analytical and historical research to intelligent performance through study of
selected compositions. Ability to perform instrumentally or vocally is required,
though it need not have reached an exceptionally skilled level.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Freeman.
42. Lieder. A study, through performance and analysis, of various solutions
by various composers to the problems of relating text and music. Students
should be moderately proficient either as singers or as pianists. A knowledge of
German is required.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Freeman.
70. Senior Reading and Research.
Staff.
71-72. Senior Thesis.
Fall and spring semesters.
H

onors

Sem

Staff.

in ars

101. The Sixteenth Century Parody Mass. An investigation of parody as a
concept and as a technique of composition, giving particular attention to Masses
by different composers on the same model.
Offered in 1971-72. Mr. Swing.
103. Early Nineteenth Century Romanticism. A study of the origins and
rationale of musical Romanticism in the first half of the nineteenth century.
A reading knowledge of French or German will be very helpful.
Spring semester. Mr. Freeman.

155

MUSI C
171. Senior Thesis.
Fall and spring semesters.
191. Tutorial.
Staff.
P

Staff.

erformance

n o t e : All performance courses are for half-course credit per semester. See
p. 62 and p. 153 for general provisions governing work in performance under
the provisions for Creative Arts.
34. Performance (chamber music).
Both semesters. Mr. Kalish, Mr. Zukofsky and staff.
35. Performance (orchestra).
Both semesters. Mr. Freeman.
36. Performance (chorus).
Both semesters. Mr. Korn.
37. Individual Instruction.
Both semesters.
39. Figured Bass and Score Reading.
Both semesters. Mr. Smart.

PHILOSOPHY
JOHN M. MOORE, Professor
DANIEL BENNETT, Associate Professor
HANS OBERDIEK, Assistant Professor
CHARLES RAFF, Assistant Professor
RICHARD SCHULDENFREI, Assistant Professort
RICHARD SHARVY, Assistant Professor
UWE HENKE, Instructor
JOHN DOLAN, Visiting Lecturer
GILMORE STOTT, Lecturer
The study of philosophy consists in attempts to resolve problems that arise
when one reflects on scientific and common-sense views of man and the world;
the varieties of human experience; the extent and nature of human knowledge;
and certain social, political and moral questions which are of current concern.
Completion of two semester courses in philosophy is normally requisite for ad­
mission to the department as a major in Course or Honors. Philosophy majors are
normally required to complete at least one course or its equivalent in the fields
of Logic, History of Ancient and Modem Philosophy, and Moral or Social
Philosophy. In addition, philosophy majors normally are required to elect course
52 in their senior year. Majors are encouraged to submit a thesis.
1. Introduction to Philosophy. Methods of philosophical investigation are in­
troduced through discussion of typical philosophical problems, such as: the
problem of freedom, the arguments for the existence of God, the nature of logic
and mathematics, the sources and limits of human knowledge, the justification
of moral judgments. Readings include classical and current sources.
Introduction to Philosophy is a prerequisite for all other philosophy courses
except Logic.
Each semester. The staff.
^Absent on leave, 1970-71.

156

PHILOSOPHY
1A. Freshman Seminar. A seminar open only to freshmen, an alternative to
Philosophy 1. Limited enrollment. For description see Philosophy 1.
Spring semester. Mr. Stott.
10. The Nature and Methods of Inquiry. From the perspectives of their
fields the instructors in this course will explain and critically examine the
methodological foundations of the various disciplines they represent. At the
same time an attempt will be made to compare and relate methodology and
substantive problems of different disciplines with the goal of arriving at a
coherent view of scientific inquiry. The emphasis given to different disciplines
will vary depending on the composition of the staff. The course is given for
half credit.
Each semester. Interdepartmental staff.
11. Ethics. A study of the principal theories about value and moral obligation,
and of their justification. The emphasis is systematic, but works of leading
ethical philosophers, both classical and contemporary, will be read as illustra­
tions of the major theories.
Each semester. Mr. Oberdiek or Mr. Stott.
12. Logic. An introduction to the principles of deductive logic w ith equal
emphasis on the syntactic and semantic aspects of logical systems. Topics in­
clude the notions of logical truth, logical consequence, and proof. Some attention
is given to the development of axiomatic theories and selected topics in the
philosophy of logic.
Fall semester. Mr. Dolan.
13. Selected Modem Philosophers. A history of modem philosophy is pre­
sented through the metaphysical and epistemological problems common to
Descartes, Leibniz, Spinoza, Locke, Berkeley, Hume and Kant. One or more of
these philosophers may be selected for separate, detailed examination.
Spring semester.
14. Ancient Philosophy. The analysis of selected topics in Plato and Aris­
totle. Primary attention is given to problems in epistemology and metaphysics.
Spring semester. Mr. Sharvy.
15. Philosophy of Science. The focus of the course is on recent systematic
attempts to solve certain major and related problems concerning science. Among
these problems are distinguishing scientific from non-scientific bases for the ac­
ceptance or rejection of claims, determining the proper field for scientific in­
quiry, and determining the foundation of scientific knowledge.
16. Philosophy of Religion. The nature of religion; the psychology and in­
terpretation of religious experience; the problem of religious knowledge; the
validity and difficulties of Christian theology and ethics. (Also listed as Religion
16.)

Spring semester.

Mr. Bennett.

17. Aesthetics. A study of some problems that arise in describing, interpret­
ing, and evaluating aesthetic objects, including literature, music and fine arts.
Among these problems are the clarification of such terms as “form,” “style,”
and “meaning,” an examination of current attempts to subsume aesthetic ob­
jects under the general theory of signs, and the analysis of the reasoning by
which value judgments about aesthetic objects are supported and defended.
18. Philosophy of the Social Sciences. Philosophical problems that arise in
the application of scientific methods to human behavior; i.e., problems concern-

157

PHILOSOPHY
mg concepts, laws, theories, values, explanation and prediction in the social
sciences and history; and the differences and similarities between social and
natural science.
Spring semester.
19. Medieval Philosophy. See Religion 19.
Fall semester. Mr. Urban.
20. Existentialism and Religious Belief. See Religion 20.
Fall semester. Mr. Urban.
21. Social and Political Philosophy. An analysis of conceptual and moral
problems that socio-political life poses for many. Among the problems studied
are the relation of ethics to political/social philosophy; the justification of
democracy; the nature and basis of political obligation, political freedom,
equality, rights, justice, and social institutions.
Fall semester. Mr. Bennett.
22. Philosophy in America. A critical examination of thinkers representative
of the major philosophic traditions in America, with special emphasis on Peirce,
James, and Dewey. The primary aim is to understand and evaluate the philo­
sophic worth of their views; some attention is also given to their relation to
American culture.
23. Contemporary Philosophy. A study of current attempts to resolve funda­
mental philosophical issues. Readings include articles and books by major 20th
century philosophers, such as G. E. Moore, Bertrand Russell, and Ludwig
Wittgenstein.
Fall semester. Mr. Raff.
24. Theory of Knowledge. Current epistemological issues and some meta­
physical issues which underlie them are treated in detail. Readings include
classical and current sources.
25. Advanced Logic. Topics include selected problems in deductive logic,
detailed development of principles of inductive logic and the logic of decision.
26. Philosophy of Language. Topics include the role of investigation of
natural and artificial languages in the solution of philosophical problems; inves­
tigation into the conceptual framework necessary to any adequate theory of
ordinary language; relationships between natural and formal languages; recent
attempts to found linguistics on a scientific basis.
Spring semester.
27. Metaphysics. This course will examine such topics as Universal and
Particular, Abstract and Concrete, Essence and Accident, Physical Object and
Event, Space, Time and Causation, etc.; and their relations to topics in the
theory of knowledge and theory of language.
Philosophy 12 recommended.
Fall semester. Mr. Bennett.
28. Marxist Philosophy. An introduction to the philosophy of Marx, Engels
and Lenin. Based on the major writings of these philosophers, the course will
begin with a systematic exposition of the fundamental concepts of Marxist
social, economic and political theory. Then, in keeping with Marx’s conception
of the intimate connection between social analysis and social philosophy, an
attempt will be made to deepen the understanding of certain theoretical concepts
(alienation, consciousness, etc.) by applying them in the analysis of selected
contemporary social problems.
Fall semester. Mr. Henke.

158

PHILOSOPHY
29. Philosophy of Mind. Concepts of mind will be explored with special
attention given to the mind-body problem and the nature of motive, intention,
and human action.
Fall semester. Mr. Oberdiek.
30. The Philosophy of Education. The idea of education in philosophy, and
the implications of philosophical and psychological theories for educational
practice. Readings may include: Plato, Rousseau, Kant, Tolstoy, Dewey, James,
Whitehead, Montessori, Skinner, Piaget, Neill, Laing, and McLuhan.
Fall semester. Mr. Bennett and Mr. Bernheim.
31. Religion and Ethics.

(See Religion 31.)

50. Directed Reading.
Each semester. The staff.
51. Thesis.
Each semester.

The staff.

52. Senior Conference.
Spring semester.

H onors S e mi nar s
101. Moral Philosophy. An examination of the principal theories about value
and moral obligation, and of their justification; of the concepts of justice and
human rights; of the implications for ethics of different theories about the free­
dom of the will. Works of representative theorists, both classical and con­
temporary, will be read.
Fall semester. Mr. Oberdiek.
102. Ancient Philosophy. The development of Greek thought in ethics, meta­
physics, logic and science, with special attention to Plato and Aristotle. Empha­
sis is given to tracing the emergence of distinctively philosophical and scientific
methods, and the relation of these methods to contemporary techniques.
103. Modern Philosophy. Metaphysical and epistemological problems about
the nature of minds and bodies, the varieties of knowledge and freedom, are ap­
proached through the philosophical systems of Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz,
Locke, Berkeley, Hume, Reid, Kant.
Fall semester. Mr. Raff.
104. Contemporary Philosophy. Some current philosophical problems are in­
vestigated in light of the work of Bradley, Moore, Wittgenstein, and the most
recent contributions.
Spring semester.
105. Philosophy of Science. A consideration of the nature of scientific in­
quiry through a study of its fundamental concepts, among them theory, evidence,
explanation, causation, induction. Emphasis will also be given to the distinc­
tions between empirical and non-empirical science and between scientific and
non-scientific inquiry.
106. Aesthetics. A systematic examination of the philosophy of art and the
methodological foundations of criticism. (See Course 17). Recommended for
students of literature, music and the fine arts.
107. Philosophy of the Social Sciences. Philosophical problems that arise in
the application of scientific methods to human behavior (see Course 18). The
discussion will focus on the nature of human action.

159

PHILOSOPHY
108A. Symbolic Logic. An examination of symbolic logic as (1) the theory of
inference, (2) a tool of analysis, and (3) a foundation for mathematics. Empha­
sis will be placed on the fundamental concepts (e.g., the axiomatic method,
consistency, decidability), major theorems (completeness and incompleteness),
and problems of the foundation of logic.
(Note: Students who have taken 108B may not take this seminar.)
Fall semester. Mr. Henke.
108B. Foundations and Philosophy of Mathematics. This seminar will begin
with a brief survey of the major results in foundations of mathematics: axiomatic
development of symbolic logic and set theory, Godel incompleteness theorem,
consistency and independence of the axiom of choice and the continuum hypoth­
esis. This will be followed by a comparison of the logicist, formalist and intuitionist views of the foundations of mathematics.
(Note: This seminar is offered jointly by the Departments of Philosophy and
Mathematics. Students who have taken 108A may not take this seminar.)
Prerequisites: one course in philosophy and Mathematics 24 or equivalent work
w ith axiomatic mathematics.
Mr. Henke and Mr. di Franco.
109. Metaphysics. The logical analysis of problems and theories about time,
change, form, matter, essence, substance, identity and universals. Readings from
such philosophers as Aristotle, Leibniz, McTaggart, Russell and Quine.
Fall semester. Mr. Sharvy.
110. Medieval Philosophy. See Religion 110.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Urban.
111. Philosophy of Religion. Current techniques of philosophical analysis are
brought to bear on the philosophical issues raised by religious belief and experi­
ence.
Spring semester. Mr. Bennett.
112. Philosophy of Mind. The nature and variety of experience is examined
w ith an end to discovering w hat is peculiar to human experience and to the
objects of human experience, the nature of judgment and of persons, the rela­
tions between minds and bodies.
113. Epistemology. The seminar will concern itself primarily w ith the prob­
lem of the sources of knowledge and the problem of justifying belief.
114. Hegel.
Mr. Bennett.
120. Thesis. A thesis may be submitted by majors in the department in place
of one Honors paper, upon application by the student and at the discretion of
the department.

160

PH YSICAL E D U C A T IO N
FOR MEN
WILLIS J. STETSON, Professor of Physical Education
for Men and Director of Athletics
LEWIS H. ELVERSON, Associate Professor
ERNEST J. PRUDENTE, Associate Professor
WILLIAM C. B. CULLEN, Assistant Professor
GOMER DAVIES, Assistant Professor
DOUGLAS M. WEISS, Instructor
BROOKE P. COTTMAN, Assistant
JACK HOUTZ, Assistant
JAMES J. McADOO, Assistant
ROBERT McCOACH, Assistant
JAMES W. NOYES, Assistant
C. J. STEFANOWICZ, Assistant
EDWARD TOWNSLEY, Assistant
JOHN P. UDOVICH, Assistant
ANDREW J. ZACHORCHEMNY, Assistant
DR. MORRIS A. BOWIE, College Physician
DR. HAROLD C. ROXBY, Team Physician
The course in Men’s Physical Education is designed to promote an aware­
ness of one’s physical well being through a regular exercise program. In addi­
tion, the learning of new sports skills and the improvement of previously
learned ones is achieved by planned instructional opportunities. Emphasis is
placed on the individual, or so-called “carry-over” sports, as well as those
involving a team effort.
The intercollegiate athletic program is a comprehensive one with varsity
schedules in eleven different sports. In many of these activities there are contests
arranged for junior varsity teams, thus providing ample opportunity for large
numbers of men to engage in intercollegiate competition.

F aculty R e q u i r e m e nt s
Physical Education is required of all non-veteran freshmen and sophomores
unless excused by the College physician. By meeting certain minimum objec­
tives, one may be exempted from the program after satisfactorily completing
one year’s work. During participation in the program men students must
participate in their assigned activity a minimum of three hours per week.
All men not excused for medical or other reasons are expected to fulfill this
requirement. A semester’s work failed in the first two years must be repeated in
the Junior year. No man with a deficiency in physical education is permitted to
enter his Senior year.

F all A ct i vi ti es
Adapted Physical Education
t Aquatics
t Archery
Badminton

*Cross Country
tF olk Dance
‘ Football
tG olf

t Modern Dance
“ Soccer
t Tennis
Touch Football

* Intercollegiate competition only.
** Intercollegiate competition and course instruction,
t Some co-ed sections.

161

P H Y S I C A L E D U C A T I O N F O R MEN
i n t e r I a n d II A c t i v i t i e s
Adapted Physical Education
tF olk Dance
t Aquatics
t Modern Dance
t Badminton
Squash
**Basketball
’ Swimming

W

Spring A

tTennis
tVolleyball
Weight Training
’ ’Wrestling

ctiv ities

Adapted Physical Education
tAquatics
’ Baseball
” tG olf

’ Lacrosse
tM odem Dance
Softball
’ ’ tTennis

’ ’ Track
tVolleyball

PH YSICAL ED U C A T IO N
FOR WOMEN
ELEANOR K. HESS, Chairman and Associate Professor
IRENE MOLL, Associate Professor
MARY ANN YOUNG, Assistant Professor
PATRICIA BOYER, Lecturer
JANICE FELLMAN, Lecturer
DR. MORRIS A. BOWIE, College Physician
The aim of the Department is to contribute to the education of all women
students through the medium of physical activity. We believe this contribution
can best be achieved through participation in a broad program of sports, dance
and developmental activities. The program provides: instruction and experience
in sports and dancing; swimming instruction on all levels; corrective and devel­
opmental exercises. It is our hope that the student will also acquire: apprecia­
tion of the dance as an art form; good sportsmanship; added endurance; good
posture; leadership training; joy in outdoor exercise; and a program of interests
and skills that will carry over for her after college, so she may become a useful
part of her community.
Classes are kept small to insure individual attention, and students are grouped
where possible according to ability. Ample opportunities are given for intra­
mural and intercollegiate competition, as well as for public performances and
demonstrations.
Freshmen and sophomores take three periods of activity each week. These
may be elected from classes listed below with the stipulation that they take
swimming for a maximum of one semester if they fail to pass the swimming
test. In the sophomore year, the department encourages the students to develop
greater initiative in planning their own programs of physical activity by grant­
ing greater freedom in the fulfillment of the requirement through a variety of
programs worked out by the student and the department. After a minimum
period of instruction, a student may apply for exemption from the required
program and may be exempted if she successfully passes a series of tests
administered by the department.
In addition to the departmental requirements, the faculty regulations state the
following: “ If any semester’s work of the first two years is failed, it shall be
repeated in the junior year. No student shall be permitted to enter her senior year
with a deficiency in physical education.”
Regulation costumes should be ordered before college opens. Blanks for this
purpose will be sent out from the Office of the Dean to all incoming students.•*
• Intercollegiate competition only.
** Intercollegiate competition and course instruction,
t Some co-ed sections.

162

PHYSICAL EDUCATION FOR WOMEN
A

ctiv ities

Archery.*
Fall and Spring. Class and Varsity.
Badminton.
Winter. Class and Varsity.
Basketball.
Winter. Class and Varsity.
Bowling.
Winter. Class.
Conditioning Exercises.
Fall, W inter and Spring.
Fencing.
Winter.
Folk and Square Dancing.*
Fall, W inter and Spring. Class and Performance Group.
Golf.*
Fall and Spring.

Class.

Hockey.
Fall. Class and Varsity,
logging.
Lacrosse.
Spring. Class and Varsity.
Modern Dance.*
Fall, W inter and Spring.

Class and Performance Group.

Dance Composition.

Self-Defense.
Soccer.
Winter.

Class.

Softball.
Spring. Class and Varsity.
Squash.
Swimming. Beginning, intermediate and advanced classes in strokes and div­
ing. Class and Varsity.
American Red Cross Life Saving and Water Safety. (Upon successful comple­
tion of these courses, American Red Cross certificates will be awarded.)
Fall, W inter and Spring.
Tennis.
Fall, Winter and Spring.
Volleyball.*
Fall and Winter.

Class and Varsity.

Class and Varsity.

Water Ballet.*
Fall. Class and Performance Group.*
* Co-ed classes.

163

PHYSICS
OLEXA-MYRON BILANIUK, Professor
WILLIAM C. ELMORE, Professor
MARK A. HEALD, Professor and Chairman
PAUL C. MANGELSDORF, ]R., Professor
ALBURT M. ROSENBERG, Associate Professor
JOHN R. BOCCIO, Assistant Professort
CYRUS D. CANTRELL, Assistant Professort
The physics department, through its introductory course in general physics,
endeavors to give an integrated account of basic physics. In this course, as well
as in the advanced work of the department, emphasis is placed on quantitative,
analytical reasoning, as distinct from the mere acquisition of facts and skills. The
introductory course makes no pretense of covering all material of interest to
physicists, but rather comprises a selection of topics which form a coherent
group.
Advanced work in the department involves a more intensive study of topics
covered at the introductory level, and of many phases of modern physics which
require a considerable background in mathematics and electricity. In all courses
and seminars particular importance is attached to laboratory work, since physics
is primarily an experimental science. Honors candidates taking physics seminars
accompanied by experimental work must submit their laboratory notebooks to
the visiting examiners for their inspection.
In addition to curricular work, students are encouraged to pursue research
projects in consultation with members of the faculty. Good shop facilities, a
wide range of electronic instrumentation, and the Computer Center are available
in support of independent work. The Department holds research colloquia
jointly w ith the Bartol Research Foundation, which is located on the Swarthmore campus and which offers a Ph.D. program in physics through an affiliation
with Thomas Jefferson University (see p. 68). In special cases Swarthmore stu­
dents may take graduate courses at Bartol or at the University of Pennsylvania.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

R

eco m m en d a tio n s

Students who intend to major in physics normally take Physics 1,2 and Chem­
istry 3, 4 in the freshman year and Physics 11, 12 in the sophomore year. In
addition they should complete Mathematics 12 by the end of their sophomore
year. In view of graduate school requirements and of the extensive literature of
physics in French, German and Russian, it is strongly recommended that the stu­
dent fulfill his language requirement in one of these languages. Satisfactory
work in Physics 1, 2 or its equivalent is prerequisite for all further work in the
department, and Chemistry 2 or 4 is a prerequisite for Physics 112 and 114.
Honors students majoring in physics normally take Physics 102, 106, 112, in
that order, and Mathematics 51, 52, and 104. Physics 114 or a second mathe­
matics seminar is encouraged but not required. Other seminars and courses in
the program may be chosen to meet the interests of the student. Normally a stu­
dent will present four papers in physics and two in mathematics to the visiting
examiners. Such a program is a particularly satisfactory way of preparing for
graduate or other professional work in physics or mathematics. However, it
constitutes in itself an effective educational program, since the aim throughout
is to achieve an understanding of fundamental ideas and concepts, as distinct
from the mastery of information, skills, and techniques in a limited segment of
science. Honors students minoring in physics may prepare for examinations by
taking Physics 11,12, as well as by one or more seminars.
Course students majoring in physics normally complete the following courses
in their junior and senior years: Mathematics 51, 52; Chemistry 61, 62; and
t Absent on leave, 1970-71.

164

PHYSICS
Physics 51, 52, 54, 71, 72. It is recommended that Physics 60 or additional work
in engineering or chemistry be included in the program of Course students who
intend to do graduate work in physics. This program provides a well-rounded
study of physics, and by requiring less intensive concentration than an Honors
program offers the student the opportunity to extend his work outside the Divi­
sion of the Natural Sciences. It should also meet the needs of those who wish
to teach science in secondary school.
Secondary school students who are considering majoring in physics at Swarthmore are strongly encouraged to complete four years of mathematics and a
minimum of two years of either French or Russian, or German if neither of these
is available.
I , 2. General Physics. An introductory course in basic physics. During the
first semester special emphasis is placed on mechanics, conservation principles,
harmonic motion, wave motion and heat. During the second semester the topics
include basic concepts in electricity and magnetism, direct current circuits, al­
ternating current circuits, optics and modern physics. This course, or its equiva­
lent, must precede any advanced courses or seminars in physics. It is required of
most science majors. Three lectures, a conference, and a laboratory period
weekly. The introductory course can be supplemented by directed reading in
current topics. Entering freshmen who may be qualified for advanced placement
should see the department chairman.
Prerequisite: First year mathematics taken concurrently, or adequate prepara­
tion in mathematics.
Mr. Bilaniuk, Mr. Heald, and Staff.
6. Principles of the Earth Sciences. An analysis of the forces shaping our
physical environment, drawing on the fields of geology, geophysics, meteorology
and oceanography. Recent developments in these fields are emphasized with
readings and discussion based on current literature. The underlying physical and
chemical principles are stressed. One or more field trips. No special scientific
background required.
Fall semester. Mr. Mangelsdorf.
7,8. Concepts and Theories in Physical Science. The first semester consists
in an analysis of motion leading to the Newtonian synthesis, the conservation
laws of physics, the development of an atomic theory of matter, the periodic
table of elements, and the kinetic theory of gases. The second semester considers
the evolution of modern physics: physical properties of light, aspects of rela­
tivity, the wave versus the quantum theory of light, certain electrical phenomena,
atomicity of charge, Bohr’s model of the atom, radioactivity, elementary parti­
cles, the nuclear atom and nuclear energy, stellar energy.
This course is designed as a terminal course in physical science to meet the
needs of non-science majors and fulfills the group 1 distribution requirement. It
is not intended to fulfill the physics requirement of medical schools, and cannot
be used as a prerequisite for further work in the Division of the Natural Sciences.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory per week.
Mr. Rosenberg.
10. Topics in Biophysics. Applications of physical tools and analysis to liv­
ing systems. Emphasis is at the subcellular level of integration. The course is
intended for physical science, mathematics, and engineering students. Previous
biological training is not required. Three lectures per week. In lieu of laboratory
work, visits will be made to nearby biophysical laboratories.
Spring semester. Mr. Rosenberg.
I I , 12. Mechanics and Wave Motion. Particle and rigid body mechanics with
an introduction to advanced dynamics. Elastic waves and wave motion. Inter­

165

PHYSICS
ference and diffraction phenomena. Considerable emphasis is placed on labora­
tory work, both to illuminate and extend the subject matter, and to foster the
students’ ability to work independently. Three lectures and a laboratory period
weekly. This course may be taken by Honors students with a minor in physics
in preparation for an Honors examination.
Prerequisite: Second-year mathematics taken concurrently.
Mr. Elmore and Mr. Mangelsdorf.
51. Modern Physics I. A selection of topics including' the special theory of
relativity, and atomic, nuclear, and particle physics. Three lectures and one
laboratory period weekly. Open to seniors only.
Prerequisite: Second-year mathematics and consent of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71.
52. Modern Physics II. Quantum mechanics and solid-state physics.
Three lectures and one laboratory period weekly.
Prerequisite: Physics 51 and/or Engineering 61.
Not offered in 1970-71.
54. Thermal Physics. Continuum properties of matter and of thermal energy.
Thermodynamics and statistical mechanics of mechanical, chemical, electrical
and magnetic systems. Entropy, fluctuation theory, irreversible thermodynamics.
Brownian motion, diffusion theory, transport processes. Three lectures and one
conference section weekly.
Prerequisite: Second-year mathematics.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Mangelsdorf.
60. Special Project. Laboratory work directed toward the acquisition of
knowledge and skills that will be useful in future research. The project ordinarily
involves development of apparatus and the performance of an experiment of
contemporary significance in physics. An oral and written report will be pre­
sented to the instructor.
61. Directed Reading. This course is to provide an opportunity for individual
students to do special w ork in fields not covered by the undergraduate courses
listed above. Weekly topics and problems will be assigned, and the student will
present oral and written reports to the instructor.
Staff.
62. Introduction to Oceanography. The theory and practice of modern
marine sciences. Topics to be covered include physical oceanography and meas­
urement techniques, the dynamics of rotating stratified fluids, air-sea interac­
tion, coastal and estuarine processes, the ocean as a biological habitat, and the
energy, mass, and chemical budgets of the oceans. This course is intended to
enable the student to follow current literature in marine sciences. Exercises on
the computer and a field trip.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 51 or consent of the instructor.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Mangelsdorf.
71. Circuit Theory. Transient and steady-state analysis of electric circuits and
networks with emphasis on Laplace and Fourier methods and s-plane interpre­
tation. Network topology, equilibrium equations, theorems, network functions
and their properties. Energy in electric networks. Introduction to synthesis.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Physics 12.
Not offered in 1970-71.
72. Electromagnetic Theory. Application of Maxwell’s equations. Macro­
scopic field treatment of magnetic, dielectric and conducting bodies. Forces,

166

PHYSICS
motion and energy storage. Field basis of circuit theory. Electromagnetic waves;
wave-guides, transmission lines and antennas.
Three class periods and a laboratory each week.
Prerequisite: Physics 12.
Not offered in 1970-71.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

102. Electricity and Magnetism. Classical electrodynamics, covering static
and dynamic electricity, magnetism and electromagnetism, with some electronics.
Laboratory measurements in direct and alternating currents and in magnetism,
together with fundamental experiments in electronics.
Prerequisites: Second-year mathematics, and Physics 11,12.
Fall semester. Mr. Heald.
106. Atomic and Nuclear Physics. Special theory of relativity. Wave-particle
duality. Introduction to wave mechanics, the hydrogen atom, structure and
spectra of many-electron atoms. Elements of solid state physics. Properties and
systematics of nuclei, nuclear reactions, nuclear forces and models. Introduction
to fundamental particles, their symmetries and interactions. The accompanying
laboratory includes basic experiments in atomic and nuclear physics.
Prerequisite: Physics 102, or equivalent preparation in the Honors program
in Engineering Sciences.
Spring semester. Mr. Elmore.
112. Radiation and Statistical Physics. Free and guided electromagnetic
waves, with particular emphasis on waves in the microwave, optical, and
X-ray regions. The velocity of electromagnetic waves and the four-vector formu­
lation of the special theory of relativity. Thermodynamics and statistical me­
chanics. Thermal radiation, and quantum statistics with applications. Ac­
companied by experimental projects.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 or 4, and Physics 106.
Fall semester. Mr. Mangelsdorf.
114. Quantum Mechanics. Advanced classical dynamics. Classical vs. quan­
tum physics, correspondence principle. Heisenberg’s and Schrodinger s ver­
sions of quantum mechanics. Observables and quantum mechanical operators.
Eigenfunctions and eigenvalues. Approximation methods. Identical particles
and spin. Scattering and the Bom approximation. Quantum mechanics of the
nucleon-nucleon interaction and nuclear structure. Accompanying laboratory
emphasizes theoretical interpretation of the data.
Prerequisite: Physics 112.
Spring semester. Mr. Bilaniuk.

P O L IT IC A L SCIENCE
CHARLES E. GILBERT, Professor
J. ROLAND PENNOCK, Professort
DAVID G. SMITH, Professor and Chairman
CLEMENT COTTINGHAM, JR., Assistant Professor
RAYMOND F. HOPKINS, Assistant Professort
ROBERT O. KEOHANE, Assistant Professor
HARRY HARDING, JR., Instructor
PAUL LUTZKER, Instructor
NANNERL O. HENRY, Lecturer
Courses and seminars offered by the Political Science Department deal with
the place of politics in society and contribute to an understanding of the purt Absent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71.
{Absent on leave, 1970-71.

167

PO L IT IC A L SCIENCE
poses, organization, and operation of political institutions, domestic and inter­
national. For the beginning student, the department offers courses dealing
generally with the basic concepts of political science and the processes of
politics as illustrated by case studies, by theoretical analysis, and by more
extended study of the elements of politics in various institutional settings. In
appropriate places throughout the curriculum, attention is focused on problems
of change (evolutionary and revolutionary), freedom and authority, w ar and
peace—and on the development of political institutions that are responsive to
the needs of our day. Courses are provided that give special attention to
political theory, comparative political systems, political development, politics
and government in the United States, and international relations.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

R

eco m m en d a tio n s

Students planning to study political science are strongly advised to start with
Elements of Politics (Political Science 1), and to continue with one or more
of the other introductory level courses, Policy-Making in America (Political
Science 2), Comparative Politics (Political Science 3), International Politics
(Political Science 4). Any one of these courses may be taken without pre­
requisite and as a terminal course. Normally any two of these courses, pre­
ferably including Political Science 1, constitute the prerequisite for further
work in the department. Students who intend to major in political science
should begin their work in the freshman year if possible. Political Theory,
either in seminar for Honors students, or in course (Political Science 54) for
Course students, is required of all majors. Course majors must take Political
Science 60.
P

rogram in

I

n tern a tio n a l

R

elation s

Students who plan to enter upon a career in the field of international relations
should include in their programs, during the first two years, introductory
courses in economics, history, and political science and should complete the in­
termediate course in one or more modern languages.
Advanced courses selected from the groups listed below may be incorporated
in the programs of students who do their major work in economics, history,
political science, or a modern language.
Those students who wish to concentrate in international relations may take
their Senior Comprehensive Examination in this field. Students preparing for
this examination should take eight, nine, or ten courses from among those listed
below, including all of those listed in Group I, one or more in Group II, and
one or more in Group III. A thesis or other form of independent work is
strongly recommended. The examination is administered by a committee ap­
pointed by the chairmen of the Departments of Economics, History, and Political
Science, under the chairmanship of the Department of Political Science.
Group I
Political Science 4— International Politics
Political Science 13—International Law and Organization
Political Science 14— American Foreign Policy
Political Science 63—Advanced International Politics
Economics 60—International Economics

168

POLITICAL SCIENCE
Group II
History 8—Africa
History 25—Modern Russia
History 30—American Diplomatic History
History 42—The Expansion of Europe
History 44—Modern China
History 45—Modern Japan
History 46—Asian Nationalisms
History 48—Latin America
Group III
Economics 11—Economic Development
Economics 61—Comparative Economic Systems
Political Science 3—Comparative Politics
Political Science 18—Politics of Developing Nations
Political Science 19—Comparative Communist Politics
Political Science 20—Politics of East Asia
Political Science 21—Politics of Africa
Political Science 55—Modern Political Theory
Political Science 64— Topics in International Relations
Economics 65—Political Economy of Multinational Enterprises
Students who plan to enter the Honors program will find it possible to select a
similar combination of courses and seminars in the field of international rela­
tions. In planning such programs, they should consult with the chairman of
their prospective major department.
1. Elements of Politics. Using materials particularly from the United States
and the Soviet Union, but drawing also on experiences of other societies, this
course asks: Who governs? How? Under w hat constraints? It therefore in­
volves a study of the basic institutions, concepts and moving forces of politics.
Through the use of readings from contemporary political scientists, it also
presents an introduction to the analytical tools and methods of the discipline.
Normative problems of freedom and authority, equality and inequality, obliga­
tion and protest, are considered in conjunction with the study of political forces
and institutions.
Fall semester. Staff.
2. Policy-Making in America. Consideration of basic elements of American
national politics, and of ways of defining and explaining the functions and re­
sults of American politics. Major attention will be devoted to electoral organ­
izations, voting behavior and opinion formation, legislation and presidential
leadership.
Spring semester. Mr. Lutzker.
3. Comparative Politics. An introduction to the theory of comparative poli­
tics, and to the data used in comparing political systems. Major attention will be
given to Great Britain, India, France, and the USSR. The course will focus on
political culture, the party system, and the legislative and executive institutions
of the central government.
Spring semester. Mrs. Henry.
4. International Politics. An introduction to the analysis of the contemporary
international system and its evolution since 1945. The course will consider the
foreign policies of major powers and their interaction, contemporary forces in­

169

POLITICAL

SCIENCE

fluencing the nature of international relations, and the role of ideologies. Various
approaches to world order, such as diplomacy, collective security, disarmament
and world government will be considered.
Spring semester. Staff.
11. Problems in Community Government. The social, economic, and legal
setting of local government. Politics and administration at state and local levels.
Problems of federalism and metropolitan areas. The course emphasizes special
research projects, such as field work in nearby communities.
Spring semester. Mr. Cottingham.
13. International Law and Organization. An analysis of international law and
organization in the context of the international political system. Special atten­
tion will be given to the political process of the United Nations and to its
accomplishments, limitations, and prospects. The course will also consider the
relations between international politics and international law, and the theory
and practice of regionalism.
Alternate years, spring semester. Mr. Keohane.
14. American Foreign Policy. The problem of defining the objectives of
American foreign policy and of selecting the means for achieving them; past,
present and suggested American strategies in world politics; the influence of
internal and external conditions on the making of foreign policy; the effects of
American policies in crucial areas of the world.
Alternate years, fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Keohane.
15. Legislative Behavior. An analysis of the various forces that shape the
results of the legislative process and the behavior of individual legislators.
The influence of personality, constituency, party leadership, ideology, rules and
procedures, the committee system, the Executive Branch. The main focus will
be on the Congress, with some illustrative material from other legislative
bodies.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Lutzker.
18. Politics of Developing Nations. An examination of the concept of “poli­
tical modernization,” based on analyses of Turkey, Thailand, Nigeria, Mexico,
and the United States. The course will discuss the creation of a national
identity, problems of building political institutions, increasing participation in
the political process, patterns of allocation of political goods, leadership
strategies, and revolution.
Fall semester. Mr. Harding.
19. Comparative Communist Politics. A comparative study of the political
organization of the Soviet Union, China, and the Eastern European states, with
emphasis on the Party structure, state bureaucracy, policy formation, and politi­
cal communication.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
20. Politics of East Asia. A comparative analysis of politics in China and
Japan. Special emphasis will be placed on China: the Chinese Revolution,
ideology, policy-making, local politics, and the Cultural Revolution.
Spring semester. Mr. Harding.
21. Politics of Africa. The analysis of political processes in a variety of
African states, including a brief examination of traditional systems, the colonial
system and the rise of independence movements, and an analysis of contemporary
political patterns.
Fall semester. Mr. Cottingham.

170

POLITICAL SCIENCE
51. Public Administration. An analysis of policy-making and administration
in modem governments with illustrative material drawn chiefly from the na­
tional government of the United States and with particular reference to recent
developments. Problems of administrative organization, conduct of regulatory
and managerial activities, financial administration, personnel, public relations,
administrative law, politics and administration.
Open to juniors and seniors only, except by special arrangements.
Fall semester, alternate years. Mr. Smith.
52. American Constitutional Law. The role of the Supreme Court in the
American political system, viewed both historically and through analysis of
leading cases. Areas of Constitutional development emphasized are: the nature
and exercise of judicial review; federalism and the scope of national power;
civil liberties.
Open to sophomores and upperclassmen.
Spring semester. Mr. Smith.
53. American Party Politics. An historical and functional analysis of Ameri­
can political parties. The study of interest groups, public opinion and voting be­
havior, electoral systems and representation, the legislative process.
Alternate years, fall semester. Mr. Lutzker.
54. Political Theory: Plato to Montesquieu. The development of political
thought based on the work of the chief political philosophers from Plato to
Montesquieu. The course will consider classical, medieval, and early modern
theories concerning: the sources of authority and obedience; the origins and
functioning of the polity; the role of law in government; the relationship be­
tween the state and the individual; and the character of the good state.
Open to sophomores planning to take the “Modern and Analytical” version of
the Political Theory honors seminar; otherwise to juniors and seniors only, ex­
cept by special arrangement.
Fall semester. Mrs. Henry.
55. Modern Political Theory. A study of the development of liberalism,
socialism, democratic theory, and sociological theories of politics. The course
includes intensive reading of a few works by Rousseau and Marx plus discussion
of other such authors as Burke, Tocqueville, Mill, Lenin, and Weber. In a con­
cluding section, several contemporary democratic theories will be considered.
Spring semester. Mrs. Henry or Mr. Smith.
56. Jurisprudence. A study of the sources and nature of law; historical,
sociological and philosophical approach to legal theory; the nature of the
judicial process; key problems of jurisprudence illustrated by case study in se­
lected areas of American constitutional law.
Open to juniors and seniors only, except by special arrangement.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Pennock.
57. Problems of Democratic Theory. Individualistic, pluralistic, and “hol­
istic” approaches will be studied, including contemporary attacks upon liberal­
ism and pluralism. Democracy will be considered from the point of view of
justification theory, theories of requisites, and both normative and descriptive
operative theory.
Fall semester. Mr. Pennock.
59. Marxism. A study of Marxist political theory and philosophy. Primary
emphasis is placed on the works of Marx, Lenin, and Mao Tse-tung. In addition,

171

POLITICAL

SCIENCE

some attention is devoted to the background of Marxist thought as well as to
influential derivatives of Marxism other than Communism. Selected examples
of contemporary Marxist theory are also considered.
Half course, fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Smith.
60. Special Topics in Political Science. This course, conducted in seminar
fashion, is designed for senior majors. By means of papers and assigned readings
it covers aspects of political science not elsewhere intensively developed and
helps the students to integrate materials studied previously.
Spring semester. Mr. Lutzker.
62. Political Sociology. The relations of politics to basic social structures,
processes, and traditions. Study of problems, concepts, and theories about poli­
tics viewed as human behavior. The specific topics will vary from year to year.
Spring semester. Mr. Mueller.
63. Advanced International Politics. A theoretical approach to the abiding
and changing patterns of relations among states and the various factors that
affect them, drawing both on classical and contemporary writings. The con­
temporary international system will be subjected to a detailed analysis.
Prerequisite: Course 4 or the equivalent.
Alternate years, fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Keohane.
64. Topics in International Relations. An analysis of certain problems of in­
ternational relations chosen by the instructor. Possibilities include: comparative
foreign policy, war, international relations of developing nations, regionalism.
Prerequisite: Course 4 or the equivalent and Course 63.
Alternate years, spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Keohane.
65. Political Economy of Multinational Enterprises. This course will examine
the political and economic significance of multinational enterprises, which
have recently become increasingly important in the international economy.
Problems discussed will include those of efficiency of resource allocation, eco­
nomic and political concentration, distributive equity in the use of and pay­
ment for resources, and political relationships between host and investing
countries. The concepts of political and economic “imperialism” will be ex­
amined within a framework of modern economic and political analysis.
Students enrolling in this course should have some knowledge of economic
analysis and international politics, such as is provided in Economics 1-2A
and Political Science 4. Students without this background should consult the
instructors before enrolling.
Fall semester. Mr. Keohane and Mr. Ooms.
69. Directed Readings in Political Science. Available on an individual or
group basis, subject to the approval of the chairman and the instructor.
70-71. Colloquium. Staff.
72. Thesis. With the permission of the chairman and a supervising instructor,
any major in Course may substitute a thesis for one course, normally during either
semester of the senior year.
H

onors

Sem

in a rs

The following seminars prepare for examination for a degree with Honors:
101. (a) and (b) Political Theory. The nature of the state, the bases of
political obligation, sovereignty and the nature of law, liberty, equality, rights,
democracy, totalitarianism—all in the light of the theories set forth by writers

172

POLITICAL SCIENCE
on these subjects from Plato to the present. This seminar is given in two ver­
sions, one (101a) beginning with Plato and proceeding chronologically, and the
other (101b, designated “Modern and Analytical”) starting w ith Hobbes and
organized in more topical fashion. Considerable attention is given to modem
democratic theory. It is desirable but not required for students planning to take
101b to take Political Science 54 during their sophomore year.
Each semester. Mr. Pennock or Mr. Smith.
102. Politics and Legislation. The study of political parties, interest groups,
public opinion and voting behavior, electoral systems and representation, the
legislative process. Emphasis is on American politics, with some comparative
material; and, ultimately, on politics from the standpoint of theories of political
democracy.
Spring semester. Mr. Gilbert or Mr. Lutzker.
103. Problems in Government and Administration. Problems of administra­
tive organization, policy-making and responsibility, with primary reference to
the United States and to selected fields of policy.
Fall semester. Mr. Smith.
104. International Politics. An inquiry into the principles and problems of
international politics, this seminar will consider theories of international stability
and disorder, the relationship between foreign policies and the international
system, and approaches to international order such as diplomacy, international
law, and collective security. Basic to the analysis will be the question: w hat are
the causes of war and the conditions of peace?
Prerequisite: Course 4 or the equivalent.
Fall semester. Mr. Keohane.
105. American Foreign Policy. A study of key problems faced by the United
States in the modern world together with a detailed, critical investigation of the
making and implementing of American foreign policy. The changing assump­
tions of our policy and the political, economic, and social influences upon it will
be carefully considered.
Spring semester. Mr. Keohane.
106. Public Law and Jurisprudence. Sources and nature of law; historical,
sociological, philosophic, “realistic,” and behavioral approaches to law; key
problems of jurisprudence illustrated by the study of court cases, especially, but
not solely, from selected areas of public law.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Pennock.
107. Comparative Communist Politics. A comparative study of the political
organization of the Soviet Union, China, and the Eastern European states, with
emphasis on the Party structure, state bureaucracy, policy formation, and politi­
cal communication.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
108. Comparative Government. Advanced study of comparative government;
governmental structures and political processes largely as exemplified by se­
lected governments of Western and Eastern Europe; inquiries into common
problems, such as planning, defense, nationalization, and transnational political
movements.
Fall semester. Mrs. Henry.
109. Political Development. A comparative study of the politics of societies
undergoing change and modernization. Various theories, approaches, and meth­

173

PO LI TI CAL SCIENCE
ods of explanation are examined and considered in the context of states in Asia,
Africa, the Middle East and Latin America.
Spring semester. Mr. Harding.
110. Urban Sociology and Politics. The impact of urbanization on con­
temporary politics and social structure, from the perspectives of political science
and sociology. Emphasis will be placed on empirical study of selected problems
such as physical planning, social welfare, and political organization.
Fall semester. Mr. Gilbert and Mr. Van Til.
129. Thesis. Approval must be secured early in the student’s junior year.
All members of the department.

PSYCHOLOGY
DAVID ROSENHAN, Professort
HANS WALLACH, Professort
A. GORDON HAMMER, Visiting Professor***
SHEL FELDMAN, Associate Professor
KENNETH J. GERGEN, Associate Professor and Chairman
DEAN PEABODY, Associate Professor
JEFFREY TRAVERS, Assistant Professor
JOSEPH W. BERNHEIM, Instructor
MARY K. GERGEN, Research Associate
The w ork of the Department of Psychology deals with the scientific study of
human behavior and experience; the basic processes of perception, learning,
thinking and motivation, and consideration of their relation to development of
the individual personality; and the social relations of the individual to other per­
sons and to groups. For those students planning graduate and professional
work in psychology the courses and seminars of the department are designed to
provide a sound basis of understanding of psychological principles and a grasp
of research method. Other students learn the nature of psychological inquiry and
the psychological approach to various problems encountered in the humanities,
the social sciences and the life sciences.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

R

eco m m end a tio ns

The course Introduction to Psychology is normally required before advanced
work may be taken. However, students whose grades are generally in the honors
range and who have had significant background in either the natural or social
sciences may apply to individual instructors for entrance to courses beyond the
elementary level.
Majors should include advanced work in two areas of psychology: (a) basic
processes underlying human and animal behavior, such as perception, learning
and physiological psychology; (b) human behavior in its social context, such as
personality, child psychology, social psychology. Majors in Course should take
at least two courses and majors in Honors, at least one seminar from each area.
It is highly desirable for all majors to take at least one course providing them
with experience in basic research (e.g. Psychology 54 or 69). In addition, all
majors in Course are encouraged to enroll in Psychology 64 during the spring
semester of their senior year. This course is especially suited for preparation
for the comprehensive examinations.
tAbsent on leave, 1970-71.
**Fall semester, 1970-71.

174

PSYCHOLOGY
3. Introduction to Psychology. An introduction to the study of the behavior
and experience of the individual. The broader significance of psychology will be
emphasized.
Two lectures, plus conference hours to be arranged.
Fall semester. Staff.
11. Educational Psychology. Problems and issues in contemporary education
viewed in psychological context. Topics may include: curriculum development,
learning theory, discipline, motivation, testing and measurement, and socializa­
tion. Permission of instructor required.
Fall semester. Mr. Bernheim.
13. Statistics for Psychologists. See Math 1.
Fall semester.
14. Learning and Behavior Theory. The experimental analysis of the major
phenomena of learning and conditioning is studied mainly at the animal level.
Specific empirical and theoretical issues are considered in detail, and the major
theories are evaluated. The laboratory is designed to acquaint students with the
major processes considered.
Spring semester. Mr. Bernheim.
15. Child Psychology. Cognitive development, the socialization process, and
the influence of childrearing practices will be emphasized.
Spring semester. Mr. Travers.
36. Primate Social Behavior.
38. Abnormal Psychology. Several views of abnormality are considered, in­
cluding those that allow conceptions of normality. Biological and learned bases
of positive and negative abnormality are considered, along with various methods
of behavior modification and psychotherapy.
Fall semester. Mr. Hammer.
41. Comparative Psychology.
42. Physiological Psychology.
43. The Psychology of Communication. A study of the modes, processes,
and effects of inter-individual communication and of the problems of measuring
semantic meaning, the psychological aspects of language structure, and the
learning thereof.
45. Group Dynamics. The course will deal with the psychological aspects of
behavior in groups. Issues such as intimacy, solidarity, group problem solving,
leadership development, splinter-group formation, and phases of group develop­
ment will all receive attention. Classroom sessions will focus on the ongoing
behavior within the group itself. Outside reading and papers will be used to illu­
minate processes within the group and to raise significant theoretical problems.
(By application only.)
Fall semester. Mr. Gergen.
46. Cognitive Processes. Centers on those processes the individual uses to
understand the world. Emphasizes those processes used in dealing with people,
and their relation to those dealing with impersonal objects.
Fall semester. Mr. Peabody.
48. Intergroup Relations. An examination of factors that create strife and
conflict among persons, and conditions enhancing interpersonal tolerance and

175

PSYCHOLOGY
acceptance. Particular attention will be given to minority groups, race relations,
and communication between individuals of diverse backgrounds.
Fall semester. Mr. Peabody.
49. The Psychology of Language.
Spring semester. Mrs. Gleitman.

See Linguistics 2.

50. Perception. Laboratory section one afternoon per week to be arranged.
The major facts and some problems of visual perception are outlined and used
to acquaint the student with experimental research.
52. Human Learning and Thinking. An examination of the phenomena of
association, memory, problem solving, thinking and language.
54. Methods of Psychological Research. Discussion will focus on the rela­
tionships between given theories and the methods used in the supporting
research. The comparative advantages and disadvantages of participatory obser­
vation and analysis, “objective” naturalistic observation, interviewing, content
analysis, and experimentation will be examined. Particular attention will be
given to problems in sampling, measurement and scaling, reliability and validity,
and controls against artifacts and alternative explanations. Direct research
experience will complement classroom discussion.
Spring semester. Mr. Feldman.
56. Social Psychology. An examination of theory and research relevant to the
understanding of social interaction from a psychological viewpoint. Special em­
phasis will be placed on social perception and its distortion, attitude develop­
ment and change, conformity, the relationship of personality to social interac­
tion, and social motivation.
Spring semester. Mr. Travers, Mr. Peabody.
58. Personality. An examination of contrasting theories of the human per­
sonality. Theories of Freud, Jung, Lewin, Rogers and others will be discussed,
and special attention will be given to current empirical work.
Spring semester. Mr. Gergen.
61.

Psychological Anthropology.

See Sociology 63.

64. History and Systems of Psychology. Reading and discussion on a tutorial
basis intended to provide integration of different fields of psychology and to
help majors prepare for comprehensives. Historical treatment will concentrate
on the major systematic points of view. Special consideration will be given to
problems overlapping several areas of psychology.
Spring semester. Staff.
67. Social Psychology of Social Issues. A course in seminar format. Students
consider the scientific approach to issues of social significance. Areas such as
race relations, international conflict, poverty, urbanism, drugs, and revolution
may all be discussed. (Enrollment limited.)
68. Tutorial. Any student may, with the consent of a member of the Depart­
ment, work under a tutorial arrangement for a single semester. The student is
thus allowed to select a topic of particular interest to him, and in consultation
with a faculty member, prepare a reading list and work plan. Tutorial work
may include field experience outside Swarthmore.
Each semester. Staff.
69. Independent Research. Students conduct independent research projects.
They typically study problems with which they are already familiar from their

176

PSYCHOLOGY
course work. Students must submit a written report of their work. Registration
for Independent Research requires the sponsorship of a faculty member who
agrees to supervise the work.
Each semester. Staff.
n o t e : Under special circumstances, courses from other departments may be
counted toward a major in psychology, especially when such courses take a
distinct psychological orientation to the subject matter. Permission required.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

101. Perception. Reading and discussion combined with independent experi­
mental projects. The student is expected to know the basic facts about human
perceptual mechanisms, particularly visual ones, by the time he has completed
this seminar. Specific topics covered are: color vision, grouping and form, depth
and distance, size, visual motion, visual and auditory localization, recognition,
adaptation of perceptual functions. Scheduled laboratories are devoted to
demonstrations.
102. Learning and Behavior Theory- The major phenomena of learning and
conditioning—taken largely from the animal level—are discussed. An attempt is
made to systematize the experimental literature on each topic. The relationship
of motivational concepts to learning is discussed and the major theories of
learning and some recent mathematical theories are considered. The laboratory
acquaints students with problems and methods of experimentation in learning.
An opportunity for original research is provided.
Spring semester. Mr. Bernheim.
103. Abnormal Psychology. Two conceptions of abnormal behavior, the psy­
choanalytic and the social psychological, are examined, mainly from a develop­
mental point of view. Problems of state and trait, and of cognitive, affective, and
behavioral change are considered.
Fall semester. Mr. Hammer.
104. Individual in Society. The relationship between man and his society.
Basic processes including the understanding of other persons, theories of cogni­
tive consistency, group influence and conformity, the psychology of language.
Applications to political attitudes, group prejudice. The relation of attitudes and
personality. The relation of psychology to the social sciences.
Spring semester. Mr. Peabody.
105. Personality. A scrutiny of attempts to build an objective basis for “un­
derstanding the person as a whole.” Contrasting theoretical orientations, tech­
niques of observation, and specific problems will be examined. Theoretical
orientations: psychoanalysis, factor analysis, learning theory, phenomenology.
Observation techniques: interviews, questionnaires, fantasy material. Problems:
aggression, need achievement, prediction, psychotherapy, and psychological ma­
turity.
Spring semester. Mr. Gergen.
106. Child Development. The development of complex psychological proc­
esses in the individual will be studied. Problems of intellectual, linguistic, and
social development will be stressed.
Fall semester. Mr. Travers.

177

PSYCHOLOGY
106b. Cognitive Development. Problems in child development with special
emphasis on modes of thinking, language, and memory.
Fall semester. Mr. Feldman, Mrs. Gleitman, Mr. Travers.
107. Psycholinguistics and Communication. An intensive study of certain
communication processes and of the psychological aspects of human language.
Specific topics include: words as motivational signs, the meaning of compounds,
non-verbal signs and style as a determinant of perceptual and logical processes.
Some individual experimental research is anticipated.
108. Language and Thought. See Linguistics 107.
Spring semester. Mrs. Gleitman.
109. Comparative and Physiological Psychology. The genetic, developmental,
and physiological determinants of animal behavior. The seminar will explore in
detail experimental and field studies of behavior in a few selected animal species.
Generalizations derived from the study of animal behavior'will be brought to
bear on problems in human behavior and behavior pathology.
110. Group Dynamics. A combination of Psychology 45 (Fall) and a sub­
sequent semester of empirical research.
Fall and spring semester. Mr. Gergen.
120. Thesis. May be presented as a substitute for one seminar, provided the
student is doing major work in psychology with three seminars, and provided
some member of the department is available to undertake the direction of the
thesis.
All members of the department.
M

a s t e r ’s

D

egree

A limited number of students may be accepted for graduate study toward the
Master’s degree in psychology (see pp. 74-75). Students receiving the Bachelor’s
degree from Swarthmore are not normally eligible for this work.
The program of work for the Master’s degree requires the completion of four
seminars, or their equivalent. One of the seminars must be a research seminar
leading to a Thesis. The work of the seminars is judged by external examiners.
The requirements for the Master’s degree can normally be completed in one
year.

R ELIG IO N
JOHN M. MOORE, Professor
P. LINWOOD URBAN, JR., Professor and Chairman
DONALD SWEARER, Associate Professor
PATRICK HENRY, Assistant Professori
LEONARD BARRETT, Visiting Lecturer
SAMUEL T. LACHS, Visiting Lecturer
The academic discipline of religion consists of several methodologies applied
to a broad subject matter. Understanding of religion is achieved by philosophi­
cal, historical, literary, and sociological analysis of religious experience, thought,
texts, rites and ceremonies, institutions. Department offerings are designed to
jAbsent on leave, 1970-71.

178

RELIGION
provide illustrations of the various ways in which religion can be studied in an
academic setting.
Any course numbered 3 through 6 may be taken as an introduction to the
field, and successful completion of one of these will normally be required for
admission to courses numbered 11 and above. The normal prerequisite for re­
ligion as a Course major, or an Honors major or minor, will be completion of
two courses. For advanced work in some areas of religion, foreign language
facility will be very useful, especially French and German. For advanced work
in biblical studies and early Christian history, knowledge of one of the ancient
languages—Greek, Latin, Hebrew (given at Bryn M awr)—would also be useful.
While the department itself intends to provide a good introduction to the
study of religion and a chance for some advanced work as well, the attention of
students is also called to relevant offerings in the departments of philosophy, his­
tory, sociology and anthropology, and fine arts, and to courses reflecting other
scholarly specialties in departments of religion at neighboring institutions, par­
ticularly the University of Pennsylvania, Bryn Mawr College and Haverford
College. Students interested in taking courses at these institutions should consult
the chairman.
3. Introduction to the Old Testament. The literature and history of the peo­
ple of Israel. Early traditions, the law and the prophets, the emergence of
Judaism. Primary emphasis will be on developing familiarity w ith the text.
Fall semester. Mr. Lachs.
4. Introduction to the New Testament. The literature and history of early
Christianity. The formation of the gospels, the life and teachings of Jesus, the
Christian movement in the apostolic age, with special attention to the theology
of Paul. Primary emphasis will be on developing familiarity with the text.
Spring semester.
5. Introduction to Asian Religions. An introduction to the study of religion
through an examination of selected phenomena from the religious traditions of
India and China. Attention will focus on Hinduism and Islam in India and
Confucianism and Taoism in China.
Fall semester. Mr. Swearer.
6. Problems of Religious Thought. The purpose of this course is to study
various answers to the chief religious problems of the 20th century. Problems in­
clude: the nature of religious experience, the existence of God, religion and
morality, science and religion and the problem of evil. Answers include those
given by Karl Barth, Martin Buber, Rudolph Bultmann, Reinhold Niebuhr,
Paul Tillich and others. The student is encouraged to find his own answers and
to work out his own religious beliefs.
Each semester. Mr. Urban.
11. Early Christianity.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71.

Mr. Henry.

12. Christianity Since the Reformation.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Henry.
13. Theravada Buddhism. A critical study of selected aspects of the literary,
doctrinal, cultural and historical development of Theravada Buddhism in India,
Ceylon and Southeast Asia. Attention will be given to Buddhism’s relationship
to Hinduism and folk traditions.
Spring semester. Mr. Swearer.

179

RELIGION
14. Mahayana Buddhism. A study of selected aspects of Mahayana and Tantrayana Buddhism. While the focus of the course will be on Buddhism in Japan,
the development of particular Buddhist traditions within the contexts of Tibet
and China will also be studied.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Swearer.
15. African Religion and American Culture.
religion.
Spring semester. Mr. Barrett.

The evolution of Afro-American

16. Philosophy of Religion. See Philosophy 16.
Spring semester. Mr. Bennett.
18. The Reformation. A study of the rise and development of the Protestant
Reformation during the 16th century; its history and thought with special atten­
tion to the work and thought of Luther and Calvin.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Urban.
19. Medieval Philosophy. Philosophical thought from Augustine to the 15th
century. Attention will be paid both to specific problems such as universals,
analogy, and epistemology and to outstanding thinkers such as Anselm, Aquinas,
and Ockham. Although the primary emphasis will be historical, attention will be
given to the contemporary relevance of medieval thought. (Also listed as
Philosophy 19.)
Fall semester. Mr. Urban.
20. Existentialism and Religious Belief. A study of one of the most influen­
tial, philosophical movements of the 20th century and its impact on religious
thought. Among philosophers attention will be given to the writings of Edmund
Husserl, Martin Heidegger, Karl Jaspers, and Jean-Paul Sartre. Among religious
thinkers the writings of Rudolph Bultmann, John Macquarrie, Gabriel Marcel,
and Paul Tillich will be read. Lectures, discussions, and reports. (Also listed as
Philosophy 20.)
Fall semester. Mr. Urban.
21. Studies in Old Testament. An advanced course in some special topic in
Old Testament, which may vary from year to year.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Henry.
22. Studies in New Testament. An advanced course in some special subject in
New Testament, which may vary from year to year.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Henry.
23. Studies in History of Christianity. An advanced course in some special
topic in history of Christianity, which may vary from year to year.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Henry.
24. Mysticism East and West. Mysticism will be studied within the contexts
of various religious traditions including Christianity, Judaism, Islam, Hinduism,
Buddhism and Taoism. Philosophical and psychological analyses of mysticism
will be considered in addition to a study of its nature and role as a type of
religious phenomenon.
Fall semester. Mr. Swearer.
25. Religious Classics. An advanced course in the study of one or two great
religious thinkers.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Urban.
31.

Religion and Ethics. The perennial problems of ethics and their relation­

180

RELIGION
ship to religious perspectives. Attention will be given to such problems as: the
analysis of moral and religious language, Freudian and Marxist critiques of
religious ethics, freedom and order, love and justice, just-war theory and per­
sonal responsibility in the use of power, as well as the nature of the good life
and the ideal society. Among classical and contemporary authors studied will
be Plato, St. Thomas, Joseph Butler, Ludwig Feuerbach, Martin Buber, John
Dewey, A. C. Garnett, Eric Fromm, and Bernard Häring. Students as well as
instructors will be responsible for the presentation of issues. (Also listed as
Philosophy 31.)
Prerequisite: Philosophy 1, or one of the courses numbered Religion 3-6.
Spring semester. Messrs. Oberdiek and Urban.
37. American Religious Thought. See History 37.
38. Quakerism. The history of the Society of Friends to the present day. The
characteristic religious and social ideas of the Quakers are considered in their
historical setting.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71.
51. Special Topics. From time to time special topics may be offered as courses
at the discretion of the faculty or as a result of sufficient student interest.
52. Thesis. Majors in religion are strongly encouraged to write a thesis as a
part of their program.
53. Directed Reading.
54. Senior Conference. A colloquium for majors in the second semester of
the senior year. The conference is not designed specifically for preparation for
the comprehensive examination; rather, opportunity will be given for discussion
of topics of interest to members of the colloquium.
Spring semester.
H

onors

Sem

in ars

101. The Old Testament. A general introduction to major issues in Old
Testament interpretation, followed by detailed investigations of particular sub­
jects, chosen as far as possible on the basis of an individual student s interests,
and leading to the production of a substantial research paper. Discussions are
designed to familiarize the entire seminar with each student s special project.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Henry.
102. The New Testament. The New Testament dealt with according to the
format outlined for the Old Testament in Religion 101.
Spring semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Henry.
103. Early Christianity. A study of the development of Christian thought and
institutions from the end of the first century to the Council of Chalcedon (A.D.
451). Specific subjects covered will depend on the students’ interests. Among
topics which might be considered are church and empire, missionary expansion,
episcopacy, sacraments and liturgy, councils, doctrinal development and dog­
matic definition, heresy, beginnings of monasticism. Greek an d/or Latin, as well
as French and German, while not required, can be employed extensively.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Henry.
104. Christian Divisions East and West. This seminar is part of a large
project, which is a study of the doctrinal, cultural, political, and ecclesiastical
factors that caused divergence between Greek and Latin Christianity, and led to
eventual schism. The specific subject matter will vary from year to year.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Henry.

181

RELIGION
105. The Idea of God in Western Thought. An examination will be made of
writings which have contributed most to Western concepts of God. The study
will include Plato, Aristotle, the Bible, Athanasius, Augustine, Thomas Aquinas,
Luther, Calvin, Kant, Schleiermacher, Rudolf Otto, John Baillie and others.
Spring semester. Mr. Urban.
106. Contemporary Religious Philosophers. The seminar will concentrate on
representative thinkers and schools of thought in the present century. These will
include Karl Barth, Martin Buber, Rudolph Bultmann, Reinhold Niebuhr, Paul
Tillich, and others.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Urban.
107. The Religions of Southeast Asia. A study of Theravada Buddhism
within the historical and cultural matrix of Southeast Asia. Attention will be
devoted to both textual and doctrinal problems as well as issues of a sociological
and anthropological nature.
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Swearer.
108. Studies in Hinduism and Buddhism. A seminar designed to treat special
topics in Hinduism and Buddhism depending on the interest and needs of stu­
dents in the field of the History of Religions. Possible subjects of interest might
include idealistic thought in Hinduism and Buddhism, facets of Buddhism in
China and Japan, or the historical and cultural interactions of Hinduism and
Buddhism in South Asia.
Spring semester. Mr. Swearer.
110. Medieval Philosophy. Philosophical thought from Augustine to the 15th
century. Attention will be paid both to specific problems such as universals,
analogy, and epistemology and to outstanding thinkers such as Anselm, Aquinas,
Scotus and Ockham. Although primary emphasis will be historical, attention will
be paid to the contemporary relevance of medieval thought. (Also listed as
Philosophy 110.)
Fall semester. Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Urban.
111. Philosophy of Religion. (See Philosophy 111.)
Spring semester. Mr. Bennett.
120. Thesis. Honors candidates are strongly urged to write a thesis as prepara­
tion for one of their papers.

SO CIO LO G Y A N D
ANTHROPOLOGY
LEON BRAMSON, Associate Professor and Chairman
STEVEN PIKER, Associate Professor
VINCENT BRANDT, Assistant Professort
ROBERT C. MITCHELL, Assistant Professor
HANS-EBERHARD MUELLER, Assistant Professor
JENNIE-KEITH ROSS, Assistant Professor
JON VAN TIL, Assistant Professort
VICTOR NOVICK, Instructort
Although Sociology and Anthropology arose initially out of divergent histori­
cal traditions, they are engaged in a common task. Studies in the department are
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71.

182

S O C I O L O G Y AND A N T H R O P O L O G Y
directed toward the discovery of the general principles which help to explain the
order, meaning, and coherence of human social and cultural life. To that end,
work in the department will emphasize the comparative analysis of societies and
social institutions; the structure and functioning of human communities; the
principles of social organization and disorganization; and the conditions which
tend to foster continuity and change, consensus and conflict. Emphasis will also
be laid on the relevance of Sociology and Anthropology to social problems in the
modern age, particularly to the question of the nature, conditions and limits of
human freedom.
R

eq u irem en ts

and

R

eco m m end a tio ns

Course 1 is prerequisite to all other work in the department. Applicants for a
major or minor are required to have taken one additional course. Course majors
will customarily write a thesis in their senior year. Course majors will take a
minimum of eight courses in the department, including the introductory course
and Course 98-99 (thesis). In general, students who take a course may not take
the corresponding seminar.
1. Introduction to Sociology and Anthropology. An exploration of human so­
cieties and cultures: the origin of culture, its acquisition by the individual, and
the diversification of societal types. Topics to be studied comparatively will in­
clude: human evolution, urbanism, ethnic and cultural pluralism, and social
change.
Fall semester. Members of the Department.
20. Methods of Social Research. An introduction to the empirical study of
societies. Topics for study include: the philosophical basis of social inquiry, the
design of social research, problems of sampling, measurement, statistical analysis,
data collection and interpretation. The major portion of class work consists of
lab assignments. To fulfill lab requirements the student may choose either a) to
undertake and complete an empirical research project on a topic of his choice
or, b) to complete the weekly lab assignments. The last involves survey research,
cross cultural research, participant observation, and the use of the computer in
social research. This course presupposes no particular mathematical back­
ground, and is especially recommended to sophomores or juniors who plan to
undertake empirical research for their theses.
Spring semester. Mr. Mitchell.
21. African Modernization. A survey of modernization theory and the mod­
ernization process in Africa south of the Sahara, including indigenously induced
pre-colonial change, the impact of the West on African traditional societies, the
changes associated with nationalism and independence, and the impact of
urbanization and industrialization. Attention will be given to the uniquely
African aspects of modernization with special reference to modern African cul­
ture. Selected countries will be examined intensively.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Mitchell.
22. Race and Ethnic Relations in the United States. Ethnic and minority rela­
tions in America, their structure and patterns of change. Particular emphasis
will be placed on the American Negro: the development of subcultures, effects of
racial discrimination on the individual, and social movements arising out of the
acculturation process. The experience of other ethnic groups, the melting-pot
thesis, and the persistence of religious subcultures will also be studied.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Van Til.

183

S O C I O L O G Y AND A N T H R O P O L O G Y
23. Comparative Social Organization. Examination of the social, economic,
and political systems of primitive hunting-gathering and simple agricultural so­
cieties. Effects of environment on demography and complexity of organization.
Comparison with primate societies.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Novick.
25. Community Studies: Latin America. An examination of ethnographic ac­
counts of rural and urban communities in Latin America, with emphasis on theo­
retical issues associated with the definition of types of communities. Detailed
study of social, economic, and political organization of these communities. Topics
will include interpretation of local community organization in a national and
international context; social stratification; and the process of change.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Novick.
26. Language, Society and Culture. The relationship of language to culture
and society will be investigated through study of language'acquisition, the influ­
ence of social and cultural context on language use, and the distribution of
linguistic, social and cultural borders in speech communities. Major linguistic
theories and methods will be discussed in terms of their usefulness to students
of anthropology and sociology. Specific topics will include multi-lingualism,
ethnoscience, linguistic relativity, codes and slang, Creoles and pidgins, transla­
tion and formal kinship analysis.
Spring semester. Mrs. Ross.
29. Sociology of Religion. Examination of the relationship between religion
and society. Sociological theories of religion, religious organization and be­
havior, religion and social change, processes of institutionalization and secular­
ization.
To be offered in 1971-72. Mr. Mitchell.
30. Special topics. Student initiated courses in which members of the staff
participate or other irregular course offerings. The department lists the follow­
ing courses under Special Topics:
30B. Applied Anthropology and Community Development. This course will
examine theories of community development in the context of the application of
anthropological knowledge to practical problems. Ample use will be made of
case studies in directed change. Contrasts will be indicated where possible be­
tween the theory and practice of community development in capitalist and
socialist countries.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Novick.
40. Man and Environment. The study of patterns of energy flow and material
cycling in the world ecosystem with particular reference to human population.
Consideration will be given to the methodology of ecological analysis and its
application to the study of the causes and consequences of the growth of tech­
nology and human populations, especially in relation to the question of environ­
mental deterioration. Freshmen admitted by permission of the instructors. (Also
listed as Biology 40.)
Prerequisite: Biology 2 or Sociology-Anthropology 1.
Spring semester. Mr. Hickman and Mr. Mitchell.
44. Special Project. As stated in C.E.P. Recommendation No. 4, the College
will grant up to one unit of course credit “for practical work, which might be
done off-campus, when it can be shown to lend itself to intellectual analysis, and
is likely to contribute to a student’s progress in regular course work, and subject
to four conditions: (1) agreement of an instructor to supervise the project;
(2) permission of the Curriculum Committee; (3) a basis for the project in

184

S O C I O L O G Y AND A N T H R O P O L O G Y
some prior course work; and (4) normally, the examination of pertinent litera­
ture and production of a written report as parts of the project.”
Members of the Department.
50. Modern Social Theory. The social and intellectual background of the rise
of social science, with consideration of selected social theorists and emphasis
on the relation of ideology to theory and research. Among the topics discussed
are individualism, progress, elitism, racism, collectivism, and war.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Bramson.
51-52. Colloquium: Caribbean Society. An attempt to develop generalizations
about the structure of Caribbean society. Each student will be responsible for
the analysis of a particular island or segment of that society and its relationship
to the larger whole, utilizing the results of existing sociological, anthropological,
or other studies.
Spring semester. Mr. Bramson.
55. Anthropological Study of Complex Societies. The rapid disappearance of
isolated primitive communities has focused anthropologists’ attention on socie­
ties with literate traditions, as well as urbanization in developing countries. This
course treats theoretical and methodological problems associated with this shift
in anthropological perspective. Ethnographic materials from Asia, Africa, and
South America will be used.
Fall semester. Mr. Brandt, Mrs. Ross.
57-8. Colloquium: Social Borders. This course will try to define the processes
by which basic social characteristics such as age, sex, or ethnicity become iden­
tified and maintained as social borders which define groups, roles, and conflicts
in both traditional and industrial societies.
Spring semester. Mrs. Ross.
59. Urban Sociology. The historical growth of cities, the social structure of
urban areas, impact of urbanization on social relations, and the emergent ideol­
ogies of city life considered from the main perspectives of urban sociology.
Topics of special interest include the structure and process of metropolitan life,
the consequences of urbanization for rural life and small towns, the prospects
for urban planning, and the contemporary crisis of the cities.
Fall semester. Mr. Van Til.
60. Cultural Ecology. An examination of cultural systems viewed as adapta­
tions to the physical, social, and political environment. Consideration will be
given to theoretical issues of cause and explanation in ecological studies; social
and cultural adjustments to factors such as nutritional needs, population size
and density, and natural resources. Case material will be drawn from the an­
thropological literature on primary bands, tribal societies, and pastoral nomads.
Fall semester. Mr. Novick.
61. Social Stratification. An examination of theoretical perspectives and em­
pirical studies on the structure of social inequality. Special emphasis will be
placed upon stratification in contemporary society. Topics will include: social
mobility, class subcultures, the social organization of the poor, deviance and
delinquency, and ethnic stratification.
Spring semester. Mr. Mueller.
62. Political Sociology. The relation of politics to basic social structures,
processes and traditions. Study of problems, concepts and theories about politics
viewed as human behavior. The specific topics will vary from year to year.
Spring semester. Mr. Mueller.

185

S O C I O L O G Y AND A N T H R O P O L O G Y
63. Psychological Anthropology. A study of cultural differences from the
standpoint of the socialization process. A comparative analysis of the ways in
which patterns of behavior are transmitted through the family and related insti­
tutions. An assessment of the significance of this approach for fields of social
and cultural anthropology.
Spring semester. Mr. Piker.
64-65. Colloquium: Buddhism, a Social History. An exploration of the social
and historical conditions under which Buddhism developed in the 6th century
B.C., and the conditions under which it became established in India and subse­
quently in Ceylon and S.E. Asia. Primary focus will be upon the Theravada
School. Some familiarity with doctrinal Buddhism will be developed, but the
main emphasis will be upon the history of Buddhism seen as a number of in­
stances of religion and social change. Special attention will be given to sectarian
developments within the Theravada School within the past 150 years.
Prerequisite: permission of the instructor.
Spring semester. Mr. Piker.
66. Directed Reading. Individual or group study in fields of special interest to
the students not dealt with in the regular course offerings. Consent of the Chair­
man and of the instructor is required.
Members of the Department.
67-8. Colloquium: Human Resources. A research colloquium emphasizing
the study of the intersection of the educational system and the occupational
structure. Specific problems will include improvement of the educational sys­
tem, military manpower policy, the human career, and professionalization. Each
member of the colloquium will do a project.
Fall semester. Mr. Bramson.
70- Economic Anthropology. Examination of the economic institutions of
primitive and peasant societies. Theoretical issues such as the meaning of
“economic” and the nature of surplus will be considered, as will such substantive
issues as the origins and kinds of money, property, labor, trade and markets.
Fall semester. Mr. Pryor and Mr. Novick.
71- 2. Colloquium: The Sociology of Intellectual Life. An examination of the
main approaches to the sociological study of culture and intellectual life. Par­
ticular attention will be given to the role of intellectuals in modern society. The
colloquium will provide an opportunity for research on the sociology of science,
literature, art, and music.
Spring semester. Mr. Mueller.
73. Japanese Society. After tracing the development of a distinctive Japanese
civilization within the East Asian cultural tradition, attention will be focused
on post war society. To w hat extent is industrial Japan “converging” with other
advanced nations in terms of ideology and social organization? Comparisons
will be introduced with China and Korea, as well as with the West.
Fall semester. Mr. Brandt.
98-99. Thesis. Theses will be required of all Course majors. Seniors will nor­
mally take two consecutive semesters of thesis tutorial (Course 98-99) during
their senior year. Students are urged to have their thesis proposals approved as
early as possible during the junior year.

186

SOCIOLOGY
H

onors

Sem

AND

ANTHROPOLOGY

in ars

101. Far East Peasant and Urban Cultures. The relationship between systems
of thought and social institutions will provide the main integrating frame for a
discussion of kinship systems, the state bureaucracy, religion, and forms of
economic organization in China, Japan, and Korea. The influence of moderniz­
ing ideology on traditional forms will be stressed in an attempt to describe and
understand some of the sharp contrasts of the development process in these
countries.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Brandt.
102. Comparative Social Organization. The nature of human social organiza­
tion. Case materials will be drawn from a variety of culture types and areas.
Special emphasis will be given to non-Western social structure and to recent
theoretical developments in the analysis of social organization.
Spring semester. Mrs. Ross.
103. Race and Culture. A comparative study of the patterns of ethnic and
minority relations in society, with consideration of the factors underlying per­
sistence and change. Race and culture will be related through an examination of
conflicts of values, social hierarchies, and the maintenance of subcultures.
Not offered in 1970-71. Mr. Van Til.
104. Psychological Anthropology. The significance of psychological theories
for the analysis of social and cultural systems. Special emphasis will be given to
personality and social structure, religious belief systems, and comparative
socialization within a variety of cultural settings.
Spring semester. Mr. Piker.
105. Modern Social Theory. The social and intellectual background of the
rise of social science, with consideration of selected social theorists and empha­
sis on the relation of ideology to theory and research in sociology.
Spring semester. Mr. Bramson.
106. Cultural Ecology. An examination of cultural systems viewed as adapta­
tions to the physical, social, and political environment. Consideration will be
given to theoretical issues of cause and explanation in ecological studies; social
and cultural adjustments to factors such as nutritional needs, population size
and density, and natural resources. Case material will be drawn from the an­
thropological literature on primary bands, tribal societies, and pastoral nomads.
Fall semester. Mr. Novick.
107. Sociology of Religion. An exploration of the relationship between re­
ligion and society. Special emphasis will be given to the social and historical
determinants of changes in religious institutions, and to the adaptive qualities of
religious institutions in periods of social upheaval. Case materials will be drawn
largely from societies and religions of South and Southeast Asia, principally
Hinduism and Buddhism. W ork in the seminar will include a research project.
To be offered in 1971-72.
108. Social Stratification. An examination of theoretical perspectives and
empirical studies on the structuring of social inequality. Special emphasis will be
placed upon the study of social problems in contemporary society associated
with patterns of stratification. Units of study will include the following topics:
social mobility, class subcultures, the social organization of the poor, deviance
and delinquency, and ethnic stratification.
Fall semester. Mr. Mueller.

187

S O C I O L O G Y AND A N T H R O P O L O G Y
109. Social and Cultural Change. Classical and modern theories of change.
Case studies of long term and short term aspects of change including the indus­
trial revolution, the modernization process, collective behavior and aspects of
contemporary and future American society.
Spring semester. Mr. Mitchell.
110. Urban Sociology and Politics. The impact of urbanization on contempo­
rary politics and social structure, from the perspective of political science and
sociology. Emphasis will be placed on empirical study of selected problems,
such as physical planning, social welfare, and political organization.
Fall semester. Mr. Gilbert and Mr. Van Til.
112. Sociolinguistics. The relationship of language to culture and society will
be investigated through a study of language acquisition, the influence of social
and cultural context on language use, and the distribution of linguistic, social
and cultural borders in speech communities. Major linguistic theories and meth­
ods will be discussed in terms of their usefulness to students of anthropology
and sociology. Specific topics will include multi-lingualism, ethnoscience, lin­
guistic relativity, codes and slang, Creoles and pidgins, translation and formal
kinship analysis.
Fall semester. To be offered in 1971-72. Mrs. Ross.
114. Political Sociology. The relation of politics to basic social structures,
processes, and traditions. Study of problems, concepts, and theories about
politics viewed as human behavior.
Fall semester. To be offered in 1971-72.
120. Thesis. Honors students who choose to do so will customarily write
theses during the senior year. Students are urged to have thesis proposals ap­
proved as early as possible during the junior year.
Members of the Department.

188

VI
THE C ORPORATION
BO ARD OF M A N A G ER S
A L U M N I OFFICERS and COUNCIL
FACULTY
A D M IN IS T R A T IO N

Dana and Hallowell Dormitories

THE C O R PO R ATIO N
Robert M. Browning, Chairman
Hewitt Hill Farm, R. D. 2, South Royalton, Vt. 05068
Boyd T. Barnard, Vice-Chairman
914 Philadelphia National Bank Bldg., Philadelphia, Pa. 19107
William F. Lee, Chairman of the Executive Committee
5 Guernsey Road, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081
Sue Thomas Turner, Secretary
Cook Road, Alfred Station, New York 14803
Joseph B. Shane, Assistant Secretary
Swarthmore College, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081
Richard B. Willis, Treasurer
Provident National Bank, P. O. Box 7648, Philadelphia, Pa. 19101
Edward K. Cratsley, Assistant Treasurer
Swarthmore College, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081

BO AR D OF M A N A G ER S
Ex officio
Robert D. Cross, President of Swarthmore College, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
Emeriti
Elisabeth Hallowell Bartlett, 100 West University Parkway, Baltimore, Md.
21210.
Isabel Jenkins Booth, Jefferson House, The Strand, New Castle, Del. 19720.
Hadassah M. L. Holcombe, The Kenilworth, Alden Park, Philadelphia, Pa.
19144.
Philip T. Sharpies, The Fidelity Bldg., Suite 2532, 123 South Broad Street,
Philadelphia, Pa. 19109.
Claude C. Smith, 1617 Land Title Building, Philadelphia, Pa. 19110.
Barclay White, 119 Coulter Street, Ardmore, Pa. 19003.
Alfred H. Williams, 216 N. Providence Road, Wallingford, Pa. 19086.
Joseph H. Willits, Box 441 A, Bridgetown Pike, R. D. 1, Langhorne, Pa. 19047.
Life Members
Eleanor Stabler Clarke, Crumwald Farm, 401 Rogers Lane, Wallingford, Pa.
19086.

Helen Gawthrop Worth, 805 Augusta Road, Westover Hills, Wilmington, Del.
19806.
191

B O A R D OF M A N A G E R S
Term Expires December, 1970
Charles F. Barber, 120 Broadway, New York, N. Y. 10005.
Carroll G. Bowen, 10 Ash Street Place, Cambridge, Mass. 02138.
Robert M. Browning, Hewitt Hill Farm, R. D. 2, South Royalton, Vt. 05068.
Virginia Stratton Cornell, Central Valley, N. Y. 10917.
Dorothy Shoemaker McDiarmid, 390 Maple Ave. East, Vienna, Va. 22180.
Charles C. Price, III, 118 Hilldale Road, Lansdowne, Pa. 19050.
*Edwin M. Bush, Jr., 120 S. La Salle Street, Chicago, Illinois 60603.
*Mary B. Newman, 5 Willard Street, Cambridge, Mass. 02138.
Term Expires December, 1971
Carl K. Dellmuth, The Fidelity Bank, Philadelphia, Pa. 19109.
Stephen G. Lax, G-L Industries, Inc., 300 Harvard Avenue, Westville, N. J.
08093.
Isabel Logan Lyon, 20 West 16th Street, New York, N. Y. 10011.
William Poole, 350 Delaware Trust Bldg., Wilmington, Del. 19801.
Howard S. Turner, Turner Construction Co., 150 E. 42nd Street, New York,
N. Y. 10017.
*G. Lupton Broomell, Jr., Leeds and Northrup Co., North Wales, Pa. 19454.
*Ann Lapham Frazer, 510 Beatty Road, Springfield, Pa. 19064.
Term Expires December, 1972
Boyd T. Barnard, 914 Philadelphia National Bank Building, Philadelphia,
Pa. 19107.
Clement M. Biddle, 230 Oak Ridge Avenue, Summit, N. J. 07901.
George B. Clothier, 1418 Packard Building, Philadelphia, Pa. 19102.
Kermit Gordon, 2202 Wyoming Ave., N.W., Washington, D. C. 20008.
Clark Kerr, 8300 Buckingham Drive, El Cerrito, California 94530.
Thomas B. McCabe, Scott Plaza, Philadelphia, Pa. 19113.
*J. Gordon Lippincott, 150 East 22nd Street, New York, N. Y. 10010.
*Winnifred Poland Pierce, 211 McCotter Drive, Ann Arbor, Mich. 48103.
Term Expires December, 1973
Dorothy Lucking Hagerty, 51-8 Revere Rd., Drexel Hill, Pa. 19026.
H. Thomas Hallowell, Jr., The Benson East, Jenkintown, Pa. 19046.
William F. Lee, 5 Guernsey Rd., Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
Audrey Shields Penn, 4105 Spruce St., Apt. A-2, Philadelphia, Pa. 19102.
J. Lawrence Shane, 21 College Avenue, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
Sue Thomas Turner, Cook Road, Alfred Station, N. Y. 14803.
Richard B. Willis, Provident National Bank, P. O. Box 7648, Philadelphia, Pa
19101.
*Eugene M. Lang, 912 Fifth Avenue, New York, N. Y. 10021.
*Ellen Ash Peters, 159 Glen Parkway, Hamden, Ct. 06517.
•Nominated by the Alumni Association

192

B O A R D OF M A N A G E R S
COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD
The Chairman of the Board is ex officio a member of every Committee
Executive
Thomas B. McCabe
William F. Lee
Charles C. Price, III
Boyd T. Barnard
Howard S. Turner
Robert M. Browning
Sue Thomas Turner
Carl K. Dellmuth
Richard B. Willis
Ann Lapham Frazer
Finance and Trusts Administration
Charles E. Rickards
Richard B. Willis
Claude C. Smith
George B. Clothier
Howard S. Turner
Carl K. Dellmuth
H. Thomas Hallowell, Jr.
Thomas B. McCabe
Instruction and Libraries
Ellen Ash Peters
Charles C. Price, III
Winnifred Poland Pierce
Charles F. Barber
William Poole
Carroll G. Bowen
Sue Thomas Turner
Kermit Gordon
Helen Gawthrop Worth
Dorothy Lucking Hagerty
Clark Kerr
Investment
J. Lawrence Shane
Thomas B. McCabe
Philip T. Sharpies
Boyd T. Barnard
Richard B. Willis
Richard C. Bond
H. Thomas Hallowell, Jr.
Property
Eugene M. Lang
William F. Lee
J. Gordon Lippincott
Boyd T. Barnard
Kathryn Sonneborn Read
G. Lupton Broomell, Jr.
Howard S. Turner
Virginia Stratton Cornell
Ann Lapham Frazer
Clement M. Biddle
Carroll G. Bowen
G. Lupton Broomell, Jr.
Edwin M. Bush, Jr.
Eleanor Stabler Clarke

Student Activities
Stephen G. Lax
Isabel Logan Lyon
Dorothy Shoemaker McDiarmid
Mary B. Newman
Audrey Shields Penn
Winnifred Poland Pierce
Sue Thomas Turner
Nominating
Stephen G. Lax
Isabel Logan Lyop
Helen Gawthrop Worth

Howard S. Turner
Boyd T. Barnard
Ann Lapham Frazer
Development
Carl K. Dellmuth
Clement M. Biddle
Virginia Stratton Cornell
H. Thomas Hallowell, Jr.
Eugene M. Lang

Stephen G. Lax
William F. Lee
J. Gordon Lippincott
Isabel Logan Lyon
William Poole

193

A LU M N I OFFICERS and COUNCIL
President, John L. Dugan ’43,5 Hillside Ave., Short Hills, N. J. 07078.
Vice-President for Men, W. Marshall Schmidt ’47, 147 Brookstone Dr., Prince­
ton, N. J. 08540.
Vice-President for Women, Nancy Robinson Posel '51, 1060 Mill Rd. Cir., Jenkintown, Pa. 19046.
Secretary, Laura Reppert Unger ’49, Davis Rd., R. D. # 2 , Malvern, Pa. 19355.
Term Expires

1971

Alan R. H unt ’51, 603 Ogden Ave., Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
John A. Miller, II ’41, 913 Winding Lane, Media, Pa. 19063.

1972 Brian E. Appel ’62,328 S. Juniper St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19107.
Frank A. Oski ’54,611 Yale Road, Bala Cynwyd, Pa. 19004.
John E. Pixton, Jr. ’46, 445 Dreshertown Rd., Fort Washington, Pa.
19034.
1973

E. Boyd Asplundh ’50, 654 Dale Road, Bryn Athyn, Pa. 19009.
William J. Erdman ’43, 3803 The Oak Road, Philadelphia, Pa. 19129.

1971

Holly Ross Draper ’37, 1625 Montgomery Ave., Villanova, Pa. 19085.
Ruth Wilcox Mahler ’49, 258 Moore Street, Princeton, N. J. 08540.

1972

Eleanor Yearsley Bennett ’40,139 Lake View Drive, Media, Pa. 19063.
Virginia Butts Cryer ’48, 309 Copples Lane, Wallingford, Pa. 19086.
Phyllis Hall Raymond ’54, 630 University Place, Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.

1973

Mary Longenecker Frorer ’57, 307 Elm Ave., Swarthmore, Pa. 19081.
Anne Tomlinson Welsh ’63, 412 S. 21st St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19146
Zone B

1971

Stephen L. Beers ’43,19 Kelbume Ave., N. Tarrytown, N. Y. 10591.
Samuel L. Hayes III ’57,560 Riverside Dr., New York, N. Y. 10027.

1972

Jerome Simson ’41, 77 Groton St., Forest Hills Gardens, N. Y, 11375.

1973

Philip B. Dunham ’58,2311 E. Genesee St., Syracuse, N. Y. 13210.
Gavin Wright ’65, 788 Elm Street, New Haven, Conn. 06511.

1971

Elinor P. Griest ’43,25 E. Tenth St., New York, N. Y. 10003.
Tamzin MacDonald McMinn ’58, 90 May Dr., Chatham, N. J. 07928.

1972

Kay Eagle Kyle ’54, 225 Mt. Hope Blvd., Hastings-on-Hudson, N. Y.
10706.

1973

Jane Foster Buckwalter ’60, 184 Berkeley Pla., Brooklyn, N. Y. 11217.
Anna Huntington Deming ’43, 38 Killdeer Rd., Hamden, Conn. 06517.

1972

Zone C
David D. Potter ’52,132 Brattle St., Cambridge, Mass. 02138.
Mary Jane Winde Gentry ’53, R. D. # 2 , Williston, Vermont 05409.

194

ALUM NI O FFIC ER S
1971
1973

AND CO U N CIL

Zone D
Frank A. Sieverts ’55, 4216 Mathewson Dr., N.W., Washington, D. C.
20011.
Robert T. Simpson ’59,13111 Burlwood Dr., Rockville, Md. 20853.

1971

Elizabeth Gawthrop Donnelly ’43, c/o Mrs. E. H. Worth, 805 Augusta
Rd., Wilmington, Del. 19807
1973 Georgene Mallonee Elliott ’62, 4414 Groveland Ave., Baltimore, Md.
21215.
Zone E
1972 Benjamin H. Beattie ’55, R. D. # 1, Box 227-A, Jeannette, Pa. 15644.
Elizabeth Earll Verlie ’41, 3586 Runnymede Rd., Cleveland, Ohio 44121.
Zone F
1973

Paul N. Guthrie, Jr. ’59, Box 858, Chapel Hill, N. C. 27514.
Patricia Myers Westine ’61, Rt. 2, Box 353, San Antonio, Texas 78228.
Zone G

1971

Orville R. Wright, Jr. ’54, 11009 Territorial Dr., Burnsville, Minn. 55378.

1973

J. Parker Hall ’55, 1161 Pine St., Winnetka, 111. 60093.

1971
1973

Laudie Dimmette Porter ’57,202 Elm, Northfield, Minn. 55057.
Alice Peatman Dettmers ’54, 920 Adelaide Drive, Northbrook, 111. 60062.

1971

Zone H
Richard W. Coles ’61,508 Citadel Ave., Claremont, Calif. 91711.

1972

John K. McNulty ’56,439 Spruce St., Berkeley, Calif. 94708.

1971

Barbara Haddad Ryan ’59,1 Downing Street, Denver, Colo. 80218.

1972

Gretchen Chase Howe ’44,36 Los Dedos, Orinda, Calif. 94563.

195

THE FA C U L TY
Robert D. Cross, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, President. 324
Cedar Lane.
Edward K. Cratsley, B.A., College of Wooster; M.B.A. and D.C.S., Harvard
University, Vice-President (Administration), Controller, and Professor of
Economics. 741 Harvard Avenue.
Joseph B. Shane, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., University of Pennsylvania,
Vice-President (Public Relations and Alumni Affairs) and Professor of Educa­
tion. 550 Elm Avenue.
Charles E. Gilbert, B.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., Northwestern University,
Provost and Professor of Political Science. 406 Walnut Lane.
Gilmore Stott, B.A. and M.A., University of Cincinnati; B.A. and M.A., Uni­
versity of Oxford; M.A. and Ph.D., Princeton University, Dean of Academic
Advising and Counseling and Lecturer in Philosophy, 318 Dartmouth Avenue.
John M. Moore, B.A., Park College; B.D., Union Theological Seminary; M.A.,
Harvard University; Ph.D., Columbia University, Associate Dean, Registrar
and Professor of Philosophy and Religion. 512 Ogden Avenue.
J. Edward Skeath, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Illinois, Acting Dean of Men and Assistant Professor of Mathematics. 11 Ben­
jamin West Avenue.
Deborah Townsend, B.A. and M.A., University of Michigan, Dean of Women.
512 Elm Avenue.
Lewis R. Gaty, II, B.A., Swarthmore College, Director of Institutional Re­
search and Lecturer in Economics. 2 Crum Ledge.
James F. Govan, B.A., The University of the South; M.A., Emory University;
Ph.D., The Johns Hopkins University, Librarian. 730 Yale Avenue.
Martha A. Connor, B.S. and M.A., University of Pennsylvania; B.S. in L.S.,
Drexel Institute, Associate Librarian. 325 Dartmouth Avenue.
Eleanor A. Maass, B.A. and M.S., University of Illinois; Ph.D., University of
Wisconsin, Science Librarian. 415 Cornell Avenue.
Howard H. Williams, B.A., Lake Forest College; M.A. and B.S. in L.S., Colum­
bia University, Reference Librarian. 144 Park Avenue.
Edgar R. Mullins, Jr., B.A., Grinnell College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Illinois. Director of Computer Education and Activities. 304 Callender Lane,
Wallingford, Pa.
EMERITI
Mary Albertson, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Bryn Mawr College, Isaac H. Clothier
Professor Emeritus of History and International Relations. 505 Ogden Avenue.
Lydia Baer, B.A., Oberlin College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Pennsyl­
vania, Associate Professor Emeritus of German. Manatee River Hotel, Braden­
ton, Fla.

196

Heinrich Brinkmann, B.A., Stanford University; M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard
University, Albert L. and Edna Pownall Buffington Professor Emeritus of
Mathematics. Wallingford Arms, Wallingford, Pa.
Susan P. Cobbs, B.A., Randolph-Macon Woman’s College; M.A., New York
University; Ph.D., University of Chicago. Dean Emeritus and Professor Emer­
itus of Classics. Box 147, Greensboro, Ala.
Edward H. Cox, B.S., Earlham College; M.A., Harvard University; Docteur
ès Science, L’Université de Genève, Docteur honoris causa, L’Université de
Montpellier; D.Sc., Earlham College, Edmund Allen Professor Emeritus of
Chemistry. 509 Ogden Avenue.
Henry Jermain Maude Creighton, B.A., M.A. and LL.D., Dalhousie University;
M.Sc., University of Birmingham; D.Sc., Das eidgenössische Polytechnikum,
Zürich; D.Sc., Swarthmore College, Edmund Allen Professor Emeritus of
Chemistry. Compartment # 7 , Site 13, Tantalion R.R. i . Nova Scotia, Canada.
Robert H. Dunn, B.S., Temple University, Associate Professor Emeritus of
Physical Education for Men. 811 Westdale Avenue.
Robert K. Enders, B.A. and Ph.D., University of Michigan, Isaac H. Clothier,
Jr. Professor Emeritus of Biology. 311 Elm Avenue.
E. J. Faulkner, Professor Emeritus of Physical Education for Men. 235 Dickin­
son Avenue.
Duncan Graham Foster, B.A. and M.A., Harvard University; Ph.D., The Johns
Hopkins University, Professor Emeritus of Chemistry. 15 Crest Lane.
Milan W. Garrett, B.A. and M.A., Stanford University; B.A. and D.Phil.,
University of Oxford, Professor Emeritus of Physics. 101 Orchard Circle, Oak
Ridge, Tenn.
Philip Marshall Hicks, B.A. and M.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., University
of Pennsylvania, Alexander Griswold Cummins Professor Emeritus of English
Literature. Avondale, Pa.
Everett L. Hunt, B.A., Huron College; M.A., University of Chicago; D.Litt.,
Huron College, Dean Emeritus and Professor Emeritus of English. 221 N.
Princeton Avenue.
Fredric Klees, B.A., Bowdoin College, Professor Emeritus of English. 220
South Chester R o a d .
Olga Lang, Graduate, University of Moscow; Ph.D., Columbia University,
Associate Professor Emeritus of Russian. 611 W. 111th St., New York, N. Y.
Harold M. March, B.A., Princeton University; Ph.D., Yale University, Susan
W. Lippincott Professor Emeritus of French. 18 Day Avenue, Northampton,
Massachusetts.
Edith Philips, B.A., Goucher College; Docteur de l’Université de Paris, Susan
W. Lippincott Professor Emeritus of French. 517 Elm Avenue.
James D. Sorber, B.A., Lehigh University; M.A., University of Nebraska,
Professor Emeritus of Spanish. 404 Walnut Lane.
Alfred J. Swan, B.A. and M.A., University of Oxford, Professor Emeritus of
Music. 758 Millbrook Lane, Haverford, Pa.
Clair Wilcox, B.S., University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Ohio State University;
Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania, Joseph Wharton Professor Emeritus of
Political Economy. 510 Ogden Avenue.

197

FACULTY
Elizabeth Cox Wright, B.A., Wellesley College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania, Professor Emeritus of English. Rose Valley Road, Moylan, Pa.
PROFESSORS
Paul H. Beik, B.A., Union College; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia University,
Centennial Professor of History. 4 W hittier Place.
Olexa-Myron Bilaniuk, Ingénieur, Université de Louvain; B.S.E., B.S., M.S.,
M.A. and Ph.D., University of Michigan, Professor of Physics. 100 Plush Mill
Road, Wallingford, Pennsylvania.
Samuel T. Carpenter, B.C.E., C.E. and M.S., Ohio State University, Isaiah V.
Williamson Professor of Civil and Mechanical Engineering. 612 Ogden Ave.
Hilde D. Cohn, Dr. Phil., University of Heidelberg, Professor of German.
302 North Chester Road.
î David Cowden, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard Univer­
sity, Professor of English. 312 Ogden Avenue.
W. C. Elmore, B.S., Lehigh University; Ph.D., Yale University, Morris L.
Clothier Professor of Physics. 525 Walnut Lane.
Edward A. Fehnel, B.S., M.S. and Ph.D., Lehigh University, Professor of Chem­
istry. 600 Elm Avenue.
James A. Field, Jr., B.S., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, Isaac H.
Clothier Professor of History. 612 Hillborn Avenue.
Launce J. Flemister, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Duke University, Professor of
Zoology. Rogers Lane and Plush Mill Road, Wallingford, Pa.
A. Gordon Hammer, B.A. and M.A., University of Sydney, Visiting Professor
of Psychology (University of New South W ales). 227 North Bowman Avenue,
Merion, Pa.
Mark A. Heald, B.A., Oberlin College; M.S. and Ph.D., Yale University,
Professor of Physics. 420 Rutgers Avenue.
Walter B. Keighton, Jr., B.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., Princeton Univer­
sity, Edmund Allen Professor of Chemistry. 311 Cedar Lane.
Luzern G. Livingston, B.S., Lawrence College; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin,
Professor of Botany. 15 Dartmouth Circle.
Paul C. Mangelsdorf, Jr., B.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., Harvard Univer­
sity, Professor of Physics. 110 Cornell Avenue.
Franz H. Mautner, Dr. Phil., University of Vienna, Professor of German. 408
Walnut Lane.
John D. McCrumm, B.A. and M.S., University of Colorado, Howard N. and
Ada J. Eavenson Professor of Engineering. 525 Elm Avenue.
Russell Meiggs, B.A., University of Oxford, Julien and Virginia Cornell Visit­
ing Professor of Classics (University of O xford). 405 Walnut Lane.
Norman A. Meinkoth, B. of Ed., Southern Illinois Teachers College; M.S. and
Ph.D., University of Illinois, Professor of Zoology. 431 West Woodland Ave­
nue, Springfield, Pa.
Bernard Morrill, B.S. in M.E., Massachusetts Institute of Technology; M.M.E.,
University of Delaware; Ph.D., University of Michigan, Henry C. and J.
Archer Turner Professor of Engineering. 21 Oberlin Avenue.
t Absent on leave, 1970-71.

198

FACULTY
Helen F. North, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Cornell University, Centennial Pro­
fessor of Classics. 604 Ogden Avenue.
t Martin Ostwald, B.A., University of Toronto; M.A., University of Chicago;
Ph.D., Columbia University, Professor of Classics. 2 Whittier Place.
Harold E. Pagliaro, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia University, Professor of
English. 536 Ogden Avenue.
t J. Roland Pennock, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. and Ph.D„ Harvard Uni­
versity, Richter Professor of Political Science. 3 Whittier Place,
t Frank C. Pierson, B.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., Columbia University,
Joseph Wharton Professor of Political Economy. 740 Ogden Avenue.
Hedley H. Rhys, B.A., West Virginia University; M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard
University, Professor of Art History. 315 Ogden Avenue.
David Rosen, B.A., New York University; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania, Professor of Mathematics. 336 North Princeton Avenue.
} David L. Rosenhan, B.A., Yeshiva College; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia Uni­
versity, Professor of Psychology. 5 W hittier Place.
David G. Smith, B.A. and M.A., University of Oklahoma; Ph.D., The Johns
Hopkins University, Professor of Political Science. 915 Harvard Avenue.

Willis J. Stetson, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., University of Pennsylvania,
Professor of Physical Education for Men and Director of Athletics. 144 North
Highland Road, Springfield, Pa.
t Peter Gram Swing, B.A. and M.A., Harvard University; Ph.D., University of
Chicago. Professor of Music and Director of the Chorus. 614 Hillborn Avenue.
Francis P. Tafoya, B.A. and M.A., University of Colorado; Ph.D., Yale Uni­
versity, Professor of French. 635 North Chester Road.
Derek Traversi, B.A. and M.A., University of Oxford, Professor of English.
401 Walnut Lane.
P. Linwood Urban, Jr., B.A., Princeton University; S.T.B., S.T.M and Th.D.,
General Theological Seminary, Professor of Religion. 20 South Princeton
Avenue.
*Peter van de Kamp, Cand. and Docts., University of Utrecht; Ph.D., Univer­
sity of California; D.Phil., University of Groningen, Edward Hicks Magill
Professor of Astronomy and Director of Sproul Observatory. 15 Wellesley
Road.
Robert M. Walker, B.A. and M.F.A., Princeton University; Ph.D., Harvard
University, Professor of Art History. 212 Elm Avenue.
IHans Wallach, Dr. Phil., University of Berlin, Centennial Professor of Psy­
chology. 604 Elm Avenue.
Neal A. Weber, B.A., M.S. and D.Sc., University of North Dakota; M.A. and
Ph.D., Harvard University, Professor of Zoology. 1 W hittier Place.
tHarrison M. Wright, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, Professor of
History. 319 Cedar Lane.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS
Elisa Asensio, M.A., Middlebury College, Associate Professor of Spanish. 500
Oakley Rd., Haverford, Pa.
t Absent on leave, 1970-71.

tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71.
•Absent on leave, fall semester, 1970-71.

199

FACULTY
George C. Avery, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania, Associate
Professor of German. 230 Haverford Avenue.
t Robert C. Bannister, B.A. and Ph.D., Yale University; B.A. and M.A., Univer­
sity of Oxford, Associate Professor of History. 606 Elm Avenue.
Carl Barus, B.A., Brown University; M.S. in E.E., Massachusetts Institute of
Technology, Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering. 8 W hittier Place.
Daniel Bennett, B.A., Harvard University; Ph.D., Stanford University, Asso­
ciate Professor of Philosophy. 16 South Princeton Avenue.
Thomas H. Blackburn, B.A., Amherst College; B.A. and M.A., University of
Oxford; Ph.D., Stanford University, Associate Professor of English. 403 Wal­
nut Lane.
t David L. Bowler, B.S. in E.E., Bucknell University; M.S. in E.E., Massachu­
setts Institute of Technology; M.A. and Ph.D., Princeton University, Associate
Professor of Electrical Engineering. 505 Yale Avenue.
Leon Bramson, B.A. and M.A., University of Chicago; Ph.D., Harvard Univer­
sity, Associate Professor of Sociology. 333 Vassar Avenue.
Lee Devin, B.A., San Jose State College; M.A. and Ph.D., Indiana University,
Associate Professor of English and Director of Theater. 7 Crum Ledge.
Raymond Doby, B.M.E. and M.S., New York University; Ph.D., University of
Pennsylvania, Associate Professor of Engineering. Dartmouth House.
Lewis H. Elverson, B.S., University of Pennsylvania, Associate Professor of
Physical Education for Men. 6 W hittier Place.
James W. England, B.A., Kansas State Teachers College; M.A. and Ph.D.,
University of Missouri, Associate Professor of Mathematics. 4 Crum Ledge.
Shel Feldman, B.A., Northwestern University; Ph.D., Yale University, Asso­
ciate Professor of Psychology. 302 Ogden Avenue.
Kenneth J. Gergen, B.A., Yale University; Ph.D., Duke University, Associate
Professor of Psychology. Millhouse, Rose Valley & Possum Hollow Rds.,
Wallingford, Pa.
Lila R. Gleitman, B.A., Antioch College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of Penn­
sylvania, Associate Professor of Linguistics. 260 Sycamore Avenue, Merion
Station, Pa.
James H. Hammons, B.A., Amherst College; M.A. and Ph.D., The Johns
Hopkins University, Associate Professor of Chemistry. 336 Haverford Place.
Stevens Heckscher, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, Associate Pro­
fessor of Mathematics. Pritchard Lane, Wallingford, Pa.
Wulff D. Heintz, Dr. rer. nat., München University, Associate Professor of
Astronomy. 311 Dartmouth Avenue.
Eleanor K. Hess, B.S. and M.S., University of Pennsylvania, Associate Pro­
fessor of Physical Education for Women. 302 N. Chester Road.
Timothy K. Kitao, B.A. and M.A., University of California, Berkeley; Ph.D.,
Harvard University, Associate Professor of Art History. 317 North Chester
Road.
Eugene A. Klotz, B.S., Antioch College; Ph.D., Yale University, Associate Pro­
fessor of Mathematics. 735 Yale Avenue.
t Absent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71.
j Absent on leave, 1970-71.

200

FACULTY
George Krugovoy, B.A., M A . and Ph.D., Philosophical Institute, Salzburg,
Austria, Associate Professor of Russian. 602 Elm Avenue.
Philip Metzidakis, B.A., Dartmouth College; Ph.D., Yale University, Associate
Professor of Spanish. 513 Elm Avenue.
Irene Moll, B.S. in Ed., University of Kansas; M.A., Texas University for
Women, Associate Professor of Physical Education for Women. The Damsite,
Wallingford, Pa.
Van Doom Ooms, B.A., Amherst College; B.A., University of Oxford; Ph.D.,
Yale University, Associate Professor of Economics. 8B W hittier Place.
Howard Pack, B.B.A., City College of New York; Ph.D., Massachusetts In­
stitute of Technology, Associate Professor of Economics. Swarthmore College.
Dean Peabody, B.A., Swarthmore College; Ph.D., Harvard University, Asso­
ciate Professor of Psychology. 521 Elm Avenue.
tjean Ashmead Perkins, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia
University, Associate Professor of French. 913 Strath Haven Avenue.
Steven I. Piker, B.A., Reed College; Ph.D., University of Washington, Asso­
ciate Professor of Anthropology. 125 Rutgers Avenue.
Ernest J. Prudente, B.S. and M.S., University of Pennsylvania, Associate Pro­
fessor of Physical Education for Meh. 914 Surrey Road, Media, Pa.
Frederic L. Pryor, B.A., Oberlin College; M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University,
Associate Professor of Economics. 3 Crum Ledge.
Kenneth S. Rawson, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.S., Cornell University;
Ph.D., Harvard University, Associate Professor of Zoology. 228 Garrett Avenue.
Alburt M. Rosenberg, B.A., Harvard University; M.S., University of Florida;
Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania, Associate Professor of Natural Science.
609 Hillborn Avenue.
Bernard Saffran, B.A., The City College of New York; Ph.D., University of
Minnesota, Associate Professor of Economics. Benjamin West House.
t Bernard S. Smith, B.A. and M.A., University of Oxford; Ph.D., Harvard Uni­
versity, Associate Professor of History. 540 Walnut Lane.
Susan Brooke Snyder, B.A., Hunter College; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia Uni­
versity, Associate Professor of English. 519 Walnut Lane.
Donald K. Swearer, B.A., M.A., and Ph.D., Princeton University; B.D. and
S.T.M., Yale Divinity School, Associate Professor of Religion. 109 Columbia
Avenue.
Peter T. Thompson, B.A., The Johns Hopkins University; Ph.D., University of
Pittsburgh, Associate Professor of Chemistry. 925 Strath Haven Avenue.
John W. Williams, B.A., Yale University; M.A. and Ph.D., University of M ichi­
gan, Associate Professor of Art History. 302 Avondale Road, Wallingford, Pa.
M. Joseph Willis, B.C.E., University of Washington; M.S., Cornell University;
Ph.D., The Johns Hopkins University, Associate Professor of Civil Engi­
neering. 306 Chestnut Lane.
XAbsent on leave, 1970-71.

tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71,

201

FACULTY
ASSISTANT PROFESSORS
Harriet Shorr Baguskas, B.A., Swarthmore College; B.F.A., Yale School of
Art and Architecture. Artist in Residence. Price’s Lane, Moylan, Pa.
fean-Claude Barré, B.A., Amherst College, Assistant Professor of French. 404
Elm Avenue.
t John R. Boecio, B.S., Polytechnic Institute of Brooklyn; Ph.D., Cornell Univer­
sity, Assistant Professor of Physics. 311 Dartmouth Avenue.
Thompson Bradley, B.A., Yale University; M.A., Columbia University, Assist­
ant Professor of Russian. 240 Ridley Creek Road, Moylan, Pa.
t Vincent S. R. Brandt, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, Assistant
Professor of Anthropology. 318 North Chester Road.
í Cyrus D. Cantrell, III, B.A., Harvard University; M.A. aftd Ph.D., Princeton
University, Assistant Professor of Physics. 519 Walnut Lane.
Clement Cottingham, B.A., Lincoln University; M.P.A., University of Cali­
fornia, Los Angeles; Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley, Assistant
Professor of Political Science and Director of Black Studies. 540 Walnut Lane.
William C. B. Cullen, B.A., Wake Forest University, Assistant Professor of
Physical Education for Men. 110 Columbia Avenue.
Gomer H. Davies, B.S., East Stroudsburg State College; Ed.M., Temple Uni­
versity, Assistant Professor of Physical Education for Men. 225 Cornell Avenue.
Roland B. di Franco, B.S., Fordham University; M.S., Rutgers University;
Ph.D., Indiana University, Assistant Professor of Mathematics. 317 North
Chester Road.
James D. Freeman, B.A. and M.A., Harvard University, Assistant Professor of
Music and Director of the Orchestra. 8 Crum Ledge.
Julia Haig Gaisser, B.A., Pembroke College; M.A., Harvard University; Ph.D.,
University of Edinburgh, Assistant Professor of Classics. 317 N. Chester Road.
Thomas W. Hawkins, Jr., B.A., Houghton College; M.S., University of Roch­
ester; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, Assistant Professor of Mathematics. 515
Elm Avenue.
t Patrick Henry, B.A., Harvard University; B.A. and M.A., University of
Oxford; M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University, Assistant Professor of Religion. 915
Harvard Avenue.
James C. Hickman, B.A., Oberlin College; Ph.D., University of Oregon,
Assistant Professor of Biology. 404 Elm Avenue.
t Raymond F. Hopkins, B.A., Ohio Wesleyan University; M.A., Ohio State Uni­
versity; M.A. and Ph.D., Yale University, Assistant Professor of Political
Science. 2 Crum Ledge.
James R. Hutchison, B.S., Wittenberg University; Ph.D., Princeton University,
Assistant Professor of Chemistry. Benjamin West House.
John B. Jenkins, B.S. and M.S., Utah State University; Ph.D., University of
California, Los Angeles, Assistant Professor of Biology. 318 North Chester
Road.
Robert O. Keohane, B.A., Shimer College; M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, Assistant Professor of Political Science. 317 North Chester Road.
fAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71.

t Absent on leave, 1970-71.

202

FACULTY
George E. McCully, B.A., Brown University; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia Uni­
versity, Assistant Professor of History. 3865 Gradyville Rd., Newtown Square,
Pa.
Robert C. Mitchell, B.A., College of Wooster; B.D., Union Theological Semi­
nary; M.A. and Ph.D., Northwestern University, Assistant Professor of
Sociology. 307 Lafayette Avenue.
Thomas N. Mitchell, B.A. and M.A., National University of Ireland; Ph.D.,
Cornell University, Assistant Professor of Classics. 220 Vassar Avenue.
Hans-Eberhard Mueller, B.A., Hunter College; M.A., University of California,
Berkeley, Assistant Professor of Sociology. 515 Elm Avenue.
Hans F. Oberdiek, B.S. and Ph.D., University of Wisconsin, Assistant Pro­
fessor of Philosophy. 211 Elm Avenue.
tG . Stuart Patterson, Jr., B.S. and M.S., Massachusetts Institute of Technology;
Ph.D., The Johns Hopkins University, Assistant Professor of Engineering. 606
North Chester Road.
Charles Raff, B.A., University of Rochester; M.A. and Ph.D., Brown Univer­
sity, Assistant Professor of Philosophy. 915 Harvard Avenue.
t Gilbert P. Rose, B.A., University of California, Berkeley, Assistant Professor
of Classics. 22 West Ridge Road, Media, Pa.
Jennie-Keith Ross, B.A., Pomona College; M.A. and Ph.D., Northwestern
University, Assistant Professor of Anthropology. Swarthmore College.
Robert Roza, B.A., University of Toronto; M.A. and Ph.D., Princeton Univer­
sity, Assistant Professor of French. 404 Strath Haven Avenue.
Robert E. Savage, B.A., Oberlin College; M.S. and Ph.D., University of Wis­
consin, Assistant Professor of Biology. 409 College Avenue.
t Richard Schuldenfrei, B.A. and M.A., University of Pennsylvania, Assistant
Professor of Philosophy. Swarthmore College.
t Victor K. Schütz, B.E.E. and M.A. in Mathematics, University of Detroit;
Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania, Assistant Professor of Engineering. 1317
Grenox Road, Wynnewood, Pa.
t John S. Shackford, B.A., Carleton College; M.A., Indiana University, Assistant
Professor of English. Swarthmore College.
Richard Sharvy, B.A., Reed College; M.A. and Ph.D., Wayne State Univer­
sity, Assistant Professor of Philosophy. 300 Avondale Road, Wallingford, Pa.
Simone V. Smith, Licence es Lettres, University of Grenoble, Assistant Pro­
fessor of French. 125 Forest Lane.
t Richard Terdiman, B.A., Amherst College; Ph.D., Yale University, Assistant
Professor of French. 409 Elm Avenue.
Jeffrey Travers, B.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, Assistant Professor of
Psychology. 409 V2 Elm Avenue.
tjon Van Til, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., University of North Carolina;
Ph.D., University of California, Berkeley, Assistant Professor of Sociology.
Swarthmore College.
t Absent on leave, 1970-71.
tAbsent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71.

203

FACULTY
Jerome H. Wood, Jr., B.A., Howard University; Ph.D., Brown University,
Assistant Professor of History. Swarthmore College.
Margaret A. Yarvin, B.A., Swarthmore College, Assistant Professor of History.
Swarthmore College.
Mary Ann Young, B.S., Slippery Rock State College. Assistant Professor of
Physical Education for Women. 117 South Chester Road.
*Tsing Yuan, B.A. and M.A., George Washington University; Ph.D., University
of Pennsylvania, Assistant Professor of History. 842 Windemere Avenue, Drexel
Hill, Pa.
INSTRUCTORS
Joseph W. Bernheim, B.A., Swarthmore College, Instructor in Psychology.
1008 S. 49th Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Molly Faries, B.A., College of Wooster; M.A., University of Michigan, Instructor
in Art History. 915 Harvard Avenue.
Harry Harding, Jr., B.A., Princeton University; M.A., Stanford University,
Instructor in Political Science. Swarthmore College.
Jane E. Hedley, B.A., University of Victoria; M.A., Bryn Mawr College, In­
structor in English Literature. Swarthmore College.
Uwe Henke, M.A., University of Pennsylvania, Instructor in Philosophy. 3500
Race Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Philip M. Keith, B.A., Amherst College; M.A., Bryn Mawr College, Instructor
in English. 4218 Walnut Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Paul Lutzker, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.A., The Johns Hopkins
University, Instructor in Political Science. 519 Walnut Lane.
t Victor C. Novick, B.A., Reed College, Instructor in Anthropology. 215 Cornell
Avenue.
Thomas L. Sherman, B.A., Yale University; M.A., Stanford University, In­
structor in English. 224 South Chester Road.
David H. Steinbrook, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.F.A., Princeton
University, Instructor in Music. 317 North Chester Road.
Douglas M. Weiss, Instructor in Physical Education for Men. Swarthmore
College.
LECTURERS AND ASSISTANTS
Bernard E. Anderson, B.A., Livingstone College; M.A., Michigan State Uni­
versity; Ph.D., University of Pennsylvania, Visiting Lecturer in Economics
(University of Pennsylvania). Ashbourne Manor, Philadelphia, Pa.
Joseph Bailey, Associate in Studio Arts. 1231 Arch Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Leonard E. Barrett, B.A., Albright College; B.D., United Theological Sem­
inary; M.A. and Ph.D., Temple University, Visiting Lecturer in Religion
(Temple University). 1536 Coolidge Avenue, Philadelphia, Pa.
Patricia Boyer, B.S., Trenton State College; M.A., New York University, Lec­
turer in Physical Education for Women. 817 Parkridge Drive, Media, Pa.
♦Absent on leave, fall semester, 1970-71.
f Absent on leave, spring semester, 1970-71.

204

FACULTY
Alice Brodhead, B.S. and M.A., University of Pennsylvania, Lecturer in Educa­
tion and Director of Student Teaching. 316 Ogden Avenue.
Will Brown, B.A., Gettysburg College; B.F.A., University of Pennsylvania,
Associate in Studio Arts. 429 Catherine Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Raymond P. Bub, B.A., Swarthmore College, Assistant in Studio Arts. Swarthmore College.
Olga Fernandez Connor, Bach, en Let., Institute de la Vibrora, Havana; M.A.,
University of Pennsylvania, Lecturer in Spanish. 268 Hathaway Lane, Wynnewood, Pa.
Jane A. Coppock, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.F.A., Princeton University,
Lecturer in Music. 1 2 3 John Street, Princeton, N. J.
Brooke P. Cottman, B.A., Duke University, Assistant in Physical Education for
Men. 315 Yale Avenue.
Caroline M. Cunningham, B.A. and Ph.D., Bryn Mawr College; M.A., Wes­
leyan University, Lecturer in Music. 735 Millbrook Lane, Haverford, Pa.
Urbain J. DeWinter, B.A., Georgetown University; M.A.T., Assumption Col­
lege, Assistant in Spanish. 4742 Osage Avenue, Philadelphia, Pa.
John Dolan, B.A., Brooklyn College; Ph.D., Stanford University, Visiting Lec­
turer in Philosophy (Rockefeller University). Swarthmore College.
Gloria Carey Evans, B.A., Western Washington College of Education; M.S.,
University of Washington; Ph.D., Stanford University, Consultant for Testing
and Guidance. 205 Linden Lane, Wallingford, Pa.
Janice C. Fellman, B.S., Ursinus College, Lecturer in Physical Education for
Women. 2401 Martingale Rd., Media, Pa.
Mary K. Gergen, B.A. and M.A., University of Minnesota, Assistant in Psy­
chology. Millhouse, Rose Valley and Possum Hollow Roads, Wallingford, Pa.
Carolyn G. Heilbrun, B.A., Wellesley College; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia
University, Visiting Lecturer in English Literature (Columbia University).
151 Central Park West, New York, N. Y.
Nannerl Henry, B.A., Wellesley College; B.A. and M.A., University of Oxford;
Ph.D., Yale University, Lecturer in Political Science. 317 North Chester Road.
John L. Hershey, B.A., Eastern Mennonite College; M.A. and Ph.D., University
of Virginia, Lecturer and Research Associate in Astronomy. 314 Dartmouth
Avenue.
Robinson G. Hollister, Jr., B.A., Amherst College; Ph.D., Stanford Univer­
sity, Visiting Lecturer in Economics (Princeton University). Mathematica,
Inc., Princeton, New Jersey.
Helen Manning Hunter, B.A., Smith College; Ph.D., Radcliffe College, Lec­
turer in Economics. Featherbed Lane, Haverford, Pa.
Gilbert Kalish, B.A., Columbia University, Associate in Performance (Music).
Swarthmore College.
Michael C. Korn, Diploma in Organ, Curtis Institute of Music, Associate in
Performance (Music). 1414 71st Avenue, Philadelphia, Pa.

205

FACULTY
Vicki W. Kramer, B.A., Wellesley College; M.A., Radcliffe College; Ph.D.,
Harvard University, Lecturer in English. 2408 Golf Road, Philadelphia, Pa.
Samuel T. Lachs, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.H.L., Jewish Theo­
logical Seminary; Ph.D., Dropsie College, Visiting Lecturer in Religion
(Haverford College). 250 S. 18th Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Sarah Lee Lippincott, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Swarthmore Col­
lege, Lecturer and Research Associate in Astronomy. 510 Elm Avenue.
James J. McAdoo, Assistant in Physical Education for Men. 513 East Bringhurst, Germantown, Pa.
Anne Ménard, Lecturer in French. Swarthmore College.
Elke Plaxton, B.A., Brigham Young University; M.A., University of Colorado,
Lecturer in German. 4209 Baltimore Avenue, Philadelphia, Pa.
Barbara Z. Presseisen, B.A., Brandeis University; M.A.T., Harvard University,
Lecturer in Education. 1530 Locust Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Lorraine Schecter, B.A., University of Connecticut; M.F.A., University of Penn­
sylvania, Associate in Studio Arts. 208 So. 42nd Street, Philadelphia, Pa.
Helen P. Shatagin, Visiting Lecturer in Russian. 307 Cornell Avenue.
Robert M. Smart, B.A., Curtis Institute of Music; M.A., Westminster Choir
College, College Organist and Associate in Performance (Music). 18 Oberlin
Avenue.
Kit Yin-Tieng Snyder, B.S., College of the City of New York; M.A., University
of Michigan, Associate in Studio Arts. 733 Old Lancaster Road, Bryn Mawr, Pa.
Barbara Yost Stewart, B.A., Swarthmore College, Assistant in Biology. 543
Marietta Avenue.
Anita A. Summers, B.A., Hunter College; M.A., University of Chicago, Lec­
turer in Economics. 641 Revere Road, Merion Station, Pa.
Robert Teitelbaum, B.A., East Tennessee State University. Technical Director
in Theater. Swarthmore College.
Jean L. Tomezsko, B.A., Pennsylvania State University, Assistant in Biology.
4 Prince Eugene Lane, Media, Pa.
Paul Zukofsky, B.M. and M.S., Juilliard School of Music, Associate in Per­
formance (Music). Swarthmore College.

206

FACULTY

Standing Committees of the Faculty
Academic Requirements: Moore, Chairman.
Hammons, Metzidakis, North, Ooms, Skeath, Stott, Townsend, Walker,
Willis.
Admissions and Scholarships: Quesenbery, Chairman.
Bryant, Carpenter, Davies, England, N. Henry, Peabody, Pryor, Rhys,
Skeath, Townsend.
Collection: Shane, Chairman.
Beik, Bradley, Closson, Elmore, Lange, Rhys, D. Thompson.
Computer: Mullins, Chairman.
M. Connor, Cook, Gergen, Gilbert, Hershey, R. Mitchell, Rosenberg,
Schütz, Tafoya.
Cooper: Klotz, Chairman.
Closson, Freeman, Mangelsdorf, Pagliaro, Piker, Shane.
Council on Educational Policy: Gilbert, Chairman.
Cross, Mangelsdorf, Oberdiek, Piker, Rosen, Savage, Urban.
Curriculum: Heckscher, Chairman.
Bennett, Bilaniuk, Field, Gilbert, Govan, Kitao, McCrumm, Moore,
Snyder, Stott.
Faculty and Staff Benefits: Cratsley, Chairman.
M. Connor, Cook, Fehnel, Roza, Saffran, Shero.
Fellowships from Other Institutions: Meinkoth, Chairman.
Bowler, Faries, Hawkins, Keohane, T. Mitchell, Raff, Van Til, H. Williams,
Young.
Library: Govan, Chairman.
Baguskas, Barré, Gilbert, Maass, McCully, Novick (1st semester), Sharvy,
van de Kamp, Weber, Yuan (2nd semester).
Master of Arts: Rawson, Chairman.
Heintz, Mautner, Raff, Wright.
Physical Education and Athletics: Stetson, Chairman.
Hess, Lippincott, Lutzker, Prudente, Rosen, Skeath.
Promotion and Tenure: Cross, Chairman.
Beik, Gilbert, Heald, Morrill, North.
Research Ethics: Feldman, Chairman.
Barus, Beik, Gaty, Oberdiek, Ross, Savage, D. Smith.
Research Support: Morrill, Chairman.
Cratsley, Krugovoy, Raff, Saffran, Schrader, P. Thompson, H. Williams.
Schedule of Classes: Moore, Chairman.
Cohn, Doby, Elverson, Gaty, Hawkins, Heald, Urban.
Swarthmore Awards and Fellowships: Asensio, Chairman.
DiFranco, Gaty, Keighton, Keohane, Livingston, T. Mitchell, Moll, Town­
send.
Teacher Education: Gilbert, Chairman.
Bernheim, Bramson, Brodhead, Hutchison, Moore, Shane, Sherman, Skeath,
S. Smith.
Teaching Technology: Schütz, Chairman.
Avery, Brodhead, Cross, DiFranco, Gaty, Gleitman, Govan, Mullins,
Rawson, J. Williams.

207

FACULTY
Travel Allowance: Maass, Chairman.
Bradley, Henke, Livingston, R. Mitchell.
Use of College Facilities by Outside Organizations: Cook, Chairman.
Flemister, Hess, Shane, Stanton, Stetson.
Secretary to the Faculty: Blackburn.
Note: Undergraduate members of certain committees will be appointed in the
fall.

Divisions and Departments
I. DIVISION OF THE HUMANITIES
Susan B. Snyder, Chairman.
Art History, Robert M. Walker, Chairman.
Classics, Helen F. North, Chairman.
English Literature, Harold E. Pagliaro, Chairman.
History, Harrison M. Wright, Chairman.
Mathematics, David Rosen, Chairman.
Modern Languages, Francis P. Tafoya, Chairman.
Music, James D. Freeman, Acting Chairman.
Philosophy
Psychology, Kenneth J. Gergen, Chairman.
Religion, P. Linwood Urban, Chairman
II. DIVISION OF THE SOCIAL SCIENCES
James A. Field, Jr., Chairman.
Economics, Van Doom Ooms, Acting Chairman.
Engineering, Samuel T. Carpenter, Chairman.
History, Harrison M. Wright, Chairman.
Mathematics, David Rosen, Chairman.
Philosophy
Political Science, David G. Smith, Chairman.
Psychology, Kenneth J. Gergen, Chairman.
Sociology and Anthropology, Leon Bramson, Chairman.
III. DIVISION OF THE NATURAL SCIENCES AND
ENGINEERING
Olexa-Myron Bilaniuk, Chairman
Astronomy, Peter van de Kamp, Chairman.
Biology, Norman A. Meinkoth, Chairman.
Chemistry, Walter B. Keighton, Jr., Chairman.
Engineering, Samuel T. Carpenter, Chairman.
Mathematics, David Rosen, Chairman.
Philosophy
Physics, Mark A. Heald, Chairman.
Psychology, Kenneth J. Gergen, Chairman.

208

A D M IN IST R A T IO N
P R E S I D E N T ’S O F F I C E
Robert D. Cross, B.A., M.A. and Ph.D., Harvard University, President.
Mary Niemczewski, Secretary.
Mark W. Maxwell, B.A., Hamilton College; M.A., Yale University, Assistant
to the President.
Barbara J. Lawton, Secretary.
V IC E -P R E S ID E N TS ’ OFFICE
Edward K. Cratsley, B.A., College of Wooster; M.B.A. and D.C.S., Harvard
University, Vice-President—(Administration) and Controller.
Joseph B. Shane, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A., University of Pennsylvania,
Vice-President—Public Relations and Alumni Affairs.
Richard M. Schrader, B.A. and M.B.A., Cornell University, Associate Develop­
ment Officer.
Pauline M. Carroll, Alison Carswell Naylor, B.A., Swarthmore College, Secre­
taries.
P R O V O S T ’S O F F I C E
Charles E. Gilbert, B.A., Haverford College; Ph.D., Northwestern University,
Provost.
Lewis R. Gaty, II, B.A., Swarthmore College, Director of Institutional Re­
search.
D E A N S’ OFFICES
Gilmore Stott, B.A. and M.A., University of Cincinnati; B.A. and M.A., Uni­
versity of Oxford; M.A. and Ph.D., Princeton University. Dean of Academic
Advising and Counseling and Lecturer in Philosophy.
John M. Moore, B.A., Park College; B.D., Union Theological Seminary; M.A.,
Harvard University; Ph.D., Columbia University, Associate Dean and Registrar.
J. Edward Skeath, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Illinois, Acting Dean of Men.
Deborah Townsend, B.A. and M.A., University of Michigan, Dean of Women.
David L. Closson, B.A., Lincoln University, Assistant Dean of Students.
Lynne Davis Mifflin, B.A. and M.A., Swarthmore College, Director of Financial
Aid and Adviser to Foreign Students.

209

ADMINISTRATION
Herbert G. Zerof, B.A., Stetson University, Ed.D., University of Pennsylvania,
Consulting Psychologist.
Gloria Carey Evans, B.A., Western Washington College of Education; M.S.,
University of Washington; Ph.D., Stanford University, Consultant for Testing
and Guidance.
Head Residents in Dormitories:
Virginia von Frankenberg, B.A., University of Nebraska, Coordinator of
Women’s Dormitories, Parrish Hall.
Karen Flack Bonnell, B.A. Bryn Mawr College; M.S., Temple University,
Woolman House.
Virginia E. Myers, Willets Hall.
Patricia Michener, B.A., Wilson College, Worth Hall.
Sally Van Til, B.A. and M.A., University of California, Wharton Hall, F
Section.
Candace Widmer, B.A., Gettysburg College; M.A., Temple University,
Mary Lyon 4.
Secretaries to the Deans:
D. Gretchen Bowen, Rosamond W. Garrett, B.A., Wilson College, Mildred
Irwin, Myrtle R. Keeny, B.A., Dickinson College, Vera B. Morrison.
A D M ISSIO N S O FFICE
William D. Quesenbery, Jr., B.A., Randolph Macon College; M.A., Columbia
University, Dean of Admissions.
Douglas C. Thompson, B.S., Swarthmore College, Associate Dean of Admis­
sions.
Barbara Pearson Lange, Associate Dean of Admissions.
Fletcher J. Bryant, Jr., B.A., Lincoln University; M.Re. Ed., Boston University
School of Theology; B.D., Colgate-Rochester Divinity School, Assistant Dean
of Admissions.
Edith DuBose Streams, B.A., Swarthmore College, Assistant to the Dean of
Admissions.
Margaret W. Moore, B.A., Park College; M.A. and Ph.D., Columbia University,
Administrative Assistant.
Emily Bonsall, Winifred J. Hall, Secretaries.
R E G I S T R A R ’S O F F I C E
John M. Moore, B.A., Park College; B.D., Union Theological Seminary; M.A.,
Harvard University; Ph. D., Columbia University, Registrar.
Marjorie L. Webb, B.A., University of Delaware; Jane H. Thompson, B.A.,
Swarthmore College; Edith Bartholomew, Secretaries.
LIB RARY STAFF
College Library
James F. Govan, B.A., University of the South; M.A., Emory University;
Ph.D., Johns Hopkins University, Librarian.

210

ADMINISTRATION
Margery J. Hiltz, Secretary to the Librarian.
Martha A. Connor, B.S., M.A., University of Pennsylvania; B.S. in L.S.,
Drexel Institute, Associate Librarian.
Anne Perkins; Pauline Marshall, B.S., Simmons College; Ethel N.
Wright, Assistants, Serials Section.
Doris Beik, B.A. and B.S. in L.S., State University of New York at Albany,
Head, Cataloging Department.
Elizabeth L. Harrar, B.A., University of Delaware; M.A., University
of Pennsylvania; B.S. in L.S., Drexel Institute; Barbara Trogler,
B.A., Hood College; M.S. in L.S., Drexel Institute, Catalogers.
Mary L. Frorer, B.A. and M.A., Swarthmore College; Judith W.
Skreiner, B.A., University of Western Australia, Assistant Cata­
logers.
Josephine Hopkins; Doris Pitman Moist; Doris- Redfield; Barbara
H. Schleyer, B.S., Simmons College; Charlotte Weiss, Assistants.
Jane H. Aaron, B.A., Birmingham-Southern College; M.S. in L.S., Drexel
Institute, Head, Order Department.
Mary C. Kerbaugh, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.S. in L.S.,
Drexel Institute, Assistant Order Librarian.
Monique Constantino, Assistant.
Howard H. Williams, B.A., Lake Forest College; M.A. and B.S. in L.S.,
Columbia University, Head, Reference Department.
Lois G. Peterson, B.A., Oberlin College; Elizabeth H. Phillips, B.A.,
Swarthmore College, Assistants.
Catherine J. Smith, B.A., Swarthmore College; B.S. in L.S., Drexel Institute,
Head, Circulation Department.
George K. Huber, B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M.S. in L.S.,
Drexel Institute, Assistant Head.
Charles Seeburger, B.A. and M.A., Bowling Green University; Virginia
von Frankenberg, B.A., University of Nebraska; Lee Williams, B.S.
in Ed., Delaware State College; Martha Scott; Judith W. Skreiner,
B.A., University of Western Australia; Josephine Smith, B.A.,
Swarthmore College, Assistants.
Eleanor A. Maass, B.A., M.S., University of Illinois; Ph.D., University of
Wisconsin, Science Librarian.
Josephine Smith, B.A., Swarthmore College, Assistant. Nancy Wyllie,
B.A., Oberlin College.
Friends Historical Library
Dorothy G. Harris, B.A., Wellesley College; B.S. in L.S., Drexel Institute;
M.A., University of Pennsylvania, Acting Director.
Claire B. Shetter, Philadelphia Musical Academy; Eleanor B. Mayer, B.A.,
Ohio Wesleyan University; Jane M. Thorson, Cornell College; Nancy
Speers, Swarthmore College, Assistants.
Swarthmore College Peace Collection:
Bernice Berry Nichols, B.A., University of Missouri, Curator.
Sylvia L. Haviland, B.A., Goddard College, Assistant.
Honorary Curators of the Friends Historical Library
Anna Pettit Broomell, Frances Williams Browin, Henry J. Cadbury, La
Verne Forbush, James R. Frorer, William Hubben, Caroline Biddle Malin,
Richmond P. Miller, Hadassah M. L. Holcombe, Edith Williams Way.

211

ADMINISTRATION
Advisory Council of the Swarthmore College Peace Collection
Irwin Abrams, Merle Curti, Alfred Hassler, Ernst Posner, Joseph B. Shane,
Frederick B. Tolies, E. Raymond Wilson.
COMPUTER CENTER
Edgar R. Mullins, B.A., Grinnell College; M.A. and Ph.D., University of
Illinois, Director of Computer Education and Activities.
Ronald Anton, B.S., Drexel University, Director of the Center.
BUSINESS OFFIC E
G. Caroline Shero, B.A., Swarthmore College; M.B.A., University of Pennsyl­
vania, Associate Controller, Accounting and Finance.
Harold L. Frederick, Jr., B.S., Juniata College, Accountant.
Anna Jeffries, Freda Thomas, Margaret A. Thompson, Ellen R. Augsberger,
Assistants.
Lewis T. Cook, Jr., B.A., St. Lawrence University; M.S., Pennsylvania State
College, Associate Controller, Business Affairs.
Ruth B. Walker, Secretary; Barbara St. John, Purchasing Clerk.
Normund L. Bandrevics, B.B.A., University of Latvia, Manager of Bookstore.
Daisy S. Jeffery, Mary Naughton, Assistants.
Marguerite Clifford, Edith Cohen, Olga A. Hummer, Julia Lemon, Edith Wood­
land, Stenographic Staff.
Judy Grace Feiy, Helen Burgoyne, Dorothy H. Olson, Switchboard Operators.
Arlene Delozier, Postmistress.
B U IL D IN G S AND G R O U N D S D E PA R T M E N T
William M. Stanton, Jr., B.A., University of Wisconsin, Director of Physical
Plant.
Joseph E. Spafford, B.S., University of Missouri, Planning Engineer.
Franklin H. Briggs, B.A., Earlham College; Richardson Fields; David Melrose;
Harold Hofman; Henry Peirsol, Assistants to the Director of Physical Plant.
June Carnall, Dormitory & Housing Coordinator.
Veronica Sullivan, Francis Kavanaugh, Margaret R. Shaw, Sarah Hastings,
Rosalie F. Mailer, Secretaries.
Abbie Jones, Lily Mari, Virginia E. Myers, Rachel Williams, Phyllis Woodcock,
Dormitory Assistants.
John C. Wister, B.A., Harvard University; D.Sc., Swarthmore College, Director
Emeritus of the A rthur Hoyt Scott Horticultural Foundation.
Joseph W. Oppe, B.S., Marietta College; M.S., University of Idaho, Director of
the A rthur Hoyt Scott Horticultural Foundation and Swarthmore College
Horticulturist.
David Melrose, Assistant Director.
Elaine E. Innes, Secretary.

212

ADMINISTRATION
ALUMNI AND FUND OFFICES
Kathryn Bassett, Director.
Esther Kelley, Alumni Recorder.
Elizabeth Campbell, Elinor B. Eleniewski, Mary C. Kasper, Secretaries.
NEWS OFFICE
Maralyn Orbison Gillespie, B.A., Swarthmore College, Director.
Rhea B. Seagull, B.A., Douglass College, Assistant Director.
Mildred Strain, Secretary.
CAREER PLA N N IN G AND PLACEMENT
Judith Katustin Katz, Director.
H E A L T H SERVICE
Morris A. Bowie, B.A., University of Colorado; M.D., Harvard University, Col­
lege Physician.
Harold C. Roxby, B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.D., Temple University,
Associate College Physician.
Erwin R. Schmidt, Jr., B.S., Yale University; M.D., University of Wisconsin,
Consulting Orthopedic Surgeon.
Consulting Psychiatrists:
Leon J. Saul, B.A. and M.A., Columbia University; M.D., Harvard University.
J. W. Lyons, B.A., University of Scranton; MD., University of Pennsylvania.
Donald V. Stevenson, B.A. and M.D., Universidad de Cartagena.
Silas L. Warner, B.A., Princeton University; M.D., Northwestern University.
Nurses:
Elizabeth Cozine, R.N., E. Elizabeth McGeary, R.N., Helen R. Martin, R.N.,
Joan Morton, R.N., Ida Moore Thomas, R.N.
Janet B. Hazzard, R.N., Secretary.
DEPA RTM EN TA L SECRETARIES, ASSISTANTS
AND TECH N IC IA N S
Art History: Karen Lindesmith, B.A., Indiana University.
Astronomy: Mary MacD. Jackson, B.A., Swarthmore College; Nan Jones;
Elizabeth H. Kuhlman, B.A., Mount Holyoke College; Louise H. Mitchell,
B.S., West Chester State College; Michael D. Worth, A.A., Keystone Junior
College.
Biology: Lloyd Merritts; Gloria Rosen, M.A., Mt. Holyoke College.
Chemistry: Ursula M. Davis, B.S., MT (ASCP) Colby Junior College; Jacqueline
Bray; Edward C. Kehl.
Economics: Eleanor Greitzer; Mary E. Renneisen.
Electronics Technician: John J. Dougherty.
Engineering: Frances Shero, B.A., Swarthmore College; Theodore T. Bartholo­
mew; Josephine Booth; T. F. Hockman.

213

ADMINISTRATION
English Literature and Humanities Division: Thelma M. Miller.
History: Eleanor W. Bennett.
Mathematics: Dorothy D. Blythe.
Modern Languages: Martha Dieffenbach; Natalie Kruczaj.
Music: Mary G. Gatens.
Philosophy: Alta K. Schmidt.
Physical Education for Men: Elizabeth Bassett.
Physical Education for Women: Esther R. Gosser.
Physics: John R. Andrews; Anna V. DeRose.
Political Science: Eleanor Greitzer; Mary E. Renneisen.
Psychology: Virginia S. Greer; Otto Hebei.
Religion: Alta K. Schmidt.
Sociology and Anthropology: Pauline B. Federman; Marie C. Perkins.
Studio Arts: Wallace C. Ayres, B.A., Swarthmore College, M.Ed., Harvard
University.

214

V ISIT IN G EX A M IN E R S
DEGREES C O N FER R ED
AW ARDS A N D D ISTIN C TIO N S
EN R O LLM EN T STATISTICS
PLA N OF COLLEGE GRO UNDS

Commencement in the Scott Auditorium

V ISIT IN G E X A M IN E R S 1970
ART HISTORY: Professor John W. McCoubrey, University of Pennsylvania;
Professor Charles Mitchell, Bryn Mawr College; Professor James Snyder, Bryn
Mawr College.
BIOLOGY: Professor William T. Battin, State University of New York at
Binghamton; Dr. A. Duncan Chiquoine, Hamilton College; Professor Melvin
J. Cohen, Yale University; Professor Dietrich Kessler, Haverford College.
CHEMISTRY: Professor Carl von Frankenberg, University of Delaware; Pro­
fessor Frank B. Mallory, Bryn Mawr College; Professor Wallace H. McCurdy,
Jr., University of Delaware.
CLASSICS: Professor Anne Burnett, University of Chicago; Professor Robert
E. A. Palmer, University of Pennsylvania.
ECONOMICS: Professor David F. Bradford, Princeton University; Professor
Richard N. Cooper, Yale University; Professor Peter A. Diamond, Massachu­
setts Institute of Technology; Professor Holland Hunter, Haverford College;
Mrs. Alice M. Rivlin, The Brookings Institution; Professor Robert Summers,
University of Pennsylvania.
ENGINEERING: Professor Ralph C. Walker, Bucknell University.
ENGLISH LITERATURE: Professor Michael Bell, Princeton University; Pro­
fessor Joseph Kramer, Bryn Mawr College; Professor Lowry Nelson, Yale Uni­
versity; Professor Edward Tayler, Columbia University; Professor Helen
Vendler, Boston University.
HISTORY: Professor Herman Ausubel, Columbia University; Professor Eliza­
beth Brown, Brooklyn College; Professor F. Hilary Conroy, University of Penn­
sylvania; Professor Allen F. Davis, Temple University; Professor Alfred J.
Rieber, University of Pennsylvania; Professor Alain Silvera, Bryn Mawr Col­
lege; Professor Maynard W. Swanson, Yale University; Professor Edward M.
Peters, University of Pennsylvania.
MATHEMATICS: Professor Willard E. Baxter, University of Delaware; Pro­
fessor Richard Clelland, University of Pennsylvania; Professor Adam Kleppner,
University of Maryland; Professor John Thorpe, State University of New York
at Stony Brook.
MODERN LANGUAGES
FRENCH: Professor Howard Garey, Yale University; Professor Mario
Maurin, Bryn Mawr College.
GERMAN: Professor Adolf Klarmann, University o f Pennsylvania.
RUSSIAN: Professor Herman Ermolaev, Princeton University; Professor
Elliott Mossman, University of Pennsylvania.
SPANISH: Professor Ciriaco Moron-Arroyo, University o f Pennsylvania.
MUSIC: Professor Robert P. Morgan, Temple University.
PHILOSOPHY: Professor Richard J. Bernstein, Haverford College; Professor
Ann Brentlinger, University of Massachusetts; Professor William A. Christian,
Yale University; Professor James W. Cornman, University of Pennsylvania;
Professor John Dolan, The Rockefeller University; Professor William Pohle,
Herbert H. Lehman College, City University of N ew York; Professor Anthony
D. Woozley, University of Virginia; Professor Saul Kripke, The Rockefeller
University.

216

VISITING

EXAMINERS

PHYSICS: Professor Donald N. Langenberg, University of Pennsylvania; Pro­
fessor John R. Olson, Bryn Mawr College; Professor Robert E. Warner, Oberlin
College.
POLITICAL SCIENCE: Professor Henry Bienen, Princeton University; Pro­
fessor Milton C. Cummings, Jr., The Johns Hopkins University; Professor J.
Woodford Howard, Jr., The Johns Hopkins University; Professor Holland
Hunter, Haverford College; Professor John D. Lewis, Oberlin College; Pro­
fessor Kenneth N. Waltz, Brandeis University.
PSYCHOLOGY: Professor James Bryan, Northwestern University; Professor
Henry Gleitman, University of Pennsylvania; Professor Edward E. Jones, D uke
University; Dr. Jane Piliavin, University of Pennsylvania; Professor Robert
Rescorla, Yale University; Dr. Sheldon White, Harvard University; Professor
David Winter, Wesleyan University; Dr. Sarah Winter, Wesleyan University;
Professor Carl Zuckerman, Brooklyn College.
RELIGION: Professor William A. Christian, Yale University; Professor
Howard C. Kee, Bryn Mawr College; Professor Jaroslav Pelikan, Yale Uni­
versity.
SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY: Professor E. Digby Baltzell, Uni­
versity of Pennsylvania; Professor Leonard Blumberg, Temple University; Pro­
fessor A. Thomas Kirsch, Princeton University; Professor Robert A. LeVine,
University of Chicago; Professor Dean McCannell, Temple University; Pro­
fessor Nan Pendrell, Chatham College; Professor Gilbert Rozman, Princeton
University; Professor Eugene Schneider, Bryn Mawr College.

217

DEG REES CO NFER R ED
June 8, 1970
BACHELOR OF ARTS
Michael Sherman Aldrich, Psychology
Margaret Dale Allen, Zoology
Janet R. Allison, Psychology
Kristen Anderson, History
Stephen K. Arbuthnot,
English Literature
Janice Kay Archer, Art History
Javier A. Arrastia, Philosophy
Douglas Arnold Bacon, Biology
Sarah Bancroft, Greek
Frank Barch, Biology
William Hale Barton, Psychology
Anita Louisa Beck, Religion
Brigitte Schmidt Bell, Religion
Russell Alan Benghiat,
English Literature
John C. W. Bennett, Economics
Marvin Berg, Sociology-Anthropology
Lauren Nash Bernstein, Psychology
Paula Bernstein, Psychology
John William Black, History
Douglas H. Blair, Economics
Arthur Ray Block, Political Science
Gabriella M. Boden, History
Walter Cammack Bond, Mathematics
Michael Allen Boni, Mathematics
Susan Jane Bonthron, A rt History
Paula Anne Braveman, Philosophy
John Worth Braxton, Botany
Barbara P. Briggs, Zoology
John Edward Briggs, History
Alan Douglas Brooks, History
Prudence Elizabeth Brown,
Sociology-Anthropology
Michael Alan Brownlee, Zoology
Lauren Eugene Brubaker,
Sociology-Anthropology
Raymond Paul Bub,
Sociology-Anthropology
*As of the Class of 1969
t With concentration in Black Studies

218

Harold Buchanan*!, Mathematics
Frank Duffryn Bums, Jr., Biology
Theodore Burton, IV, Economics
Bruce Monroe Bush,
Sociology-Anthropology
John Alexander Byers, Zoology
David L. Camp, Economics
Deborah Joan Carey,
English Literature
Stephen Hughes Carr, Zoology
John William Chaffee, History
Claudia Chanlett, Psychology
George Bernard Clairmont, History
Beverly Lyon Clark,
English Literature
Roger D. Clark,
Sociology-Anthropology
Stephanie Lucy Cooley,
English Literature
John Michael Cooper,
Political Science
Mary Anne Cornish,
English Literature
Sarah Louise Sproul Cotterill,
English Literature
James G. Cuthbertson, Biology
Mark Howard Daniel, History
Martha Rose Davidson, A rt History
John Charles Dean, History
Elizabeth DeLaHunt,
English Literature
Deborah DeMott, History
Beatrice Diebold, History
Robert Scott DiPrete, Philosophy
Jean Adrianne Dirks, Psychology
Peter Dodge, English Literature
Jannette Domingo*!
Political Science-International
Relations

DEGREES CONFERRED
Christine Marie Doty,
Political Science
Frank Easterbrook, Political Science
Jonathan Ellis*, Economics
Israela Ettenberg, Philosophy
Eileen Ruth Farrell,
Sociology-Anthropology
John Richard Fields, Physics
Sharon Gail Finley, Greek
Jennifer Will Fleischaker, Russian
David R. Foster, Economics
Mary Catherine Fowler, Zoology
Carolyn Ellis Frick, English Literature
Timothy Pishon Gardner,
Political Science
Byron Fritts Golden, Biology
Mary Josephine Good, Religion
Bartlett Lee Grahl, English Literature
Christine Behrens Grahl, French
Jacob Lee Graves, English Literature
Wilbert Joseph Greenhouse, Jr.,
Economics
Michael Paul Greenwald,
Sociology-Anthropology
Sarah Gregory, Biology
William Evans Greiner, History
Gary Edward Gross, History
Eliot Lee Grossman, Philosophy
Carl Eric Gulotta, Chemistry
Dean Francis Hanley, Chemistry
Jeanne Elsie Harrison, Mathematics
Laura Jean Hassler,
Sociology-Anthropology
Ida Hay, Botany
Dahrl Louise Hill, Biology
Alan S. Hollister, Chemistry
Duncan Twiford Hollomon,
Political Science
William James Holt, Zoology
Elizabeth Kathryn Hood, Philosophy
Joseph Irving Horowitz, History
Mary Louise Hough,
English Literature
John Douglas Howard, Music
Meredith Hunt, Religion

Ronald David Hurt, Political Science
Anne Elizabeth Jones, History
Noble Sidney Jones, Chemistry
Fania Davis Jordan*, French
Kathleen Karkut, A rt History
Raymond Allen Kelly,
English Literature
Vinit Khosla, Economics
James B. Kimmel, Economics
Deborah Kirk, Latin
Benjamin Kuipers, Mathematics
William Eliot Ladd, History
Nancy Monroe Leiser,
English Literature
Bradley N. Lemke, Zoology
Lucinda M. Lewis, Economics
Martha S. Lewis*, English Literature
Karen Kristine Lind, A rt History
Bruce Edward Lohman,
Chemistry and Music
Janice Margaret Lohr,
Sociology-Anthropology
Robert Allen Lohr,
Economics and Political
Science-International Relations
John William Loven, Psychology
Victoria McK. Lundquist, Zoology
Joanne Luoto*, Zoology
Mary Diane Lusk, Psychology
Robert Stewart Lykens,
English Literature
Beth Ann Maier, Zoology
Stephen Robert Marion, Economics
Janet Eileen Mather,
Sociology-Anthropology
Guy Scott McLean, English Literature
Ruth Netta McNeill,
Sociology-Anthropology
Robert Elliott Mellman, Economics
Barbara Diane Merrill, Economics
Harvey S. Miller, Psychology
Louis R. Miller, English Literature
Terry Ann Miller, Spanish
Seymour Moscovitzt,
English Literature

*As of the Class of 1969

219

DEGREES CONFERRED
Gary Lawrence Moss, Economics
Michael Namiki, English Literature
Susan Nayfield, Chemistry
Anne Linda Newman, Biology
Margaret Ellen Nordstrom,
Political Science-International
Relations
Kevin Lee Northrup, Mathematics
Karen Kristina Nygaard, German
Chloe Mary O ’Gara, Psychology
Joyce Margaret Olum, German
R. Michael O ’Neal, History
Patricia Lynn O ’Regan,
Sociology-Anthropology
Lawrence Gilbert Palmer, Physics
Ann Jameson Peet, Russian
Paul Edward Prusiner, Chemistry
Elizabeth Raleigh, English Literature
Jeffrey Brian Remmel, Mathematics
Christopher C. Richter, Economics
Doris Ring, French
Lance Jeffrey Rips, Psychology
Grant Alden Ritter, Mathematics
Alan Joel Robin, Psychology
James Adams Robinson, Economics
Dean Howard Roemmich, Physics
Diana Roose, Psychology
Myra Elizabeth Rose,
Chemistry and Biology
David William Rosenbaum,
Philosophy
Caroline Robinson Sanders,
English Literature
Andrew Schaefer, German
Elizabeth Schairer, History
Jessica Gross Schairer,
Sociology-Anthropology
William B. Schendel, History
Aaron Schwartz, English Literature
Michael Henry Seligmann, Psychology
Roy James Shanker, Physics
Kathryn Louise Sharp,
Sociology-Anthropology
Freda Foh Shen, Political Science
t As of the Class of 1968
*As of the Class of 1969

220

Roland W. Sherman,
Sociology-Anthropology
Allen Mark Shlaifer, Latin
William Ivan Shorter, Mathematics
Irene Marsha Silverblatt,
Sociology-Anthropology
Ruth Stein Singleton, Art History
Boyd Justin Slomoff, Psychology
Ann Benedict Smith, Psychology
Charles B. Spadoni, Economics
John Hannum Stevens, Economics
Alexandra Stevenson,
English Literature
Richard Jerome Stone, Religion
Artley Swift**, Religion
Akiko Takahashi, A rt History
Avery Taylor, English Literature
G. Carol Teets, English Literature
Tin Swe Thant, Political Science
Anne Mee Thompson, Chemistry
Ellen Rosalie Thompson, Mathematics
Stephen B. Trippel, Psychology
Seth Tyler, Biology
Virginia Branch van der Bogert,
Sociology-Anthropology
Bridget Van Gronigen, Biology
Howard L. Vickery, II,
Sociology-Anthropology
Susan Vivell, History
Thomas White Warrington,
Psychology
Phillips Cromwell Watson,
English Literature
Helene Silverblatt Weber,
Sociology-Anthropology
Linda Janine Wells, Psychology
Richard Ellery Welsh, Psychology
Wendell Walter Willard,
Sociology-Anthropology
John Clark Willett, Physics
Carol Mae Williams, French
Gary Philip Williams, Psychology
Michael Charles Wing,
English Literature

DEGREES CONFERRED
Morton Emanuel Winston, Psychology
Consuelo Staisey Woodhead,
English Literature
Anand Alan Yang, History
Tuggelin Biccard Yourgrau,
Philosophy

Arlene Zarembka, Economics
Barbara Marie Zaveruha,
Sociology-Anthropology
Paul William Zelnick, Biology

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
Terrence L. Burch, Engineering
Manuel J. Casanova, Engineering
James Monroe Foltz, Engineering
Mark Steven Goldman, Engineering
John Julius Gorlich, Engineering
Bruce Hamilton, Engineering
Bentley P. Jenkins, Engineering
Michael C. Liu, Engineering

Stuart William Olson**,
Electrical Engineering
André Clement Pool, Engineering
Paul Lum Taylor, Engineering
Ferdinand M. Warren,
Electrical Engineering
Roy E. Wilber, Civil Engineering
Burt M. Zurer, Engineering

MASTER OF ARTS
Katherine Anne Bode, Psychology

HONORARY DEGREES
DOCTOR OF HUMANE LETTERS
Avram Noam Chomsky
DOCTOR OF SCIENCE
John Wainwright Evans, Jr.
DOCTOR OF LAWS
Clarence Russel Moll

DOCTOR OF LAWS
R. Stewart Rauch, Jr.
DOCTOR OF HUMANE LETTERS
Barbara Weisberger

tA s of the Class of 1968
*As of the Class of 1969

221

AW ARDS A N D D ISTIN C TIO N S
HONORS AWARDED BY THE VISITIN G EXAMINERS
HIGHEST HONORS:
Timothy P. Gardner, Joseph f j j Horowitz.
H IG H HONORS:
Brigitte S. Bell, John C. W. Bennett, A rthur R. Block, John W. Chaffee, John
C. Dean, Frank H. Easterbrook, John R. Fields, Benjamin J. Kuipers, Robert
E. Mellman, Ann J. Peet, Roland W. Sherman, Michael C. Wing.
HONORS:
A. Louisa Beck, John E. Briggs, Sarah L. Cotterill, Deborah A. DeMott, Jean
A. Dirks, David R. Foster, Mary J. Good, Duncan T. Hollomon, Deborah
Kirk, Nancy M. Leiser, Lucinda M. Lewis, Patricia L. O’Regan, Lawrence
G. Palmer, Jeffrey Brian Remmel, Grant A. Ritter, James A. Robinson,
Jessica G. Schairer, Freda Foh Shen, Charles B. Spadoni, G. Carol Teets,
Anne M. Thompson, Stephen B. Trippel, Howard L. Vickery, John C.
Willett, Gary P. Williams, Arlene Zarembka, Paul W. Zelnick.
DISTINCTION IN COURSE AWARDED BY FACULTY
Sarah Bancroft, Lauren N. Bernstein, Alan D. Brooks, Michael A. Brownlee,
John M. Cooper, James G. Cuthbertson, Eileen R. Farrell, Jennifer W.
Fleischaker, Bartlett L. Grahl, Mary L. Hough, Victoria McK. Lundquist,
Mary Diane Lusk, Margaret E. Nordstrom, Elizabeth Raleigh, Lance J. Rips,
Diana Roose, Seth Tyler, Richard E. Welsh, Morton E. Winston.
ELECTIONS TO HONORARY SOCIETIES
PHI BETA KAPPA:
Sarah Bancroft, Lauren N. Bernstein, A rthur R. Block, Alan D. Brooks, John
W. Chaffee, Beverly L. Clark, John M. Cooper, Frank Easterbrook, Eileen R.
Farrell, John R. Fields, Sharon G. Finley, Jennifer W. Fleischaker, Timothy
P. Gardner, Duncan T. Hollomon, Joseph I. Horowitz, Benjamin Kuipers,
Lucinda M. Lewis, Mary Diane Lusk, Robert E. Mellman, Lawrence G.
Palmer, Ann J. Peet, Elizabeth Raleigh, Jeffrey B. Remmel, Lance J. Rips,
Grant A. Ritter, Diana Roose, Roland W. Sherman, Charles B. Spadoni,
Anne M. Thompson, Seth Tyler, John C. Willett, Morton E. Winston, Arlene
Zarembka.
SIGMA XI:
Douglas A. Bacon, Terrence L. Burch, John R. Fields, Bruce Hamilton, Rich­
ard R. Kaiser, Benjamin J. Kuipers, Lawrence G. Palmer, André C. Pool,
Jeffrey B. Remmel, Grant A. Ritter, Anne M. Thompson, Seth Tyler, John
C. Willett.
SIGMA TAU:
Terrence L. Burch, Bruce Hamilton, André C. Pool, Roy E. Wilber.
SWARTHMORE COLLEGE FELLOWSHIP AWARDS
The Hannah A. Leedom Fellowship to John Charles Dean.

222

AWARDS

AND

DISTINCTIONS

The Joshua Lippincott Fellowship to John William Chaffee.
The Lucretia Mott Fellowship to Sarah Bancroft.
The Martha Tyson Fellowship to Beverly Lyon Clark, Janet Mather, Ellen
Thompson.
SPECIAL AWARDS
The Ivy Award to Arthur R. Block.
The Oak Leaf Award to Susan Vivell.
The McCabe Engineering Award to James M. Foltz.
The Sarah Kaighn Cooper Scholarship to Paul L. Shechtman.
The Phi Beta Kappa Prize to David J. Scheidlinger.
The Brand Blanshard Prize to Robert E. Heinaman.
The A. Edward Newton Library Prize to Francis L. Randolph.
The Ella Frances Bunting Poetry, Reading Contest: first prize, Don A. Mizell;
second prize, Dennis A. Small; third prizes, M. Denise Dennis and Bertrand
R. Yourgrau.
The William Plumer Potter Public Speaking Fund Awards:
The Potter One-Act Play Contest: prize awarded to John Loven.
The Potter Fiction Contest: first prize, Richard Chandler; second prize,
Bertrand R. Yourgrau; third prize, Jonathan P. Levin.
The Lois Morrell Poetry Award to Richard Chandler.
The John Russell Hayes Poetry Prizes: first prize, Arthur P. Johnson; second
prize, Christine Grahl.
The Academy of American Poets Award to Alan B. Brooks.
The May E. Parry Memorial Award to Elizabeth Schairer.
The Scott Award to Giles K. Kemp.

223

ENROLLMENT OF STUDENTS BY CLASSES 1969-70
Seniors
Juniors
Sophomores
Freshmen
Total Undergraduates
Special Students
Graduate Students
Totals

Men Women

Total

138
118
179
180
615
5
0
620

230
219
320
330
1,099
12
3
1,114

92
101
141
150
484
7
3
494

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION 1969-70
Pennsylvania
New York
New Jersey
Maryland
California
Connecticut
Ohio
Massachusetts
Delaware
Virginia
Illinois
North Carolina
District of Columbia
Florida
Indiana
Michigan
Minnesota
Texas
Washington
Missouri
Wisconsin
Colorado
Hawaii
Tennessee
New Hampshire
Oregon
Vermont
Georgia
Iowa
New Mexico
Alabama
Rhode Island
Maine
Mississippi
South Carolina
Oklahoma
Virgin Islands
Arkansas
Canal Zone
Kentucky
Louisiana

224

225
169
82
59
57
53
48
46
29
29
28
16
15
15
15
13
12
12
12
9
9
8
8
8
7
7
7
6
6
6
5
5
4
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2

Nebraska
North Dakota
Arizona
West Virginia
Wyoming
Total U.S.A.

2
2
1
1
1
1,059

11
Canada
3
England
3
Hong Kong
3
Japan
3
Mexico
3
Thailand
2
India
2
Italy
2
Lebanon
2
Nigeria
1
Bermuda
1
Brazil
1
Chile
1
Colombia
1
France
1
Germany
1
Greece
1
Guatemala
1
Indonesia
1
Jamaica
1
Libya
1
Morocco
Nicaragua
1
1
Peru
Portugal
1
Saudi Arabia
1
Seychelles
1
Spain
1
1
Turkey
Uruguay
1
Venezuela
1
Total from abroad
55
Grand Total
1,114

IN D E X
Absence from Examinations, 72
Academic Honesty, 73
Academic Requirements, Committee on,
71, 207
Addams, Jane, Peace Collection (See
Swarthmore College Peace Collection)
Administrative Officers, 209-214
A d m is s io n P rocedure , 21-25
Application Dates, 23
Scholastic Aptitude and Achievement
Tests, 23-24
School Subjects Recommended, 22
Advanced Degrees, 74-75
Advanced Placement, 25
Advanced Standing, 25
Advisers, 46
Alumni Association, Officers of, 194
Alumni Council, 194-195
Alumni Office, 47, 213
Arthur Hoyt Scott Horticultural Foun­
dation, 16
Art History, 83-86
Art, Studio, 86-88
Arts Center, 12
Asian Studies, 64-66
Astronomical Observatory, 12,88
Astronomy, Courses in, 88-89
Athletic Fields, see Map, 229
Attendance at Classes, 70
Automobiles, Regulations concerning, 48
Awards and Prizes, 77-78, 222-223
Bachelor of Arts Degree, 74
Bachelor of Science Degree, 74
Barnard Music Fund, 17
Bartol Research Foundation, 68
Benjamin West House, 17,229
Benjamin West Lecture, 17
Biology, Courses in, 90-96
Black Cultural Center, 44
Black Studies, 96-97
Board of Managers, Committees of, 193
Board of Managers, Members of, 191-193
Botany, Courses in, 92-94
Buildings, see Map, 229
Calendar, College, 5-6
Career Planning, 46
Chemistry, Courses in, 98-100
Churches, 44
Classics, Courses in, 101-106
Collection, 44
College Entrance Examinations, 23-24
College Jobs, 39

Committees of the Board of Managers, 193
Committees of the Faculty, 207-208
Comprehensive Examinations, 56,74
Computer Center, 12
Cooper (William J.) Foundation, 15,16
Cooperation with Neighboring
Institutions, 67
Corporation, Officers of, 191
Course Advisers, 46,56
Courses of Instruction, 83-188
Creative Arts, 67
Curriculum, 55ff
Cutting (Bronson M.) Collection, 14
Dance, 51
Degrees Offered, 74-75
Degrees Conferred, 218-221
Dining Hall, 44
Directions for Correspondence, 2
Directions for Reaching the College, 24
Distinction in course, 58
Divisions and Departments, 208
Dormitories, 43
Dramatics, 51
duPont (Pierre S.) Science Building, 12
Economics, Courses in, 106-109
Education, Courses in, 110-111
Educational Program, 55ff
Emeritus Professors, 196-197
Engineering, Courses in, 111-121
Engineering, Degrees in, 74-75,112
English Literature, Courses in, 121-125
Enrollment Statistics, 224
Entrance Requirements, 21-24
Examination Regulations, 72
Examinations, College Board, 23-24
Exclusion from College, 4 Î 73
Expenses, 26
Extra-Curricular Activities, 50
Faculty, Members of, 196-206
Faculty Regulations, 48, 70-73
Fees (Tuition, Residence, etc), 26,75
Fellowships, 79-80
Financial Aid, 28
Fine Arts, see Art History
Foreign Students, 224
Foreign Study, 68-69
Fraternities, 52
French, Courses in, 142-145
Friends Historical Library, 13,211
Friends Meeting, 44

225

INDEX
Geographical Distribution of Students,
224
German, Courses in, 146-148
Grades, 71-72
Graduate Study, 74-75
Graduation, Requirements for, 74
Greek, Courses in, 101
Health, Care of Students, 44-45
History, Courses in, 126-132
Honors, Reading for, 58-61
Honors Examiners, 216-217.
Housing, 43
Insurance, 44
Insurance, Accident and Sickness, 27,45
Inter-Disciplinary Work, 64
International Relations, Courses in, 132,
168
Language Laboratory, 12
Latin, Courses in, 102-103
Libraries, 13-14, 210-211
Linguistics, 133-134
Loans to Students, 39
Managers, Board of, 191-192
Map of College Grounds, 229
Martin Biological Laboratory, 12
Mathematics, Courses in, 134-138
McCabe Library, 13
Meeting House, 44
Men’s Student Government, 49
Music, Courses in, 51,152-156
National Scholarships, 29
News Office, 47
Objectives and Purposes, 9
Observatory, Astronomical, 12, 88
Overstreet Fund, 17
Philosophy, Courses in, 156-160
Physical Education for Men, 161-162
Physical Education for Women, 162-163
Physical Education Requirements, 72;
161-163
Physics, Courses in, 164-167
Plan of College Grounds, 229
Poetry workshop, 124
Political Science, Courses in, 167-174

226

Potter Collection of Recorded Literature,
14
Pre-Medical Program, 66-67
Prizes, 77-78, 223
P rogram of S tudy , 55-67
For Freshmen and Sophomores, 56-57
For Juniors and Seniors, 57-61
Honors Work, 58-61
Pre-Medical Program, 66-67
Psychology, Courses in, 174-178
Public Speaking Prizes, 78,223
Religion, Courses in, 178-182
Religious Life, 10,44
Requirements for Admission, 21-24
Requirements for Graduation, 74
Residence, Regulations concerning, 43
Russian, Courses in, 149-150
Scholarships, 28-38
Scholastic Aptitude Test, 23-24
Scott (Arthur Hoyt) Horticultural Foun­
dation, 16
Sharpies Dining Hall, 44
Social Committee, 50
Sociology and Anthropology, 182-188
Spanish, Courses in, 150-152
Spock (Betty Dougherty) Memorial Fund,
15
Sproul Observatory, 12, 82
States, Summary of Students by, 224
Student Activities Bulletin, 52
Student Council, 49
Student Employment, 39
Studio Arts, 50, 86-88
Study Abroad, 68-69
Summer School Work, 72
Swarthmore College Peace Collection, 14
Tarble Social Center, 44
Theater Workshop, 124
Transfer, Application for, 25
Tuition and Other Fees, 26
Vocational Advising, 46
West, Benjamin, Lecture, 17
Women’s Student Government, 49
Worth Health Center, 45
Zoology, Courses in, 94-96

34

üvl

p B flT J ' ' S

H
I
■ li

jgsiHHS
W fw lH

fii^ S

W

- ï:0 J S M l 1 8 W B F Ü

c 37 &B P-- H
W BÈÌ

43

w

Up
*7.

f

«

S S *

J1 I

H Pg 9

fcSSs: ^ à mih W
^

B

IliHfii

l

H

S i;

27

Key to the Map
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Swarthmore College
Campus

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Parrish Hall
Parrish Hall Annex
Du Pont Science Building
Hicks Hall
Bartol Foundation
President’s House
W hittier House
Friends Meeting House
Arts Center
Pearson Theatre
Wilcox Gallery
Trotter Hall
Beardsley Hall
Martin Biological Laboratory
and Animal Laboratory
Sharpies Swimming Pool
Hall Gymnasium
Scott Foundation Building
Scott Outdoor Auditorium
Sproul Observatory
Clothier Memorial
McCabe Library '
Cunningham House
Bond Memorial and Lodges
Benjamin W est House
W orth Health Center

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45

Tarble Social Center
Sharpies Dining Hall
Lamb-Miller Field House
Clothier Fields
Prep Gymnasium
Bam
Service Building
Heating Plant
Hockey Fields
Tennis Courts
Proposed site of music and studio
arts building
Proposed site of women’s
athletic facilities
Site of squash courts
Lilac Collection
Tree Peonies
Magnolias
Crabapples
Pinetum
Rhododendrons and azaleas
Dean Bond Rose Garden
Scott Foundation Nursery
and test plots
Black Cultural Center

Dormitories
A Dana Dormitory
B Hallowell Dormitory
C W harton Hall
D Willets Dormitory
E W orth Dormitory
F Palmer Hall
G Pittenger Hall
H Roberts Hall
J Ashton House
K Woolman House
M Mary Lyon Buildings
P Professors’ Residences
Q Employees’ Houses

Fraternity Lodges
a
b
c
d
e

Kappa Sigma Pi
Tau Alpha Omicron
Phi Sigma Kappa
Delta Upsilon
Phi Omicron Psi